@book{maps:01,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-20}},
 year      = {{1988}},
 volume    = {{1}},
 size      = {{199kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 88.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:01-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-10}},
 year      = {{1988}},
 volume    = {{1}},
 size      = {{126kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening en Mededelingen;
	Introductie deelnemers;
	Brainstorming {\TeX} aandachtsgebieden;
	Instellen werkgroepen voor de aandachtsgebieden;
	Formele zaken;
	Rondvraag;
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:01-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1988}},
 volume    = {{1}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Listserver}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:01-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{15-16}},
 year      = {{1988}},
 volume    = {{1}},
 size      = {{41kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}HaX}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}HaX, mailing list, listserver}},
 abstract  = {{Information on subscribing to {\TeX}HaX.}}
}

@article{maps:01-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{17-20}},
 year      = {{1988}},
 volume    = {{1}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} publications information}},
 keywords  = {{publications, mailing list, listserver}},
 abstract  = {{Information on {\TeX} mailing lists.}}
}

@book{maps:02,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-22}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{317kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 89.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:02-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-12}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1989/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Agenda bijeenkomst 23 juni 1988;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Ledenbestand status en contributie;
	Vragen gebruikers;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag;
	Presentaties;
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:02-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandse {\TeX} gebruikersgroep}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:02-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Besluitenlijst}},
 keywords  = {{NTG decisions}},
}

@article{maps:02-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Lijst actiepunten}},
 keywords  = {{actions}},
}

@article{maps:02-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo de Klerk}},
 title     = {{VAX DOCUMENT}},
 keywords  = {{VAX DOCUMENT}},
 abstract  = {{VAX DOCUMENT is een commerciële toepassing die op {\TeX}
	gebaseerd is. Aanvankelijk binnen Digital Equipment Co.
	ontwikkeld voor intern gebruik voor productie van alle VAX/VMS
	documentatie en s/w produkten, maar nu ook in
	gebruikerslicensie voor VAX/VMS gebruikers verkrijgbaar.
	Vanaf VMS V4 is het resultaat hiervan te zien.}}
}

@article{maps:02-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19-20}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{71kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo de Klerk}},
 title     = {{Boeken over {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{book review}},
 abstract  = {{Bespreking `Einführung in {\TeX}' (Norbert Schwartz);
	`{\TeX} für Fortgeschrittene' (Wolfgang Appelt);
	`{\LaTeX} eine Einführung' (Helmut Kopka);
	`Kompaktführer {\LaTeX}' (Reinhard Wonneberger)}}
}

@article{maps:02-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{21-22}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{2}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL ledenlijst}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@book{maps:03,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-68}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{943kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 89.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:03-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-8}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{125kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1989/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 24 november 1988;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Verenigingszaken;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Vragen gebruikers;
	Rondvraag;
	Presentatie Océ 6750 ({\TeX})-laserprinter;
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:03-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandstalige {\TeX} gebruikersgroep}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:03-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Besluitenlijst}},
 keywords  = {{NTG decisions}},
}

@article{maps:03-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Lijst actiepunten}},
 keywords  = {{actions}},
}

@article{maps:03-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{69kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Ontvangen local guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}},
 keywords  = {{local guide}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}
}

@article{maps:03-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:03-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-18}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{74kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:03-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19-24}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Vragen van gebruikers}},
 keywords  = {{user questions}},
 abstract  = {{Deze bijlage bevat de `vragen van de gebruikers' die gesteld
	zijn ten tijde van de NTG vergadering van mei 1989.}}
}

@article{maps:03-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-28}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{115kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Marius Broeren, Jan van Knippenberg}},
 title     = {{High Quality Printing of {\TeX}-DVI}},
 keywords  = {{high quality printing, Océ, laser printers, Digital Equipment}},
 abstract  = {{Deze bijlage bevat de presentatie van Océ, gehouden op de
	NTG bijeenkomst van 11 mei 1989.}}
}

@article{maps:03-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{29-30}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{90kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet Roes}},
 title     = {{A dBase III+ programme to generate a journal}},
 keywords  = {{dBase}},
 abstract  = {{This is a note about the implementation of a combination
	of dBase III+ and {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:03-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{31-42}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{243kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} en SGML}},
 keywords  = {{math, SGML, tables}},
 abstract  = {{The markup of document elements via SGML is demonstrated
	with a few examples.}}
}

@article{maps:03-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{43-44}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{78kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Geerd Haayer}},
 title     = {{Ervaringen met fotozetters}},
 keywords  = {{fotozetters, Linotronic, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Sinds enige tijd bestaat de mogelijkheid om bij A.J.
	Scholten — Transcripta fotozetsel van {\TeX}/dvi-files te
	laten maken. Het grote voordeel van Transcripta is dat er
	uitsluitend met {\TeX} gewerkt wordt en derhalve zeer veel
	deskundigheid bij het bedrijf in huis is. Men beschikt
	over een Linotronic 100, die een resolutie levert van 1270
	dpi.}}
}

@article{maps:03-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{45-48}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{140kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Verslag GUTenberg (16/17 mei 1989)}},
 keywords  = {{GUTenberg, report}},
 abstract  = {{Thema: Grafische zaken en (La){\TeX}, met name picture omgeving
	en PostScript.}}
}

@article{maps:03-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-56}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{201kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{One year NTG; presentatie NTG in Utrecht en Karlsruhe}},
 keywords  = {{activities, NTG, Euro{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A history of the start of the NTG is given along with a
	survey of this first years' activities. The relation of NTG
	to other TUGs is also dealt with.}}
}

@article{maps:03-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-60}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Verslag Nederlandse {\TeX} dagen (29/30 juni 1989)}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, meeting}},
 abstract  = {{The Dutch {\TeX} Users Group, in Dutch `Nederlandse {\TeX}
	Gebruikersgroep' or NTG, was started about one year ago in
	Groningen. At the meeting in the autumn of 1988 it was
	decided to have a first presentation to `the outside
	world' in the summer of 1989.}}
}

@article{maps:03-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{61-68}},
 year      = {{1989}},
 volume    = {{3}},
 size      = {{191kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Verslag Stanford conferentie (20/23 aug 1989)}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, WEB, literate programming, math reviews, status {\TeX}, {\TeX}3, {\LaTeX}, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Inhoudelijk:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item {\TeX} wordt aangepast o.a. ligaturen en \verb|\language|;
	\item {\LaTeX} aanpassing wordt niet door Leslie Lamport opgepakt, Frank M?
	\end{itemize}
	Organisatorisch:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Lokale voorzitters vice presidents van BoD van TUG;
	\item TUGboat artikelen nu ook met Duitse samenvatting;
	\item Michael F coordinator multilingual aspecten;
	\item {\TeX}HaX distributie onder auspiciën van TUG.
	\end{itemize}
	Producten:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item {\TeX} templates bij Hope Hamilton;
	\item Wordperfect-{\LaTeX} macro's bij Anita Hoover (of mij);
	\item Michael D's Gentle {\TeX} beschikbaar (of mij);
	\item KWIC van {\LaTeX} en {\TeX} opdrachten beschikbaar als Bell rapport;
	\item Arbor{\TeX}t's The Publisher volwassen.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@book{maps:04,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-88}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{546kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 90.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:04-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-9}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{60kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1990/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 11 mei 1989;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Verenigingszaken;
	Rondvraag;
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:04-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{8kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Besluitenlijst}},
 keywords  = {{NTG decisions}},
}

@article{maps:04-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{8kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender}},
 keywords  = {{calendar}},
}

@article{maps:04-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-12}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:04-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Begroting NTG 1990}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:04-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Ontvangen local guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}},
 keywords  = {{local guide}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}
}

@article{maps:04-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{16-18}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:04-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19-22}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:04-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{23-26}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Vragen van gebruikers}},
}

@article{maps:04-10,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{27-28}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG Software Distributie Service}},
 keywords  = {{software distributie}},
}

@article{maps:04-11,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{29-30}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG DOS-diskette Distributie Service}},
 keywords  = {{DOS, disks, distribution}},
}

@article{maps:04-12,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{31-32}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement {\TeX}90 Conference}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Cork}},
 abstract  = {{The 1990 {\TeX} meeting in Europe is the fifth such conference
	organised since 1985. It also breaks new ground as the first to
	be a {\TeX} Users Group (TUG) meeting outside North America. The
	{\TeX} computer typesetting program is now widely established as
	the de facto standard in scientific, educational and commercial
	use for the setting of documents requiring very high standards
	of typographic control, particularly technical documents, and
	for applications where high quality, portability and
	device-independence are of importance.}}
}

@article{maps:04-13,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-34}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan, Theo Jurriens, Jan Maasdam, J. Bleeker}},
 title     = {{Announcement SGML \& {\TeX} Conference}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, TUG conference, courses}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of joint SGML User Group Holland and NTG meeting.
	Several courses are offered. Two parallel streams of lectures,
	one mainly devoted to SGML and the other to {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:04-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35-42}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{C.G. van der Laan, T.A. Jurriens, J. Maasdam, J. Bleeker}},
 title     = {{Courses SGML \& {\TeX} Conference}},
 keywords  = {{courses, SGML, conference}},
}

@article{maps:04-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{43-46}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL discussies}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:04-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-51}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Working group 1: Education; State of affairs}},
 keywords  = {{working group, education}},
 abstract  = {{An impression of what has been done by members of the WG,
	and others, is given. Members: C.G. van der Laan (coord.),
	T. Biegstraaten, G. Haayer, J.R. Luyten, P. Tutelaers.
	Known — through december 1989 — courseware and {\TeX}-related
	(Dutch) courses are mentioned in appendices.}}
}

@article{maps:04-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{52}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{7kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 7: PC-zaken}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}
}

@article{maps:04-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-54}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{11kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 10: SGML-{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{working group, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{An impression of what has been done by members of the WG is
	given. Members: C.G. van der Laan (coord.), T. Biegstraaten,
	J. Bleeker, D.C. Coleman, J. Grootenhuis. Prospects: Publishing
	houses strongly believe in the `marriage' of SGML and {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:04-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{55-56}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'}},
 keywords  = {{working group, dutch}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'.}}
}

@article{maps:04-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{57-60}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 14: Communicatie}},
 keywords  = {{working group, communication}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 14: Communicatie.}}
}

@article{maps:04-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-66}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{The Development of National {\LaTeX} styles}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, national styles}},
 abstract  = {{In its autumn 1988 meeting, the Dutch {\TeX} users group
	(NTG) established a working group (number 13) that was to
	concentrate on the problems involved in the use of {\TeX}
	for Dutch texts. Since then the working group, which
	includes the authors, has created a number of style
	options for {\LaTeX} that remedy some common problems
	with the non-English use of {\LaTeX}, and is on its way
	developing document styles that are compatible with the
	standard styles, but have a layout that is more palatable
	for Dutch users. In this article we treat implementation
	aspects of the styles and style options, and we discuss
	some matters of layout.}}
}

@article{maps:04-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-70}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{Unusual paragraph shapes}},
 keywords  = {{paragraph shapes}},
 abstract  = {{Although the {\TeX}book states that {\TeX}'s paragraph
	mechanism `can be harnessed to a surprising variety of tasks',
	the strangest paragraph shapes that I have implement use no
	feature of the line-breaking algorithm. Instead, I have found
	that the control sequences \verb|\everypar| and \verb|\lastbox|
	are extremely powerful tools. I give three examples of this.}}
}

@article{maps:04-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{71-72}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{9kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Ingekomen brief}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX} cursussen}},
}

@article{maps:04-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{73-76}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams, Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX} 89}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference}},
 abstract  = {{Algemeen:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Polen stal de harten;
	\end{itemize}
	Organisatorisch:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Veranderingen {\LaTeX}, gecoordineerd door Frank M. en Jan R.;
	\item Teaching {\TeX} in discussie;
	\item Cork bijeenkomst voorbereid;
	\item Zowel PD als commerciële {\TeX} aktiviteiten nodig;
	\item Een Nederlandse vertaling van Schwarz's Einführung in
	{\TeX} is op komst;
	\item Leerzaam handout voor potentiële DANTE leden, inclusief
	questionnaire;
	\item Quixote Oriental Fonts project (Hosek);
	\end{itemize}
	Producten:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Schroder's changebars macro;
	\item Thull's MS-DOS PD {\TeX};
	\item {\TeX}-omgevingen: PC{\TeX}E (MS-DOS), {\TeX}E (AOS/VS),
	CEO-{\TeX}E (Data General).
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:04-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-82}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Teaching {\TeX}: Critics \& {\LaTeX} proposal}},
 keywords  = {{education, courseware, modules}},
 abstract  = {{Some critics — mainly {\LaTeX} based — on the approach
	are given: {\TeX}nically driven instead of result driven.
	Also is notified the omission of a general pedagogical
	method to be used. Furthermore, it is urged to have
	unified courseware. A set of {\LaTeX} courses is proposed.
	No test set is included. The underlying idea of having TUG
	certified courses world-wide is strongly endorsed.}}
}

@article{maps:04-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{83-88}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{4}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Wat is {\TeX}?}},
 abstract  = {{In de huidige tijd van WYSIWYG `desktop publishing'
	systemen lijkt het vreemd een systeem te propageren met
	honderden, vaak ingewikkelde, instructies. Wat het
	tekstopmaaksysteem {\TeX} desondanks aantrekkelijk maakt,
	is het feit dat het programmeerbaar is: de
	basisinstructies kunnen worden samengevoegd tot zeer
	gecompliceerde instructies die een eenmaal ontworpen
	opmaak geheel automatisch feilloos reproduceren. Hierdoor
	hoeft de gebruiker uitsluitend nog de structuur van het
	document aan te geven en niet de vormgeving, het
	uiterlijk, ervan. Met deze gedachte sluit {\TeX} nauw aan
	bij recente ontwikkelingen in de uitgeverswereld omtrent
	SGML.}}
}

@book{maps:05,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-146}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{1481kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 90.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:05-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-9}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1990/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 23 november 1989;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Verenigingszaken;
	Rondvraag;
	NTG presentaties;
	Sluiting;}}
}

@article{maps:05-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{8kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Besluitenlijst}},
 keywords  = {{NTG decisions}},
}

@article{maps:05-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{8kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender}},
 keywords  = {{calendar}},
}

@article{maps:05-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-11}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen NTG}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:05-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Ontvangen Local Guides en andere {\TeX} documenten}},
 keywords  = {{local guide}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht ontvangen local guides.}}
}

@article{maps:05-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-15}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:05-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{16-20}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:05-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{21-26}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} stuff at cs.ruu.nl}},
 keywords  = {{FTP, archives, mailserver, software}},
 abstract  = {{Here is a brief description of our archive of {\TeX} stuff.
	The archive is available by FTP and by mail server. It
	contains various things, a.o. Atari ST software, GNU
	software, some Unix software and a lot of {\TeX} things. I
	will concentrate on the {\TeX} stuff in this message.}}
}

@article{maps:05-09,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{27-28}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG Software Distributie Service}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, distribution, software}},
 abstract  = {{Deze bijlage beschrijft een aantal distributie-services die
	door enkele NTG leden worden uitgevoerd.}}
}

@article{maps:05-10,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{29-30}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG DOS-diskette Distributie Service}},
 keywords  = {{MS-DOS, disks, distribution}},
}

@article{maps:05-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-34}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS, Atari}},
 abstract  = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}
}

@article{maps:05-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{35-36}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Werkgroep 8: NTG gebruikersdag; SGML-{\TeX} Seminar}},
 keywords  = {{working group, SGML, seminar}},
 abstract  = {{Terugblik op organisatie.}}
}

@article{maps:05-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{37-38}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Working group 13: `Neerlandica'}},
 keywords  = {{Neerlandica}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 13: `Neerlandica'.}}
}

@article{maps:05-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{39-42}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Osborne}},
 title     = {{SGML-{\TeX} conference, Groningen}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, conference}},
 abstract  = {{For their second full-day international meeting, the
	Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep (NTG) organised, in
	conjunction with the Dutch SGML Users Group, a conference
	intended to focus interest on the use of {\TeX} and
	SGMLtogether. On August 31st, approximately 100 delegates
	from both `camps' attended the day's events in Groningen,
	with what seemed a good balance between SGML-ers and
	{\TeX}ies.}}
}

@article{maps:05-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-48}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Joop van Gent}},
 title     = {{Two faces of {\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{databases, document retrieval, searching, logical structure}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} as a programming tool for advanced document retrieval
	systems.}}
}

@article{maps:05-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-54}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{86kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach, Rainer Schöpf}},
 title     = {{Towards {\LaTeX} 3.0}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}3}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX} is a very valuable tool for document composition.
	As a {\TeX} macro package, it is unique in its concept of
	logical commands, at the same time retaining enough
	flexibility with visually oriented commands to allow the
	user a relatively easy correction of an automatically
	chosen layout. This fact makes it far superior to the
	plain and AMS-{\TeX} macro packages when it comes to
	professional applications. Therefore the {\LaTeX}
	re-implementation project is certainly one of the most
	important efforts to `expand {\TeX}'s horizon'. This is the
	place to link {\TeX} with the modern developments like
	SGML. This paper describes the current status of the
	re-implementation of {\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:05-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{55-66}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{211kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Amy Hendrickson}},
 title     = {{Getting {\TeX}nical: Insight into {\TeX} Macro Writing Techniques}},
 keywords  = {{techniques}},
 abstract  = {{Most of us understand the basic form of {\TeX} macros but
	that understanding alone is often inadequate when we need
	to solve certain problems. We need additional insight to
	be able to develop methods of passing information, moving
	text with changed catcodes, preserving blank lines, and
	more. Writing a large macro package brings in a new set of
	issues: how toavoid bumping into implementation
	restrictions, e.g., constraints of hash size, string size,
	and others; how to make a pleasant user interface; how to
	make your code as concise as possible. Some of the
	techniques to be discussed here include making a macro
	with a variable number of arguments; changing catcodes in
	macros, defining a macro whose argument is intentionally
	never used; conserving hash size by using counters instead
	of newifs; csname techniques and non-outer dynamic
	allocation; and table making techniques. Finally, some
	suggestions are included on methods to use when developing
	new macros.}}
}

@article{maps:05-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-70}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout, Andries Lenstra}},
 title     = {{The Document Style Designer as a Separate Entity}},
 keywords  = {{style design}},
 abstract  = {{An argument for the need for a programmable meta format:
	a format that introduces a new syntactic level in {\TeX}
	for document style designers.}}
}

@article{maps:05-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{71-74}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout, Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{The Dutch national {\LaTeX} effort}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, dutch}},
 abstract  = {{In this article an overview is given of the activities of
	working group 13 (WG 13) of the `Nederlandstalige {\TeX}
	Gebruikersgroep' (Dutch {\TeX} Users Group). This working
	group is also called `Neerlandica', and is interested in
	anything that has something to do with using {\LaTeX} (and
	{\TeX}) in a non-American environment. The topics tackled so
	far range from the design of a page layout suitable for A4
	paper by adapting the American layout of article.sty to
	Dutch typographical tastes, to the implementation of a new
	letter style called `brief'.}}
}

@article{maps:05-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-84}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Barbara Beeton}},
 title     = {{TUGboat production: {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, and paste-up}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat, production}},
 abstract  = {{TUGboat has now completed more than ten years of
	publication. Starting with {\TeX}78 and an electrostatic
	printer and progressing through increasingly versatile
	software and hardware, the authors have kept us
	challenged, both with the content that the reader sees and
	the little tricks that happen `under the covers'. This
	talk will be a survey of some of the milestones of TUGboat
	production, our editorial philosophy, what we've learned
	about what {\TeX} can and cannot do, and some advice to
	authors and production editors of other publications.}}
}

@article{maps:05-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-88}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jeroen Soutberg}},
 title     = {{SGML and {\TeX} at Elsevier Science Publishers}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, Elsevier, publishers}},
 abstract  = {{Contents:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Introduction;
	\item ESP;
	\item Manuscript routing;
	\item Role of SGML;
	\item Role of ...{\TeX};
	\item Projects.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:05-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{89-90}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{NTG's second year}},
 keywords  = {{activities, NTG, Euro{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A survey of NTG's activities in its second year is
	enumerated.}}
}

@article{maps:05-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-92}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Joachim Lammarsch}},
 title     = {{Development of DANTE e.V.}},
 keywords  = {{Dante}},
}

@article{maps:05-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{93-98}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{71kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Verslag GUTenberg '90}},
 keywords  = {{GUTenberg}},
 abstract  = {{Waarnemingen/beslissingen:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Zusterclubs zijn automatisch lid van elkaar;
	\item DANTE en GUTenberg 100\% gegroeid;
	\item TUGlib wordt uitgebreid met {\TeX} bibliografie;
	\end{itemize}
	Producten/macros:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Zetten commutator diagrammen via {\LaTeX};
	\item Ook muziek zetten nu via {\TeX};
	\item Zetten van (ADA, ...) programma's;
	\item Zetten van bridge literatuur;
	\item Voor multilingual {\TeX}3.0 is ML{\TeX} nog nodig;
	\item {\TeX} in kleur?
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:05-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-102}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Board-of-Directors and Euro-Summit at Cork90}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, board-of-directors, Cork}},
 abstract  = {{TUG organizational:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item TUG is really open now;
	\item Working Groups will be sent off with better task
	\end{itemize}
	descriptions and reporting time schedules;
	\begin{itemize}
	\item How to fulfil better membership needs is proposed;
	\item A scholarly TUGboat and a separate newsletter is proposed;
	\end{itemize}
	Topical TUGboat issues are under consideration;
	\begin{itemize}
	\item No increased membership/postage fees for those outside USA;
	\item The dangling reciprocal membership question is near to a
	pilot study;
	\item BoD can operate faster because of adoption of voting by
	e-mail;
	\item An extended membership directory is asked for;
	\item A resource directory is asked for;
	\item Maintenance/evolution of {\TeX} etc. software must be
	handled by TUG and LUGs; DEK and LL are out of it!
	\item More attention will be paid to PR activities: Welcome
	c.q. Information/Demo packets will be prepared;
	\end{itemize}
	Euro-Summit:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Eastern and Western European countries will exchange
	information;
	\item A status report, Euro-Summit Cork90 (?), will appear with
	contact addresses and status reports.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:05-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{103-108}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{69kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier, Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Report European {\TeX} conference Cork90}},
 keywords  = {{conference, Cork, Euro{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The following was on at this joint TUG90 and Euro{\TeX}90
	meeting at Cork. Hypertext and {\TeX}. Cork encoding scheme
	for 8 bit fonts. Halftone output from {\TeX}. Macro writing
	in {\TeX}, especially Getting {\TeX}nical. The Dutch {\TeX}
	efforts were reported. The issue of a {\TeX} archive was
	raised again. Text around figures in {\LaTeX}. Document
	design and style development. Proposals for {\LaTeX}3.0.
	SGML and {\TeX} for tables and Math. Graphics and {\TeX},
	such as PiC{\TeX} use, tif format and pk files. Old german
	fonts. BiB{\TeX} requirements. Discussion of {\TeX} books. The
	question of {\TeX} at schools was raised.}}
}

@article{maps:05-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{109-112}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Huub Mulders}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} structuurschema's}},
 keywords  = {{filetypes, coherence, structure}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht van de structuur van {\TeX} en METAFONT en de
	bijbehorende bestandtypen.}}
}

@article{maps:05-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{113-114}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{The 1990 DECUS {\TeX} Collection}},
 keywords  = {{Decus}},
 abstract  = {{The DECUS Languages and Tools SIG Public Domain Working
	Group and the Electronic Publishing SIG {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}/WEB
	Working Group are proud to announce the 1990 DECUS {\TeX}
	Collection. This col-lection offers nearly everything a
	{\TeX} User would want on their system for {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:05-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-117}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{New books on {\TeX} (1)}},
 keywords  = {{book review}},
 abstract  = {{Review of `Introduction to {\TeX}' (Jost Krieger, Norbert
	Schwartz), `{\TeX} for the advanced' (Wolfgang Appelt),
	`{\TeX} for the impatient' (Paul Abrahams).}}
}

@article{maps:05-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{118-121}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{An indentation scheme}},
 keywords  = {{indentation, paragraph}},
 abstract  = {{Indentation is one of the simpler things in {\TeX}: if you
	leave one input line open you get a new paragraph, and it
	is indented unless you say \verb|\noindent|. And if you
	get tired of writing \verb|\noindent| all of the time, you
	declare \verb|\parindent=0pt| at the start of your
	document. Easy. More sophisticated approaches to
	indentation are possible, however. In this article I will
	sketch a quite general approach that can easily be
	incorporated in existing macro packages. For a better
	appreciation of what goes on, I will start with a tutorial
	section on what happens when {\TeX} starts a paragraph.}}
}

@article{maps:05-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{122-124}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{A parskip scheme}},
 keywords  = {{\parskip, \everypar, paragraph, skips}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I will present an approach that unifies
	the paragraph skip and the white spaces surroundingvarious
	environments. Since the macros given below make use of the
	\verb|\everypar| token list, this article may be seen as a
	sequel to an earlier paper on an indentation scheme, which
	is based on a similar principle. The \verb|\everypar|
	parameter was explained there.}}
}

@article{maps:05-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{125-140}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{158kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{SGML (,{\TeX} and ...)}},
 keywords  = {{SGML}},
 abstract  = {{What SGML (and {\TeX}) is all about is given in a nutshell.
	Markup of example document elements, by SGML and {\LaTeX},
	are provided. Coupling SGML to {\TeX} is considered by
	direct translation and by the intermediate procedural
	markup phase. Interfacing SGML to (La){\TeX} is also
	addressed. Some guidelines are provided in order to decide
	when SGML, or {\TeX} (alone, both, or neither) might be
	beneficial. It is a 3-in-1 paper: what is SGML and {\TeX}
	all about, examples of marked up copy in SGML and
	(La){\TeX} and the coupling issues, finished up with a
	literature compilation.}}
}

@article{maps:05-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{141-144}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{SGML en {\TeX} in scientific publishing}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, scientific publishing}},
 abstract  = {{Elsevier Science Publishershas for a few years
	investigated the possibility of accepting compuscripts, a
	manuscript in electronic form, created with {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}
	and a few other text processing systems, and converting
	these to SGMLform. This paper will discuss the current
	status of these activities, the reasons for converting
	compuscripts to SGMLform, and the various ways in which
	{\TeX} isused.}}
}

@article{maps:05-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{145-146}},
 year      = {{1990}},
 volume    = {{5}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Donald Knuth}},
 title     = {{The future of {\TeX} and METAFONT}},
 keywords  = {{future}},
 abstract  = {{My work on developing {\TeX}, METAFONT, and Computer Modern
	has come to an end. I will make no further changes except
	to correct extremely serious bugs.}}
}

@book{maps:06,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-117}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{1243kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 91.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:06-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-10}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{91kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1991/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 11 mei 1990;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Stand van zaken Europese samenwerking/TUG international;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Verenigingszaken;
	Rondvraag;
	SGML ({\TeX} and ...);
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:06-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{8kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender}},
 keywords  = {{calendar}},
}

@article{maps:06-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-12}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen NTG}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:06-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1990}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:06-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-16}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag 1990}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:06-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1991}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:06-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{18-20}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, mailing list}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:06-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{21-26}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:06-09,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{27-28}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1991/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} Nationaal en Internationaal.
	Oftewel: wat gebeurt er allemaal?}}
}

@article{maps:06-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{29-32}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{WG 1: Education}},
 keywords  = {{working group, education}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 1: Educatie.}}
}

@article{maps:06-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{33-36}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik-Jan Vens, Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{WG 4: Fonts}},
 keywords  = {{working group, fonts, METAFONT}},
 abstract  = {{Activiteiten van de werkgroep Fonts.}}
}

@article{maps:06-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{37}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{WG 6: Lijst en link met fotozetters}},
 keywords  = {{working group, photo typesetter, inventory}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroep 6.}}
}

@article{maps:06-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{38-40}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{41kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink, Pieter Bison}},
 title     = {{WG 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's; Verkrijgbaarheid van em{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS, Atari, em{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken, in het byzonder de
	situatie met betrekking tot em{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:06-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{41-42}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Brief aan PC werkgroep: Enige suggesties voor WG-PC's}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS}},
 abstract  = {{Voorgesteld wordt een praktisch set voor de PC's beschikbaar
	te stellen, en de educatie daar op af te stemmen.}}
}

@article{maps:06-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{43}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Joop van Gent}},
 title     = {{WG 8: NTG conferentie}},
 keywords  = {{working group, conference}},
}

@article{maps:06-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{44-46}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{42kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG 10: SGML-{\TeX}: Imposing structure upon {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{working group, SGML, structure}},
 abstract  = {{Imposing structure upon {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:06-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{47}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Henk Brouwer, J.A. Jager, P. Sader}},
 title     = {{Gebruik van {\TeX} binnen het EGD}},
 keywords  = {{EGD, Quatro, conversion, tables}},
 abstract  = {{Conversie van tabellen binnen Quatro naar {\TeX};
	het gebruik van macros binnen het EGD.}}
}

@article{maps:06-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{48-56}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{164kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Leo van Geest, Marion van Geest}},
 title     = {{Gebruik van {\TeX} en {\LaTeX} op het CAWCS}},
 keywords  = {{CAWCS}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht van het gebruik van {\TeX} op het CAWCS.}}
}

@article{maps:06-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-74}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{268kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Math into BLUes}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe, math}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX}ing mathscripts is not simply typing. Math has to
	be translated into {\TeX} commands. First the motivation
	for this work is given. Next traditional math page make-up
	is summarized along with the macroscopic math {\TeX}
	commands. After answering `Why {\TeX}ing mathscripts is
	difficult?' an anthology of {\TeX} falls and their antidotes
	is discussed. At the end suggestions are given in order to
	lessen the difficulties.}}
}

@article{maps:06-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{75-84}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use with {\LaTeX}'s document styles}},
 keywords  = {{Babel, {\LaTeX}, document styles, language, multilingual}},
 abstract  = {{The standard distribution of {\LaTeX} contains a number of
	document styles that are meant to be used, but also serve
	as examples for other users to create their own document
	styles. These styles have become very popular among
	{\LaTeX}. But it should be kept in mind that they were
	designed for American tastes and contain a number of
	hard-wired texts. This article describes a set of
	document-style options that can be used in combination
	with the standard styles, which makes the latter adaptable
	to other languages.}}
}

@article{maps:06-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-92}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}},
 title     = {{Frequently Asked Questions (I)}},
 keywords  = {{frequently asked questions, FAQ, comp.text.tex}},
 abstract  = {{This article contains answers to some frequently asked
	questions on comp.text.tex. Please don't ask these
	questions again, as they've been answered many times
	before.}}
}

@article{maps:06-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{93-98}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Liam Quin}},
 title     = {{Summary of METAFONT Fonts Available}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, fonts, availability}},
 abstract  = {{This report includes all known fonts available in
	METAFONT format, whether public domain or not. Archive
	sites for ftp are listed where known. There is also a
	BITNET archive at LISTSERV@UBVM.CC.BUFFALO.EDU.}}
}

@article{maps:06-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-106}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Program text generation with {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{program text generation}},
 abstract  = {{Web; Cweb; Fweb; Spiderweb; Tgrind; C2{\LaTeX}; C++2{\LaTeX};
	Cprog/Csty macros; Program environment; Scheme{\TeX}; Ada;
	Miscellaneous.}}
}

@article{maps:06-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{107-108}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} for engineers and scientists (book review)}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, engineers, scientists, book review}},
 abstract  = {{Review of `{\LaTeX} for engineers and scientists' by
	David J. Buerger.}}
}

@article{maps:06-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{109-112}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{The structure of the {\TeX} processor}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} processor, characters, tokens, lists, expansion}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I will describe the {\TeX} processor as a
	multi-layered engine that successively transforms
	characters into tokens, tokens into lists, and from these
	lists builds a typeset page.}}
}

@article{maps:06-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{113-117}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{6}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nelson Beebe}},
 title     = {{Comments on the Future of {\TeX} and METAFONT}},
 keywords  = {{future, {\TeX}, METAFONT}},
}

@book{maps:07,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-135}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{1714kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 91.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:07-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-9}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1991/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 20 november 1990;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	NTG jaarvergadering;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag;
	NTG presentaties: `{\TeX} in de praktijk';
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:07-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{7kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary}},
 keywords  = {{calendar, glossary}},
}

@article{maps:07-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-11}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{11kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen NTG}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:07-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12-13}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Begroting 1991 en 1992}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:07-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{14-16}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL subscription}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, mailing list}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:07-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17-22}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG fileserver faciliteiten}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:07-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{23}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1991/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:07-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24-25}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{NTG's continuation: The Third Year}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, continuation}},
 abstract  = {{An NTG year of activity parallels the Dutch academic
	year: September to September. The membership
	increased by roughly 40\% to circa 140 members of which 25
	or so are institutional members. Due to the intermediate
	{\TeX} course some financial reserve has been built up. NTG's
	third year can be characterized by `continuation,' and
	the embarkation upon a multi-year project.}}
}

@article{maps:07-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{26-32}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{84kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG 1: Education; Contribution to TUG-LRP report}},
 keywords  = {{working group, education, TUG-LPR}},
 abstract  = {{Worldwide {\TeX}/METAFONT education is proposed with
	compatible modules, such that a user can plan an education
	path. A pool of teachers is proposed. How to address the
	problem of qualified teachers is touched upon.}}
}

@article{maps:07-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-35}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG 1: Education; Review Michael Doob's A Gentle}},
 keywords  = {{book review, review}},
 abstract  = {{Review of Michael Doob's `A Gentle Introduction to {\TeX}'.}}
}

@article{maps:07-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{36}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{WG 7: PC-zaken; {\TeX} voor MS/PC-DOS PC's en Atari's}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS, Atari}},
 abstract  = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}
}

@article{maps:07-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-38}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David van Leeuwen}},
 title     = {{WG 13: `Neerlandica'; The Right of ij to be a Ligature}},
 keywords  = {{Neerlandica, ij-ligature}},
 abstract  = {{Discussion of the right of the Dutch `ij' to be a ligature.}}
}

@article{maps:07-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{39-40}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Enige Suggesties aan de Redactie van de MAPS}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{De functie van de MAPS wordt belicht en gerelateerd aan
	hoe dat te verwezenlijken. Punten aangestipt zijn:
	onjuiste afbrekingen, slecht-ogende automatische
	uitvullingen, en typos. Voorgestelde oplossing geen
	referee-mechanisme maar duidelijk aan de auteurs geven van
	wat van ze verwacht wordt plus overgaan op de nieuwere
	tools. Structureel is het te late verschijnen voorkomen
	vanwege het notulen-aspect: geen notulen geen vergadering.}}
}

@article{maps:07-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-46}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{92kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet Tutelaers}},
 title     = {{A Font and a Style for Typesetting Chess using {\LaTeX} or {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{typesetting, chess, fonts}},
}

@article{maps:07-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-50}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Typesetting Bridge via {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{bridge, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX} macros and a bidding environment for typesetting bridge
	card distributions and bidding sequences are given. Examples
	borrowed from bridge literature are supplied.}}
}

@article{maps:07-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{51-62}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Typesetting Bridge via {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{bridge, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Enhanced plain {\TeX} macros and a bidding environment for
	typesetting bridge card distributions and bidding
	sequences are given. As a follow-up of the {\LaTeX} macros
	given in [12]. Moreover, macros for annotated printing of the
	course of the play are provided. Examples of use are included.}}
}

@article{maps:07-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{63-66}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{220kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hanna Kołodziejska}},
 title     = {{Go diagrams with {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{go, diagrams}},
 abstract  = {{Encoureged by Zalman Rubinstein, who described his chess
	diagrams in TUGboat vol. 10 no. 2, I have prepared
	some special fonts and {\TeX} macros to be used in
	typesetting go diagrams.}}
}

@article{maps:07-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-70}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Towers of Hanoi, revisited}},
 keywords  = {{tower of Hanoi}},
 abstract  = {{Another version of {\TeX}ing of `The Towers of Hanoi'
	problem is provided, which does not assume Lisp knowledge,
	just plain {\TeX}. Also some variations of use are included,
	among others to remove the restriction on the disks: disk
	size can be supplied by more than one digit.}}
}

@article{maps:07-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{71-75}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{6th European {\TeX} Conference}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Paris}},
 abstract  = {{\begin{itemize}
	\item User groups:
	CyrTUG is bound to become important. CSTUG
	prospers. HunTUG is modest. The Poles can't get organized.
	Yunus is only a list. The other five just go on.
	\item Panels:
	{\TeX} in Europe, how can we obtain better acceptance? {\LaTeX}3:
	impressive history, no release dates of yet.
	\item Presentations:
	Zlatuška's ACCENTS processor, for automatic generation of
	accented virtual fonts for European languages from English
	input fonts in the {\TeX} font layout, looks promising.
	\item Publishing houses:
	MIR is involved. Springer is active and has some user guides
	out for a pilot journal. The Czech scientific journals are
	all formatted by {\TeX}!
	\item Products:
	LAMS{\TeX} is still going public. Very promising though,
	especially the wizards manual.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:07-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{76-82}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{84kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{The TUG91 Annual Meeting}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference}},
 abstract  = {{\begin{itemize}
	\item Education:
	David Salomon is a great teacher: insights!
	He has donated his notes to TUG for inclusion in the
	{\TeX}niques series.
	\item Publishing houses:
	The publishing houses accept (La){\TeX} copy. AMS leads with
	their total production formatted via {\TeX}: 90K pages per year.
	\item Interchange format:
	DVI and Encapsulated PostScript!
	\item Workshops:
	Modifying manmac was great! The ways of
	encapsulating PostScript are put together by Anita Hoover.
	(see elsewhere in MAPS)
	\item Products:
	LAMS{\TeX} goes public. Arbor{\TeX}t has extended and improved
	their products. ETP, of Mimi Lafrenz, did steal the show.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:07-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{83-84}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{13kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{TUG Board of Directors meeting}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, board-of-directors}},
 abstract  = {{The following are loosely formulated issues which were
	agreed upon. For more preciseness the reader is referred
	to the (approved) minutes.}}
}

@article{maps:07-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-86}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Visit AMS and TUG office}},
 keywords  = {{AMS, TUG office}},
 abstract  = {{A report is given of the role of AMS with respect to
	{\TeX} and TUG. The TUG office is next door and the
	cooperation is beneficial. A few relevant documents and
	the AMS preprint styles as well as the accompanying
	documentation are enumerated.}}
}

@article{maps:07-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-90}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{226kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}niques in Siberia}},
 keywords  = {{Siberia, {\LaTeX}, courses, USSR}},
 abstract  = {{This article summarizes the problems of giving a {\LaTeX}
	course in Siberia. It concludes with an overview concerning
	the future of {\TeX} inside the USSR.}}
}

@article{maps:07-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-96}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Hoenig}},
 title     = {{An Introduction to {\TeX} for New Users}},
 keywords  = {{introduction, new users}},
 abstract  = {{The purpose of this brief introduction is not to present a
	tutorial into the use of {\TeX}, but rather to introduce the
	user to the whole notion of what it means to use {\TeX}, how
	{\TeX} differs from other typesetting systems, and what the
	advantages are to using {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:07-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{97-101}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rein Smedinga}},
 title     = {{Hoe met {\LaTeX} een boek kan worden gemaakt}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, book}},
 abstract  = {{Het creëren van een boek met {\LaTeX} is geen
	vanzelfsprekende bezigheid. Onderstaand het relaasvan zo'n
	poging: het boek-in-wording Inleiding Informatica dat in
	eerste instantie als dictaat bij het bijbehorende college
	is geschreven en nu in een boekversie is aangeboden aan
	Addison-Wesley. In onderstaand betoog wordt voorbij gegaan
	aan het belangrijkste onderdeel van het schrijven van een
	boek: het schrijven van de tekst. We zullen het hier
	slechts hebben over de problemen en oplossingen voor wat
	betreft de layout.}}
}

@article{maps:07-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{102-104}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{Ladies and {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, non-scientists, simplification}},
 abstract  = {{This paper describes the use of {\LaTeX} by
	non-astronomers at the Kapteyn Institute. Although the
	general opinion is that it is too complicated for
	non-scientist, experience in Groningen proves otherwise.
	If you provide good tools or styles everybody is capable
	of using {\LaTeX}. Also, the astronomers took over tricks
	from the ladies, simplifying their lives, too.}}
}

@article{maps:07-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{105-110}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Two Sides of the Fence}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, future}},
 abstract  = {{The purpose of this talk is to give an overview of the
	four days of the twelfth annual TUG meeting; it is an
	attempt to show that the different streams in the
	programme of the meeting are connected, that they are part
	of a whole. Also, I make some comments and observations
	regarding the current status and the future of {\TeX}, and
	the future of publishing in general.}}
}

@article{maps:07-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{111-116}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Anita Hoover}},
 title     = {{Report on Workshop: Getting PostScript into {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} Documents}},
 keywords  = {{workshop, PostScript}},
}

@article{maps:07-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{117-123}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nelson Beebe}},
 title     = {{The TUGLIB Server}},
 keywords  = {{TUGLIB, FTP, mail, internet}},
 abstract  = {{Scores of sites on the worldwide Internet now provide
	access to assorted collections of software relating to
	{\TeX} and METAFONT. In many cases, these are accessible
	only via the Internet mechanism known as anonymous ftp, a
	scheme that permits logins from unknown users, usually on
	other machines, with very restricted access. The name ftp
	is an acronym for file transfer protocol. To improve the
	access to the {\TeX} archives and other software at Utah, I
	have installed `tuglib'. This server provides a means
	whereby remote users can send electronic mail messages
	containing service requests to a daemon program. The
	daemon parses the requests, logs them, and responds to
	them.}}
}

@article{maps:07-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{124}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout, Ron Sommeling}},
 title     = {{Self-replicating macros}},
 keywords  = {{macros, self-replication}},
}

@article{maps:07-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{125-126}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{New books on {\TeX} (2)}},
 keywords  = {{new books, book review}},
 abstract  = {{Review of `A Beginner's Book of {\TeX}' (Kopka/Levy).}}
}

@article{maps:07-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{127-129}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Impression INRS{\TeX}, and some more}},
 keywords  = {{INRS{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The work of Michael Fergusson on INRS{\TeX} is discussed,
	Michael's comments on the review are included.}}
}

@article{maps:07-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{130}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ralph Youngen}},
 title     = {{AMS{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{AMS{\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:07-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{131}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Spivak}},
 title     = {{LAMS{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{LAMS{\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:07-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{132}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous}},
 title     = {{Scholar{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Scholar{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Scholar{\TeX} is a collection of fonts, macros, preprocessor,
	hyphenation patterns, other related software and a 150-pages
	manual with many illustrations, exemples, exercises and mottos.
	It's purpose is to allow the use of {\TeX} in the following
	languages: Greek, Epigraphical Greek, Armenian, Arabic, Hebrew,
	Syriac, Saxon, Old German, Phonetic Alphabet.}}
}

@article{maps:07-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{133-135}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{TUGboat, Table of Contents}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat, contents}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 12.1 and 12.2.}}
}

@article{maps:07-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{135}},
 year      = {{1991}},
 volume    = {{7}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Salomon}},
 title     = {{`Insights in {\TeX}' course (1)}},
 keywords  = {{courses, insights}},
 abstract  = {{This course, with no hands-on, is aimed at {\TeX} and
	{\LaTeX} users who are ready for to acquire more insights
	into the {\TeX}nigma. For those who are still working at
	the `book' level an extra one-day introductory course can
	be organized if need for that is large enough.}}
}

@book{maps:08,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-150}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{1628kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 92.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:08-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1992/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 2 mei 1991;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag;
	NTG presentaties: `Fun with {\TeX}';
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:08-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary \& Aanschaf {\TeX} boeken}},
 keywords  = {{calendar, glossary, book}},
}

@article{maps:08-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen NTG}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:08-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1992/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:08-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-10}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1991}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
 abstract  = {{In 1991 ging de NTG zijn 4e jaar van bestaan in. Wederom
	verschenen er een tweetal MAPS (Minutes \& APpendiceS),
	twee NTG bijeenkomsten vonden plaats met een groeiend
	aantal lezingen, bestuursverkiezingen werden voor het
	eerst gehouden, een gecombineerd NTG/TUG lidmaatschap werd
	mogelijk, de samenwerking met Wiskundig Nederland kreeg
	gestalte, en er werd verdere aandacht besteed aan de
	continuering en acceptatie van de NTG.}}
}

@article{maps:08-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-12}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1991}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:08-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-15}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's listserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:08-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{16-22}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's fileserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:08-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{23-24}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG 1: Education; Review Urban's `An introduction to {\LaTeX}'}},
 keywords  = {{review, book review}},
 abstract  = {{Review of Michael Urban's `An introduction to {\LaTeX}'}}
}

@article{maps:08-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-30}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{74kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG 1: Education; Addendum `Publiceren met {\LaTeX}'}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Addendum `Publiceren met {\LaTeX}'}}
}

@article{maps:08-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-32}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik-Jan Vens}},
 title     = {{WG 4: Fonts: Met schuine en begerige ogen}},
 keywords  = {{working group, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{`Peremesjtsjenije', Een verhaal van nette armoei.}}
}

@article{maps:08-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{33-34}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{13kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{WG 7: PC-zaken}},
 keywords  = {{working group, PC, MS-DOS, Atari}},
 abstract  = {{Activiteiten van werkgroep 7: PC-zaken.}}
}

@article{maps:08-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35-52}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{275kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Daniel Taupin}},
 title     = {{Music{\TeX}; using {\TeX} to write polyphonic or instrumental music}},
 keywords  = {{music}},
 abstract  = {{Music{\TeX} is a set of {\TeX} macros to typeset polyphonic,
	orchestral or polyphonic music.}}
}

@article{maps:08-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-56}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{Dating with {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{dates}},
 abstract  = {{Three {\TeX}-coded algorithms are given for performing tricks
	with dates.}}
}

@article{maps:08-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{57-58}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Dag van het Document (verslag ITI-TNO informatiedag)}},
 keywords  = {{document, opslag en retrieval, ITI-TNO}},
 abstract  = {{Een verslag van de dag van het document. Centraal stond
	de problematiek: opslag en retrieval van documenten.
	Interessant waren het begrip bibliotheek zonder muren, en
	de intelligente auteursomgevingen. Het dilemma ten
	aaanzien van het centrale theam is: moeten wij alles
	bewaren of selecteren en vergeten? Ook het forum kwam hier
	niet uit. Er was een beurs met een 20-tal stands.}}
}

@article{maps:08-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{59-62}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Molecuul Muis Manuscript (verslag KNCV symposium)}},
 keywords  = {{chemistry, electronic publishing, KNCV}},
 abstract  = {{Op 18 oktober 1991 werd door de sectie
	Computertoepassingen van de KNCV (Koninklijke Nederlandse
	Chemische Vereniging) een symposium m.b.t. chemische
	tekstverwerking georganiseerd. Naast een algemene
	introductie over `Electronisch Publiceren', kregen zowel
	de Apple Macintosh als MS-DOS geïnteresseerden (chemici)
	de huidige mogelijkheden van het verwerken van chemische
	teksten voorgeschoteld. Het pakket {\TeX} kwam in een
	laatste lezing naar voren. De duidelijk geslaagde dag werd
	bezocht door een kleine honderd deelnemers, inclusief een
	tiental leveranciers. Vele (leerzame) demonstraties, zowel
	tijdens de lezingen, als ook tussen de lezingensessies
	door, zorgden mede voor een duidelijk overzicht.}}
}

@article{maps:08-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{63-80}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{274kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Salomon}},
 title     = {{An introduction to {\TeX} — part I course David Salomon —}},
 keywords  = {{introduction}},
}

@article{maps:08-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{81-86}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{67kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Joachim Schrod}},
 title     = {{The Components of {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{components of {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} needs a great amount of supplementary components
	(files and programs) of which the meaning and interaction
	often is unknown. This paper explains the components of
	the kernel system {\TeX} that are visible for the {\TeX}
	user and their relations.}}
}

@article{maps:08-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-90}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}3 project}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}3}},
}

@article{maps:08-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-114}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{237kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nelson Beebe}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} Editing support}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, editing, emacs}},
 abstract  = {{The structured markup of {\LaTeX} can be easy to read and
	understand, but tedious to type. Its syntax of environment
	groups bears a strong resemblance to the begin/end groups
	of the Algol family of computer programming languages,
	which can be described by rigorous grammars that in turn
	permit the automatic construction of lexical analyzers
	and parsers, and structured editors to support programming
	in those languages. This article describes a powerful
	facility for the preparation of {\LaTeX} documents using the
	Emacs text editor.}}
}

@article{maps:08-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-116}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{Prolegomena toward a font selection scheme}},
 abstract  = {{Most users of plain {\TeX} do not get very sophisticated
	in their use of fonts. Often they resort to declaring all
	used fonts explicitly with \verb|\font|. There are some
	obvious disadvantages to that: it is not possible to
	switch a whole document in a simple way to a different
	typeface, or to a different size. As a result, I've seen
	such phenomena as an article with an abstract in 8 or 9
	point, but where the formulas were still in 10 point, or
	pages of `magnified' type where the lines were cramped,
	because the \verb|\baselineskip| was not increased with the
	type size. The need for a good font selection scheme is
	thus quite obvious, but the implementation of one is
	not.}}
}

@article{maps:08-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{117-120}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{From observation to publication}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the use of {\TeX} in publishing
	observations of variable stars observed by Dutch
	amateur-astronomers. The observations are published in the
	journal `Variabilia' and in the so-called Reports. In the
	latter the observations, collected in several years, are
	published and submitted to the professional astronomer. It
	includes tables and light-curves: plot of the changing
	magnitude of the star versus time. In creating the
	light-curves: PIC{\TeX} is used. In preparing the files for
	PIC{\TeX} simple {\TeX}-coding is used for manipulating the
	data.}}
}

@article{maps:08-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{121-124}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{FIFO and LIFO incognito}},
 keywords  = {{FIFO, LIFO}},
 abstract  = {{FIFO, first-in-first-out, and LIFO, last-in-last-out, are
	well-known techniques for handling sequences. In {\TeX}
	macro writing they are abundant but are not easily
	recognized as such. {\TeX} templates for FIFO and LIFO are
	given and their use is illustrated.}}
}

@article{maps:08-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{125-127}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Tower of Hanoi}},
 keywords  = {{tower of Hanoi}},
 abstract  = {{Another version of programming `The Tower of Hanoi' in
	{\TeX} is provided. No nodding knowledge of Lisp is required;
	just plain {\TeX}. There is no restriction on the number of
	disks, apart from the installed limits of {\TeX}.
	Generalized disks can be moved as well.}}
}

@article{maps:08-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{128-132}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Typesetting Crosswords via {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{crosswords, \halign, WYSIWYG, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A macro is provided for typesetting crosswords via (plain)
	{\TeX}, or any {\TeX}, which allows \verb|\halign| use. The
	specification of the crossword information can be done in
	the WYSIWYG way, and does not require \verb|\halign| markup,
	just the data.}}
}

@article{maps:08-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{133-134}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{Ladies \& {\LaTeX} — II}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt mijn ervaring als {\LaTeX}-docent,
	vraagbaak voor secretaresses beschreven. Er zijn twee
	bronnen van problemen: organisatie en {\TeX}-techniek.}}
}

@article{maps:08-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{135-138}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier, Amy Hendrickson}},
 title     = {{Book reviews}},
 keywords  = {{book review, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{Reviews of `{\LaTeX} for Everyone' (Jane Hahn),
	`Practical SGML' (Eric van Herwijnen),
	`{\TeX} by Topic, A {\TeX}nician's Reference' (Victor
	Eijkhout).}}
}

@article{maps:08-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{139-142}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Spivak's Oeuvre}},
 keywords  = {{LAMS{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Spivak's `The Joy of {\TeX}' and `LAMS{\TeX} — The Synthesis'
	are discussed.}}
}

@article{maps:08-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{143-144}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{TUGboat, Table of Contents}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 12.3, 12.4 and 13.1.}}
}

@article{maps:08-30,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{145-146}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Tijdschriften zusterverenigingen}},
 keywords  = {{journals}},
}

@article{maps:08-31,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{147-148}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jiří Vesely}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}92 announcement}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, announcement, Prague}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of the Euro{\TeX}'92 conference.}}
}

@article{maps:08-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{149-150}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{8}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Salomon}},
 title     = {{`Insights in {\TeX}' course (2)}},
 keywords  = {{courses}},
 abstract  = {{This advanced course, with no hands-on, is aimed at those
	{\TeX} and/or {\LaTeX} users who are ready for a deeper insight
	into the {\TeX}nigma. An extra one-day introductory course
	can be organized for inexperienced users, if there is enough
	demand.}}
}

@book{maps:09,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-162}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{2054kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 92.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:09-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1992/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 21 november 1991;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	NTG jaarvergadering;
	Verslag/discussie werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag;
	NTG presentaties: `{\TeX} and Scientific Publishing';
	Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:09-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender \& Glossary \& Discount boeken en software voor NTG leden}},
 keywords  = {{calendar, glossary, book, software}},
}

@article{maps:09-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Werkgroepen NTG}},
 keywords  = {{working group}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag werkgroepen.}}
}

@article{maps:09-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1992)}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS}},
}

@article{maps:09-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-11}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1992/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:09-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1993}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:09-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-15}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's listserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:09-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{16-22}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's fileserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:09-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{23-30}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{173kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Huub Mulders}},
 title     = {{WG 3: Evaluatie; Formules in WP5.1, DECwrite en {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{formulas, evaluation, WordPerfect, DECwrite, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{De pakketten WP5.1, DECwrite en {\LaTeX} bieden de
	mogelijkheid om formules te typesetten. Om de mogelijkheden
	en kwaliteit te kunnen beoordelen is geprobeerd een
	vijftal formules met behulp van de drie pakketten te
	maken.}}
}

@article{maps:09-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-32}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik-Jan Vens}},
 title     = {{WG 4: Fonts; Hoe maak ik van een font twee fonts?}},
 keywords  = {{working group, fonts, virtual fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen wilde een deel van haar
	zelfgemaakte font aan kunnen spreken met de gewone letters
	op het toetsenbord, en niet met lastig in te typen en
	(evt.) lastig te onthouden macros. De aangewezen manier
	leek het maken van een virtueel font. Dus heb ik eens op
	een rijtje gezet wat je daarvoor nodig hebt.}}
}

@article{maps:09-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{33-36}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{7th European {\TeX} Conference: Euro{\TeX}'92}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Prague}},
 abstract  = {{Highlights of this Euro{\TeX}'92 at Prague were:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item Graphics via {\TeX} and METAFONT.
	\item  = METAFONT with PostScript output.
	\item PostScript fonts coupled to {\TeX}.
	\item What every advisory service should know.
	\item As{\TeX} as model for a scientific workbench.
	\item Several (free) tutorials: Advanced {\TeX}, Virtual fonts,
	XY-PiC.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:09-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{37-42}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Verslag van de TUG conferentie in Portland, Oregon}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Portland}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag van de TUG conferentie in Portland, Oregon.}}
}

@article{maps:09-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-49}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{80kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Anita Hoover}},
 title     = {{The Key to Successful Support: Knowing Your {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} Users}},
 keywords  = {{user support}},
 abstract  = {{The primary emphasis of this paper is to address the
	issues related to supporting {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}. One
	essential ingredient to successfully supporting any
	package is that you must know your users. In the case of
	{\TeX} and {\LaTeX}, this is especially true, because the
	user base can be so diverse. This paper will focus on
	support strategies that address different types of users
	and what you can do as a {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} support person
	to adopt these strategies in your organization.}}
}

@article{maps:09-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{50-56}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{80kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}},
 title     = {{The Pursuit of Quality}},
 keywords  = {{craft typography, automated typesetting, document formatting models, paradigm, typographic rules, visual contexts, logical contexts, global optimization}},
 abstract  = {{This paper compares high-quality craft typography with
	the state of the art in automated typesetting. The first
	part discusses several typographical conventions which
	cannot be implemented by means of any formatting model
	currently in use. The second part explains why the
	current paradigms of computerized typesetting will not
	serve for high-quality formatting and suggests directions
	for the further research necessary to improve the quality
	of computer generated layout.}}
}

@article{maps:09-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-62}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Walter van der Laan, Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Writing Reports with More than a Hundred People}},
 keywords  = {{automated report writing, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This paper describes a system that produces project
	status reports using {\LaTeX}. The reports contain both
	textual and financial information. The textual part of the
	status reports is written by over a hundred people who
	don't need to know what {\LaTeX} is. The financial
	information is retrieved from a database.}}
}

@article{maps:09-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{63-68}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{96kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ralph Youngen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-based Production at the AMS}},
 keywords  = {{AMS}},
 abstract  = {{The American Mathematical Society (AMS) is a both major
	publisher of mathematical research, and a professional
	organization whose members are mathematicians engaging in
	research at academic institutions and other research
	centers in the U.S. and around the world. A primary
	function of the Society is to provide channels of
	communication whereby these mathematicians can communicate
	the results of their research to each other, and to the
	broader scientific community. Foremost among these
	channels of communication is an extensive publications
	program which is based on the {\TeX} typesetting system.}}
}

@article{maps:09-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-80}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{143kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier, Eric van Herwijnen, Chris Rowley}},
 title     = {{Standard dtd's and Scientific Publishing}},
 keywords  = {{DTD, SGML, scientific publishing}},
 abstract  = {{This paper has two parts. In the first part we argue that
	scientific publishing needs one standard dtd for each
	class of documents that is published, for example one for
	all research papers and one for all books. In the second
	part we apply this reasoning to mathematical formulas, and
	we outline some design requirements for a document type
	definition for mathematical formulas. In the appendices we
	discuss and compare existing document type definitions for
	mathematical formulas.}}
}

@article{maps:09-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{81-84}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik-Jan Vens}},
 title     = {{Incorporating PostScript fonts in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript, fonts, pfb2mf, conversion}},
 abstract  = {{pfb2mf provides the {\TeX} community with an interface to
	the PostScript Type One fonts. There is an overwhelming
	amount of these fonts for sale and there are a lot of
	fonts in the Public Domain, so it extends the range of
	typefaces the {\TeX} user can choose from.}}
}

@article{maps:09-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-88}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Salomon}},
 title     = {{Creating Shaded Rectangles with PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{shaded rectangles, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{One of the most common graphics used in documents is text
	with a shaded background. This is hard to do with {\TeX}
	but easy with PostScript. Simple PostScript code is
	presented here to create shaded rectangles, and a macro is
	developed to combine such a rectangle with text.}}
}

@article{maps:09-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{89-96}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{110kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{John Hobby}},
 title     = {{Introduction to METAPOST}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, METAPOST, picture drawing}},
 abstract  = {{METAPOST is a picture-drawing language very much like
	METAFONT except with PostScript output. The language
	provides access to all major features of Level 1
	PostScript and it has facilities for integrating
	graphics with typeset text. This paper gives a brief
	overview of the METAPOST language and how it can be used.
	A few of the more interesting features are described in
	detail.}}
}

@article{maps:09-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{97-99}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} for Everyone!?}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{In this article author tries to defend a more general use
	of {\TeX} outside the world of mathematics, astronomy,
	physics etc. The ! or ? in the title of this paper is the
	question. Several examples are shown why {\TeX} is much
	powerful than a dull word-processing package.}}
}

@article{maps:09-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{100-101}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} als Database}},
 keywords  = {{databases, administration}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt beschreven hoe {\TeX} is gebruikt als
	een primitieve database voor de administratie van de 47ste
	Nederlandse Astronomen Conferentie.}}
}

@article{maps:09-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{102-104}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Theo Jurriens}},
 title     = {{Ladies and {\LaTeX} — III Vragen allerlei!}},
 keywords  = {{floats, multi-columns, letter, table of contents}},
 abstract  = {{In het dagelijks gebruik van {\LaTeX} komen we zo af en
	toe toch nog wel eens problemen voor. In dit artikel
	vragen uit de praktijk en de mogelijke oplossingen.}}
}

@article{maps:09-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{105-110}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{Just give me a Lollipop (it makes my heart go giddy-up)}},
 keywords  = {{Lollipop, meta-format, style design}},
 abstract  = {{The Lollipop format is a meta-format: it does not define
	user macros, but it contains the tools with which a style
	designer can easily implement such user macros. This
	article will show some of the capabilities of Lollipop and
	will give the reader a small peek behind the scenes of the
	implementation.}}
}

@article{maps:09-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{111-114}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{50kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Salomon}},
 title     = {{Index Preparation for {\TeX} Related Documents}},
 keywords  = {{index preparation, MakeIndex}},
 abstract  = {{A beta release of the MakeIndex program has recently
	become available for the Macintosh computer, and I
	immediately started using it to prepare the indexes of two
	new books. MakeIndex is easy to use with {\LaTeX} but,
	since I like to work with plain {\TeX}, I have developed all
	the necessary macros from scratch. They are presented here
	for the benefit of anyone who wants a professionally
	looking index.}}
}

@article{maps:09-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-129}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{133kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Table Diversions}},
 keywords  = {{tables, bordered table, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Characteristics of existing table macro collections are
	given. A kaleidoscope of tables — as next best to a taxonomy
	— is presented. Newly introduced is the class of bordered
	tables. Variations in print-ruled, nonruled, framed,
	nonframed, dotted, centered, flushed-can be obtained via
	the invoke of parameter setting macros; no modification of
	user mark up. Simultaneous row and column spans, partial
	rules, and dotted lines are dealt with. The listing of the
	macro \verb|\btable|, with auxiliaries, is included.}}
}

@article{maps:09-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{130-136}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{101kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Syntactic Sugar}},
 keywords  = {{array addressing, loops, parameters, linear search, sorting, switch, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A plea is made for being honest with {\TeX} and not
	imposing alien structures upon it, otherwise than via
	compatible extensions, or via (non-{\TeX}) user interfaces
	to suit the publisher, the author, or the typist. This
	will facilitate the process to get (complex) publications
	out effectively, and typographically of high-quality.}}
}

@article{maps:09-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{137-138}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Heap Sort in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{heap sort, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Sorting in plain {\TeX} is implemented via heap sort.
	The heap sort algorithm is explained and the encoding given.}}
}

@article{maps:09-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{139-144}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{FIFO and LIFO sing the BLUes}},
 keywords  = {{FIFO, LIFO, BLUe, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{FIFO, First-In-First-Out, and LIFO, Last-In-First-Out,
	are well-known techniques for handling sequences. In
	{\TeX} macro writing they are abundant but are not easily
	recognized as such. {\TeX} templates for FIFO and LIFO are
	given and their use illustrated. The relation with Knuth's
	\verb|\dolist|, answer ex11.5, and \verb|\ctest|, p.376,
	is given.}}
}

@article{maps:09-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{145-146}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Typesetting Crosswords via {\TeX}, revisited}},
 keywords  = {{crosswords}},
 abstract  = {{An alternative macro, to van der Laan (1992b),
	is provided for typesetting crosswords via {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:09-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{147-154}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{244kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jan Krugers}},
 title     = {{Scientific Word; {\TeX} à la WYSIWYG}},
 keywords  = {{Scientific Word, WYSIWYG, Windows, OS2WIN}},
 abstract  = {{A software package for Windows and OS2WIN for inputting
	mathematical formulas WYSIWYG according to all {\TeX}
	rules. Internal storage format is a mixture of {\TeX},
	{\LaTeX} and macros of own design. Mathematical formulas
	are immediately shown the way they will be printed. Line
	width for text is limited to the width of the windowfor
	ease of use. The built in previewer from Turbo{\TeX} shows
	the whole document layout. There are also dvi drivers
	included for PostScript, LaserJet, DeskJet and
	matrixprinters. Pictures can be called just as easy as
	formulas can be inputted. A description of the philosophy
	of this package and how to work with it.}}
}

@article{maps:09-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{155-157}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Bugs (sigh) in Knuths `Computers \& Typesetting'}},
 keywords  = {{bugs, Knuth, Computers \& Typesetting}},
 abstract  = {{In may/june this year a discussion started on the {\TeX}-NL
	listserver (by Kees van der Laan and Nico Poppelier) about
	the releases of Knuths book series: it was not sure that
	Addison-Wesley was selling only the latest book editions.
	We have forwarded that discussion directly to Addison-Wesley
	in Amsterdam. The answer is included in next section.}}
}

@article{maps:09-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{158}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Downes}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}3; Call for Volunteers}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}3, volunteers}},
 abstract  = {{This is a call for volunteers to help in the development
	of {\LaTeX}3. There are many tasks needing to be done in
	support of the {\LaTeX}3 project which can be worked on
	concurrently with the development of the {\LaTeX}3 kernel.
	Furthermore, some tasks require special expertise not
	found among the core programming team. Initial research,
	analysis, and work on these tasks by volunteers can
	greatly speed up the process of integrating a number of
	desirable features into {\LaTeX}3. Many of these features
	can be extensively developed and tested under {\LaTeX} 2.09
	even before the {\LaTeX}3 kernel is available.}}
}

@article{maps:09-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{159}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jiří Zlatuška}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}'92 proceedings}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, proceedings, Prague}},
 abstract  = {{Euro{\TeX} '92 proceedings volume contains 330 pages of
	papers presented at the last European {\TeX} Conference
	held in Prague, Czechoslovakia. There are full texts of
	five invited talks included, presenting topics ranging
	from the future of {\TeX} to combinations involving METAFONT
	and PostScript, and also user support. The volume is
	available from the Czechoslovak {\TeX} user's group for
	only DM 30.—.}}
}

@article{maps:09-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{160}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{TUG '93; Call for Papers}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, call for papers}},
 abstract  = {{Call for papers for TUG'93 meeting.}}
}

@article{maps:09-36,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{161-162}},
 year      = {{1992}},
 volume    = {{9}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat, contents}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 13.2 and 13.3.}}
}

@book{maps:10,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-218}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{3082kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 93.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:10-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes, Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1993)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening;
	Verslag bijeenkomst 4 juni 1992;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	NTG presentaties: `The future of {\TeX}/{\LaTeX}';
	Rondvraag en Sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:10-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} kalender, Glossary \& Mededelingen}},
 keywords  = {{calendar, glossary, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:10-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-10}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{60kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor; `5 jaar MAPS'}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS, MAPS, NTG}},
}

@article{maps:10-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-14}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1993/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:10-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-17}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1992}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
 abstract  = {{In 1992 ging de NTG zijn 5e jaar van bestaan in. Twee NTG
	bijeenkomsten vonden plaats met vele goede lezingen, naast
	een succesvolle en goed bezette 5-daagse Advanced {\TeX}
	cursus (low budget; met het cursusmateriaal als
	MAPS-Special). Er verschenen wederom een tweetal MAPS
	uitgaven (Minutes \& APpendiceS). Medewerking werd tevens
	verleend aan het {\LaTeX}3 projekt.\\
	En voor de rest is er het diverse door de leden gedaan
	waaronder een Public Domain MS-DOS set (instap en
	volledige versie), proeflezen van de MAPS, en de
	hulpverlening bij vragen op de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst.}}
}

@article{maps:10-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{18-19}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1992}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:10-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{20-22}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:10-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{23-30}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Fileserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:10-09,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-36}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{NTG's Bulletin Board FGBBS}},
 keywords  = {{BBS, bulletin board, FGBBS}},
 abstract  = {{Nieuw voor de Nederlandstalige {\TeX} Gebruikersgroep: een
	{\TeX} Bulletin Board speciaal voor diegenen die niet op
	het Internet zijn aangesloten. De naam: FGBBS. Op FGBBS is
	sinds kort een zo volledig en actueel mogelijke {\TeX},
	em{\TeX}, {\LaTeX} en Music{\TeX} collectie beschikbaar voor
	alle bezitters van een modem. Het BBS is kosteloos
	toegankelijk voor iedereen en er zijn geen beperkingen aan
	de hoeveelheid bestanden die kunnen worden opgevraagd. Het
	systeem is aangesloten op een High Speed modem, vergeleken
	met de transmissiesnelheid die een directe Internet link
	biedt misschien niet geweldig, maar veel beter kan het
	niet over de gewone huis- tuin- en keukenPTTlijn. FGBBS is
	te bellen op 085-217041. Noot 31-jan-1997: nieuw nummer is
	026-3217 041.}}
}

@article{maps:10-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-40}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Jones}},
 title     = {{A Catalogue of {\TeX} Macros}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, AMS{\TeX}, AMS{\LaTeX}, macros, index}},
 abstract  = {{This is a catalogue of {\TeX} macros. Its scope includes
	all macros that are available via anonymous ftp or
	mail-server or some similar mechanism. Commercial packages
	will be included only if a full Catalogue entry is
	supplied to me by the vendor.}}
}

@article{maps:10-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-52}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{436kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Lavaud}},
 title     = {{A way to ensure the future of {\TeX}: make its use easier on low-cost machines}},
 keywords  = {{back-end, front-end, scientific publishing, As{\TeX}, hyper{\TeX}, tree, link, multi-author document, file manager, numerical computation, formal computation, worksheet, databases, email, MS-DOS, notebook, OS/2}},
 abstract  = {{The PC is the cheapest computer and the most widespread
	one in the scientific community. Faced with commercial
	scientific word-processors that are improving steadily in
	wrong directions, it is urgent to make the use of {\TeX}
	easier on the PC, to ensure its future and avoid costly
	dead-ends to researchers. We have designed a program,
	As{\TeX}, that allows to create easily multi-author
	scientific documents in {\TeX} or {\LaTeX} on PCs. It
	provides an on-line hypertext help and a multi-level
	assistance in typing {\LaTeX} code. It allows to display
	and modify very easily the structure of a document, to
	archive and retrieve files related to it, to perform
	numerical and formal computations from the document and
	include automatically the results, to create {\LaTeX}
	tables from worksheets or databases of formulas. It
	processes electronic mail and files sent by list servers
	for a better use of information and eases considerably the
	use of anonymous ftp and archie servers by local archiving
	of selected informations.}}
}

@article{maps:10-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-56}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach, Maarten van der Vlerk}},
 title     = {{4{\TeX}: a {\TeX} Workbench for MS-DOS PC's}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, workbench, PC, MS-DOS, freeware, shareware}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} and all its companions offer an enormous amount of
	possibilities. This is both an advantage and a
	disadvantage. The advantage is that almost anything is
	possible; the disadvantage is that you need detailed
	knowledge of all related programs to fully exploit the
	possibilities. The MS-DOS program 4{\TeX} is an attempt to
	integrate all major {\TeX} related programs in a shell that
	shields you from the tedious and frustrating job of
	setting environment variables and program parameters.}}
}

@article{maps:10-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{57-68}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{196kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Robert Best}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (I)}},
 keywords  = {{Atari, PD-{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Deze cursus is bedoeld als eerste kennismaking met {\TeX}
	op een eenvoudige PC. Een harde schijf is niet nodig. De
	cursus is gebaseerd op de PD-{\TeX} van Christoph Strunk
	voor Atari ST. De installatie en de functie van de basis
	bestanden van {\TeX} worden behandeld. Deze cursus is een
	gecorrigeerde herdruk van een serie artikelen in het blad
	ST uitgegeven door: Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst
	genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:10-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{69-72}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1993/1)}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, discussionlist}},
 abstract  = {{Gezeefd uit de NTG {\TeX}-NL discussielijst van 1992 en
	begin 1993: een zestiental vragen en antwoorden. Niet
	alleen voor de niet-netwerkers doch ook voor de {\TeX}-NL
	subscribers die de berichten te snel langs hun heen zagen
	gaan. Keuze is gemaakt op persoonlijke titel, veel is dus
	ongetwijfeld missende. Echter de onderwerpen welke in deze
	bijdrage worden behandeld zijn zeker van algemeen belang.}}
}

@article{maps:10-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{73}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mark Sinke}},
 title     = {{arm{\TeX}, een port van {\TeX} voor de Archimedes}},
 keywords  = {{arm{\TeX}, Acorn, Archimedes, port}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikeltje zal ik vertellen wat arm{\TeX} is en
	welke voor- en nadelen het systeem heeft. Het is geen
	uitvoerige opsomming van wat {\TeX} kan, omdat de lezer
	geacht wordt daarvan (enigszins) op de hoogte te zijn. Ik
	zal me meer richten op de technische kanten van het werken
	met {\TeX} op de Archimedes.}}
}

@article{maps:10-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{74-76}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet Tutelaers}},
 title     = {{Het gebruik van MathTime in {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{MathTime, {\LaTeX}}},
}

@article{maps:10-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-85}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{126kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philip Taylor}},
 title     = {{The Future of {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{extended {\TeX}, NTS, New Typesetting System}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} and the other members of Knuth's Computers \&
	Typesetting family are arguably amongst the most
	successful examples of computer software in the world,
	having been ported to almost every conceivable operating
	system and attracting an allegiance that verges on the
	fanatical. Development work on this family has now ceased,
	and many members of the computer typesetting community are
	concerned that some action should be taken to ensure that
	the ideas and philosophy enshrined in {\TeX} are not
	allowed simply to fade away. In this paper, we discuss
	some of the options available for perpetuating the {\TeX}
	philosophy, and examine the strengths and weaknesses of
	the present {\TeX} system. We conclude by postulating a
	development strategy for the future which will honour both
	the letter and the spirit of Knuth's wish that {\TeX},
	METAFONT and the Computer Modern typefaces remain his sole
	responsibility, and at the same time ensure that the
	philosophy and paradigms which are the strengths of {\TeX}
	are not lost for ever by having artificial constraints
	placed on their evolution.}}
}

@article{maps:10-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{86-94}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{256kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{E-{\TeX}: Guidelines for Future {\TeX} extensions}},
 keywords  = {{e-{\TeX}, guidelines, extensions}},
 abstract  = {{With the announcement of {\TeX} 3.0, Don Knuth
	acknowledged the need of the (ever growing) {\TeX}
	community for an even better system. But at the same time,
	he made it clear, that he will not get involved in any
	further enhancements that would change the {\TeX}book.
	{\TeX} started out originally as a system designed to
	typeset its author's own publications. In the meantime it
	serves hundreds of thousands of users. Now it is time,
	after ten years' experience, to step back and consider
	whether or not {\TeX} 3.0 is an adequate answer to the
	typesetting requirements of the nineties. Output produced
	by {\TeX} has higher standards than output generated
	automatically by most other typesetting systems.
	Therefore, in this paper we will focus on the quality
	standards set by typographers for hand-typeset documents
	and ask to what extent they are achieved by {\TeX}.
	Limitations of {\TeX}'s algorithms are analyzed; and missing
	features as well as new concepts are outlined.}}
}

@article{maps:10-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{95-100}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}},
 title     = {{The {\LaTeX}3 Project}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}3}},
 abstract  = {{This is a brief sketch of the {\LaTeX}3 Project:
	background, history, principles, aims and functionality.
	The new version of {\LaTeX} is, like the current version, a
	freely available system for automated processing of
	structured documents, formatting them to the highest
	typographic standards by use of the {\TeX} typesetting
	software. Although its uses include a very large range of
	published documents, the importance of its unsurpassed
	ability to format mathematical formulas will not be
	forgotten in producing the new version. It is being
	produced by an international group of volunteers under the
	technical direction of Frank Mittelbach.}}
}

@article{maps:10-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{101-113}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{225kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{PostScript en {\LaTeX}, de komplementariteit in praktijk}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript, {\LaTeX}, epsfig, NFSS}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel toon ik aan hoe PostScript en {\LaTeX} een
	hoge graad van samenhorigheid bezitten, die het mogelijk
	maakt om de voordelen van beide systemen te kombineren om
	dokumenten elektronisch te publiceren. Allereerst vertel
	ik hoe, samen met de dvi-vertaler dvips en het
	stijlbestand epsfig, het invoegen van PostScript materiaal
	in een (La){\TeX} bestand heel eenvoudig wordt. Samen met
	de stijl rotating kan men bijna elk gewenst globaal
	grafisch effekt verkrijgen zonder per-se een PostScript
	guru te zijn. In het tweede gedeelte van het artikel geef
	ik een kort overzicht van enkele op PostScript gebaseerde
	stijlbestanden, die bepaalde nuttige visuele effekten
	genereren, zoals grijze raampjes, kleurentypografie en het
	overdrukken van tekst. In het laatste gedeelte toon ik hoe
	eenvoudig het is om PostScript fonts te gebruiken in
	{\LaTeX} met het nieuwe fontselektie systeem (NFSS) van
	Frank Mittelbach.}}
}

@article{maps:10-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{114-119}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{122kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous}},
 title     = {{Virtual Fonts: Great Fun, Not for Wizards Only}},
 keywords  = {{virtual fonts}},
 abstract  = {{This paper deals with virtual fonts. I would like to
	present some examples of their astonishing possibilities,
	taken from everyday typesetting (or almost).}}
}

@article{maps:10-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{120-123}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{41kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous}},
 title     = {{The Birth of a Virtual Font; The AdjKerns Utility}},
 keywords  = {{virtual fonts, AdjKerns}},
}

@article{maps:10-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{124-139}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{279kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Hoenig}},
 title     = {{When {\TeX} and METAFONT Work Together}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, labelling figures, figures with labels, curvilinear}},
 abstract  = {{When {\TeX} and METAFONT communicate to each other, they
	can do more together than they can alone. This
	presentation concentrates on two illustrations of this
	principal, and urges readers to come up with more. When
	{\TeX} becomes sensitive to information passed to it from
	METAFONT, it is possible to prepare diagrams and figures
	using METAFONT and then to have {\TeX} prepare labels which
	can be precisely positioned within the figure. When
	communication goes the other way, {\TeX} and METAFONT can
	prepare special purpose fonts which (among other things)
	can be set along curved baselines. Illustrations of both
	techniques are presented.}}
}

@article{maps:10-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{140-141}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David van Leeuwen}},
 title     = {{Getallen}},
 keywords  = {{numbers}},
}

@article{maps:10-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{142-144}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{International quotations}},
 keywords  = {{quotation marks}},
 abstract  = {{In this article some relatively simple macros are presented
	for people who need an occasional quotation mark that is
	different from the default quotation marks provided by {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:10-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{145-148}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Typesetting number sequences; FIFO and some more}},
 keywords  = {{typesetting sequences, citation lists, lists of references, linear sorting, FIFO, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Typesetting sequences of numerical values, represented
	via symbolic names which get their values on the fly, is
	dealt with. The sorting of the sequence is done by a
	linear sorting algorithm, of complexity O(n2). Three or
	more consecutive numbers are typeset as a range. The
	objective was to encode typesetting sequences of numbers
	as simple, concise, general, compatible, modular,
	orthogonal, and ..., as possible in {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:10-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{149-170}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{259kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Sorting in BLUe}},
 keywords  = {{sorting, index preparation, database handling, multiple sorting keys}},
 abstract  = {{Macros for number and lexicographic sorting are supplied.
	Data can originate from the copy, from file, or generated
	automatically. Lexicographic sorting allows words with
	ligatures and diacritical marks. Applications treated are:
	sorting with respect to report generation with {\TeX} as a
	database tool, sorting and compressing index.{\TeX}, Knuth's
	index reminders file, and sorting control sequences
	separately. It is illustrated by various examples that a
	set can be sorted within {\TeX} once the ordering of the
	set is defined and encoded in a comparison macro, in
	compliance with the parameter macro \verb|\cmp|.}}
}

@article{maps:10-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{171-191}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{227kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Manmac BLUes; or how to typeset a book via {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{computer-assisted typography, manmac, style, customizing, index preparation, plain {\TeX}, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{The manmac macros are enumerated. A user's guide is
	provided, and the encodings are explained. As enhancements
	the writing of index reminders to the file index.{\TeX} is
	elaborated upon, and how to incorporate AMS fonts and
	non-CM fonts is referred to. In the appendixes I provided
	the source of manmac and my personalized report template.
	With respect to the latter, I played with the idea of
	formatting the MAPS specials series in this way.}}
}

@article{maps:10-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{192-212}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{234kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{AMS BLUes; professionals at work}},
 keywords  = {{computer-assisted typography, math, bibliography, markup, AMS{\TeX}, math fonts, cyrillics, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The significance of the American Mathematical Society for
	the {\TeX} community at large, and more general the leading
	role of the AMS in the area of professional
	computer-assisted typesetting, is praised. AMS-{\TeX},
	AMS-{\LaTeX}, their accompanying styles amsppt.sty,
	respectively amsart.sty, as well as AMS fonts are discussed.
	AMS provides excellent user's and installation guides
	along with the software and fonts, all in the public
	domain. Despite the quality, an alternative approach — and
	in detail some alternative encodings — are provided. A
	publisher is strongly encouraged to take notice of the
	computer-assisted publishing activities of this
	pace-setting society. A new procedural idea with respect
	to specifying and formatting bibliographies, given a
	background file of all the references an author is
	familiar with, is proposed to suit the author and the
	publisher.}}
}

@article{maps:10-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{213-216}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{The 14th Annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Aston}},
 abstract  = {{`A World-Wide Window on {\TeX}'}}
}

@article{maps:10-31,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{217-218}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{10}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat, contents}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 13.4.}}
}

@book{maps:11,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-227}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{2629kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 93.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:11-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-6}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{88kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Opening 11e NTG bijeenkomst 10 juni 1993}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag bijeenkomst 19 november 1992;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	NTG-jaarvergadering;
	Rondvraag en Sluiting;
	Voordrachten: `Van font tot boek';
	Volgende bijeenkomsten}}
}

@article{maps:11-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:11-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1993/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:11-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1993)}},
}

@article{maps:11-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12-13}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1994}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:11-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{14-16}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:11-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17-23}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{45kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Fileserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{fileserver}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht inhoud NTG fileserver.}}
}

@article{maps:11-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{24}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL archief}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Deze bijdrage beschrijft de sinds kort aanwezige
	beschikbaarheid van het {\TeX}-NL archief op het internet.
	Zowel inzage is mogelijk in een subject-lijst als in de
	{\TeX}-NL e-mails zelf.}}
}

@article{maps:11-09,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-27}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{George Greenwade}},
 title     = {{INFO-{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This article is a adaption of the message send to new users
	on the INFO-{\TeX} distribution list. It describes some
	additional features of the LISTSERV (including some other
	mailing lists) and the additional FILESERV facillity.}}
}

@article{maps:11-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{28-35}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}},
 title     = {{FGBBS zes maanden later}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, bulletin board, LittleComm, Silver Express, offline reading, Fidonet, internet}},
 abstract  = {{Henk de Haan en Frans Goddijn geven een uitleg over de
	werkzaamheden aan FGBBS. Nadat een directory met
	boeken op disk was gewist, werd de {\LaTeX}-bibliotheek
	van FGBBS belangrijk uitgebreid. Er werd voor bezoekers
	een mogelijkheid geschapen om zowel in fidonet als
	Internet berichten te lezen en te schrijven. Ook een
	systeem voor offline reading werd aangelegd.}}
}

@article{maps:11-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{36-40}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{John Timmerman}},
 title     = {{Spoorboekje voor het inloggen op FGBBS met LittleComm}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, LittleComm, datacommunicatie}},
 abstract  = {{Zoals uit het kopje al blijkt, ga ik er hier vanuit dat
	je nog niet veel ervaring hebt met datacommunicatie, en
	dat je hebt gekozen voor het gebruik van LittleComm.
	LittleCommspoort je vlug, veilig en voordelig door het
	fascinerende land van de datacommunicatie. door hem
	gebruikte setup.}}
}

@article{maps:11-12,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-42}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Christina Thiele}},
 title     = {{Greetings from TUG}},
}

@article{maps:11-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-51}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{122kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{NTG's Lustrum}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, BBS, cooperation NLUUG, cooperation CyrTUG}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's youth in context is depicted, with a wink to the
	future.}}
}

@article{maps:11-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{52-56}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Huib van Krimpen}},
 title     = {{Ik ben een leek en vrij van pijnlijk weten}},
}

@article{maps:11-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-59}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{TUG '93}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX} companion, {\LaTeX}2.09, NTS, outline fonts, PDF, CTAN, TUG conference, Aston}},
 abstract  = {{This report contains the main issues as perceived by the
	author. The idea is to get the flavor and my view of the
	good items across, at the expense of completeness.}}
}

@article{maps:11-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{60-61}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{TUG Board of Directors}},
 keywords  = {{board-of-directors, conference planning, long-range planning, public relations, {\TeX}nical council, exchange of TUGboat and bulletins of LUGs}},
 abstract  = {{The following are the loosely formulated issues as perceived
	by me. For more preciseness the reader is referred to the
	(approved) minutes.}}
}

@article{maps:11-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{62-66}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{149kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{CyrTUG '93 and some more}},
 keywords  = {{CyrTUG, conference, cyrillics, MIR publishers}},
 abstract  = {{The first open CyrTUG meeting with a few participants from
	abroad. A rich touristic program next to the usual issues:
	courses, and special attention to the national {\TeX} problems.}}
}

@article{maps:11-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-87}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{273kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{What is {\TeX} and METAFONT all about?}},
 keywords  = {{AMS{\TeX}, electronic publishing, {\LaTeX}, METAFONT, EPS, SGML, hyper{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A survey of {\TeX}, its flavours, and its twin sister METAFONT,
	within the context of Electronic Publishing, is given.}}
}

@article{maps:11-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{88-102}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{177kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Gebruik en Management van {\TeX} in een Unix omgeving}},
 abstract  = {{Een {\TeX} systeem op een Unix systeem omhelst
	tegenwoordig veel meer dan alleen het gelijknamige
	programma. Een goed geïntegreerde werkomgeving is
	mogelijk voor het produceren van een veelzijdig scala aan
	documenten. We bespreken de structuur van het {\TeX}
	systeem, de gangbare hulpmiddelen en pakketten eromheen,
	zoals printer drivers, previewers, font beheer, grafische
	pakketten, bibliografiebeheer, index beheer, spelling
	controle e.d. Verder besteden we aandacht aan de beheers-
	en installatie aspecten ervan, zowel voor een stand-alone
	systeem als voor een client-server omgeving met eventueel
	heterogene systemen.}}
}

@article{maps:11-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{103-110}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Geoffrey Tobin}},
 title     = {{METAFONT for Beginners}},
 abstract  = {{This is not a tutorial on METAFONT. It is an attempt
	to describe how some of the pitfalls in running the program
	may, hopefully, be avoided.}}
}

@article{maps:11-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{111-114}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Robert Best}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (II)}},
 abstract  = {{Deze cursus is een vervolg op die in MAPS 93.1. Na een
	inleiding in het eerste hoofdstuk werden toen in de
	volgende hoofdstukken behandeld: Boxen, METAFONT en
	PostScript, Figuren en een vreemd alfabet, en tot slot
	INI{\TeX} en INIMF. In deze bijdrage vervolgen we met
	hoofdstuk 6: het maken van een mooie brief, niet via
	`boxen' in {\TeX} maar m.b.v. {\LaTeX}. In hoofdstuk 7
	bekijken we de `artikel-stijl', waarschijnlijk de meest
	gebruikte vorm van {\TeX}. Dat leidt tot een vergelijking
	van {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}. En tot een alternatief: {\TeX}sis.
	Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen in het
	blad ST uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de
	tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:11-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-125}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{134kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bobby Bodenheimer}},
 title     = {{Frequently Asked Questions (II)}},
 keywords  = {{FAQ, frequently asked questions, comp.text.tex}},
 abstract  = {{This article contains answers to some frequently asked
	questions on comp.text.tex. Please don't ask these
	questions again, as they've been answered many times
	before. Note that Guoying Chen
	(chen-guo@spunky.cs.nyu.edu) posts the monthly document
	Supplementary {\TeX} Information to this newsgroup
	containing other information and software relevant to
	{\TeX} users but beyond the scope of this article.}}
}

@article{maps:11-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{126-127}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Eberhard Mattes}},
 title     = {{Frequently Asked Questions about em{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{FAQ, frequently asked questions}},
 abstract  = {{This is an edited version of a document called
	em{\TeX}-user Frequently Asked Questions. Eberhard Mattes
	sent this document on october 3rd, 1993 to the em{\TeX}-user
	list. In the community of dutch {\TeX}-users em{\TeX} is
	widely spread. So questions to the list are probably also
	valuable for many em{\TeX}-users without direct access to
	the list.}}
}

@article{maps:11-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{128-130}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Frequently Asked Questions about 4{\TeX} (1)}},
 abstract  = {{In this note I have gathered some frequently asked
	questions and remarks. Most of the questions and answers
	were proposed in Dutch, so I tried to translate them into
	English. Blame me for (m)any bad English.}}
}

@article{maps:11-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{131-132}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1993/2)}},
 abstract  = {{Hier volgt opnieuw een selektie uit de NTG {\TeX}-NL
	discussielijst. Er werden enkele (korte) items uitgelicht
	uit de onderwerpen die aan bod gekomen zijn tussen juni en
	september 1993.}}
}

@article{maps:11-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{133-140}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{86kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{George Greenwade}},
 title     = {{The Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network (CTAN)}},
 keywords  = {{CTAN, archives, FTP}},
 abstract  = {{This paper outlines the concept, development, and use of
	the Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network (CTAN) — a
	network-accessible archive for files related to the {\TeX}
	family of document processing. The CTAN is a coordinated
	effort among consenting well-known archive sites which
	provides quick identification and retrieval files in a
	consistent manner from hosts on different continents,
	thereby reducing overall network load and increasing speed
	of retrieval. Moreover, it provides users with a parallel
	archive structure between hosts with holdings which are
	generally synchronized to within 30 hours of one another.
	This is achieved by routinely mirroring one another's
	holdings, as well as mirroring other archives to maintain
	an up-to-date collection of files.}}
}

@article{maps:11-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{141-154}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Phons Bloemen}},
 title     = {{4all{\TeX}: NTG's {\TeX} voor MS-DOS}},
 keywords  = {{em{\TeX}, 4{\TeX}, distribution}},
 abstract  = {{Presentatie van het 4all{\TeX} floppypakket. Opgezet als een
	{\TeX}-installatie samengepakt op 1 HD floppy, uitbreidbaar met
	`hapklare' brokken in de vorm van extra floppies. Het geheel
	is gebaseerd op het em{\TeX} pakket van Eberhard Mattes, en het
	4{\TeX}-pakket.}}
}

@article{maps:11-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{155-159}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{67kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Phons Bloemen}},
 title     = {{Shells for {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, {\TeX}Shell, user interface}},
 abstract  = {{This is a review of two `shell' programs for em{\TeX}, the
	PC-{\TeX} implementation of Eberhard Mattes. The `shells'
	provide an integrated development environment for making
	{\TeX} documents. The two `shells' presented here are
	{\TeX}SHELL by Jürgen Schlegelmilch, and 4{\TeX} by
	Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach and Maarten van der Vlerk.}}
}

@article{maps:11-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{160-162}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Some notes about {\TeX} and MS-Windows}},
 abstract  = {{Many people know about {\TeX} compilers and {\TeX}
	utilities for the MS-DOS PC. However, in the world of
	WINDOWS there is a lack of knowledge. This note is
	intended to inform people who like to run {\TeX} under
	WINDOWS and want all the good stuff that WINDOWS and {\TeX}
	offers.}}
}

@article{maps:11-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{163-166}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roger Hunter}},
 title     = {{A Future for {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The future of {\TeX} is invisibility. The role of {\TeX}
	should be similar to that of the microprocessor in a PC.
	The microprocessor is the heart of the system, but is
	completely invisible except for the sticker which says
	`intel inside.' {\TeX} must be made invisible with
	appropriate front-ends. These front-ends should emphasize
	the manipulation of content over appearance and reverse
	the trend toward WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get)
	interfaces with their emphasis on manipulation of
	appearance. Content-oriented interfaces provide far
	greater user productivity than WYSIWYG systems, and {\TeX}
	is the ideal basis for such systems.}}
}

@article{maps:11-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{167-170}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{50kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}},
 title     = {{Scientific Word,... een eerste indruk}},
 abstract  = {{Eind 1992 kreeg ik een beta-versie van Scientific Word in de
	bus. Dhr. Kruger was toen zo vriendelijk om mij dit pakket
	toe te sturen ter evaluatie. Hierna volgt het rapport(je)
	met mijn bevindingen dat ik hem destijds toestuurde.
	Zonder twijfel is het product inmiddels verder
	geëvalueerd en zijn mijn bevindingen dan ook
	hoogswaarschijnlijk niet echt meer `up to date'.}}
}

@article{maps:11-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{171-176}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{151kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{The ease of including graphics in {\TeX} documents using 4{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{In this paper we will show how 4{\TeX} can be used to
	incorporate graphics in {\TeX} documents. Using 4{\TeX} it
	not only becomes easy to include graphics in {\TeX} files,
	but also makes it possible to preview and print {\TeX}
	documents (including graphics) on any machine and any
	printer. For inserting graphics in {\TeX} documents, 4{\TeX}
	uses the style file figures.sty, the shareware programs
	{\TeX}CAD and GRAPHIC WORKSHOP, and the freeware programs:
	HP2XX, BM2FONT,PCLTOMSP, and GhostScript. All these
	programs are discussed and we also discuss how 4{\TeX}
	uses the strength of these programs to incorporate
	graphics in {\TeX} documents.}}
}

@article{maps:11-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{177-184}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{77kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, Alexander Samarin}},
 title     = {{Customizing {\LaTeX} lists}},
 abstract  = {{In this article, which is part of the third chapter of
	our forthcoming book `A {\LaTeX} Companion', we take a look
	at {\LaTeX}'s list environments. First the various
	parameters and commands controlling the standard {\LaTeX}
	lists, enumerate, itemize,anddescription, are discussed.
	Then the general list environment is introduced and we
	tell you how to build custom layouts by varying the values
	of the parameters controlling this environment.}}
}

@article{maps:11-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{185-186}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{An update on the babel system}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the changes that have been made to
	the babel system, since the article describing the system
	appeared in TUGboat Volume 12, number 2. This article
	announces the release of a new version of the babel
	system.}}
}

@article{maps:11-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{187-190}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet Tutelaers}},
 title     = {{Herziene afbreekpatronen voor het Nederlands}},
 keywords  = {{hyphenation, new dutch}},
 abstract  = {{Dutch hyphenation patterns for {\TeX}
	based upon `Groene boekje 1990'}}
}

@article{maps:11-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{191-193}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Donald Arseneau}},
 title     = {{Typesetting paragraphs of a specified shape}},
 abstract  = {{Editor's note: This description of an unusual macro file,
	shapepar.sty, is taken from the documentation; the full
	style file can be found in CTAN archives.}}
}

@article{maps:11-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{194-198}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{70kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Marek Ryćko, Bogusław Jackowski}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} from \verb|\indent| to \verb|\par|}},
}

@article{maps:11-38,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{199-200}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rob de Jeu}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} at WKAP in Dordrecht}},
 abstract  = {{In this article, I will explain a couple of things about
	the use of {\LaTeX} at Wolters Kluwer Academic Publishers
	(WKAP), a scientific publisher in Dordrecht. WKAP came
	into existence in the '80s after the merger between D.
	Reidel Publishing Company, Martinus Nijhoff and Dr W.
	Junk. Each year, WKAP publishes approximately 200
	scientific journals and about 500 books (in reality, 200
	scientific journal titles translates into some 1200
	journal issues).}}
}

@article{maps:11-39,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{201-204}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} en braille... een illusie?}},
 abstract  = {{Ongetwijfeld zal bovenstaande titel menig NTG-lid de
	wenkbrauwen doen fronsen...: Typografie, laat staan
	{\TeX}, is nu wel het laatste wat wij in verband brengen met
	onze blinde medemens. In de volgende paragrafen zal ik
	pogen te verklaren waarom ik {\TeX} als een mogelijk
	hulpmiddel zie voor de produktie van (eenvoudige)
	documenten in braille.}}
}

@article{maps:11-40,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{205-210}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's bibliography — a generic approach}},
 keywords  = {{literature database, bibliography, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A new and flexible approach to maintaining and using a
	bibliography database within (All){\TeX} is provided.}}
}

@article{maps:11-41,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{211-212}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Matrix icons via {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{matrix icons, {\LaTeX}, picture environment}},
 abstract  = {{Some macros for typesetting matrix icons are provided,
	based upon {\LaTeX}'s picture environment, which don't
	need coordinate awareness: just the (dimensionless) sizes
	of the `boxes.'}}
}

@article{maps:11-42,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{213-215}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Włodek Bzyl, Tomasz Przechlewski}},
 title     = {{An application of literate programming: creating a format for the bulletin of the Polish TUG}},
}

@article{maps:11-43,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{216-218}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mary Dyson}},
 title     = {{Teaching Typography — The Didot Project}},
 keywords  = {{digital typography, curriculum development, letterforms, project report}},
 abstract  = {{This paper briefly outlines the Didot project on teaching
	digital typography. A key issue, namely the nature of the
	interaction between computer and design specialists, is
	discussed and related to the type of material that could
	be included in a curriculum for digital typography.
	Teaching methods and material that have been developed in
	this area are outlined and an evaluation of one of these
	methods is described.}}
}

@article{maps:11-44,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{219-220}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Chris Rowley, Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{Announcement {\LaTeX}2e — A New Version of {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX}2e is a new, standard version of {\LaTeX}-prepared
	and supported by the {\LaTeX}3 Project Team.}}
}

@article{maps:11-45,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{221-222}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Review of recent {\LaTeX} books}},
 keywords  = {{book review}},
 abstract  = {{Reviews of `A Guide to {\LaTeX}, Document Preparation for
	Beginners and Advanced Users' (Helmut Kopka and Patrick Daly),
	`{\LaTeX} Line By Line, Tips and Techniques for Document
	Processing' (Antoni Diller).}}
}

@article{maps:11-46,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{223}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Ferguson}},
 title     = {{The Technical Council and Special Interest Working Groups}},
}

@article{maps:11-47,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{224-225}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mary Dyson}},
 title     = {{Call for papers: TEP'94 \& TUG'94}},
 keywords  = {{call for papers, TEP, TUG conference, Darmstadt, Santa Barbara}},
 abstract  = {{call for papers for TEP'94 and for TUG'94.}}
}

@article{maps:11-48,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{226-227}},
 year      = {{1993}},
 volume    = {{11}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 14.1, 14.2 and 14.3.}}
}

@book{maps:12,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-177}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{2821kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 94.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:12-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-5}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{70kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1994/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 12e NTG bijeenkomst 18 november 1993;
	Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 10 juni 1993;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	Begroting 1994;
	Wat verder ter tafel komt;
	{\LaTeX}3;
	MAPS;
	Verslag bijeenkomsten;
	Verslag werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag;
	Voordrachten: `(La){\TeX} gebruikersomgeving';
	Volgende bijeenkomsten;
	Sluiting}}
}

@article{maps:12-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6-7}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:12-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-10}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1994/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:12-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-12}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1994/1)}},
}

@article{maps:12-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1993}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:12-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-16}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1993}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:12-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{17-18}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{Use of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} within the NTG community}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, {\LaTeX}3}},
 abstract  = {{At the 1993 spring meeting of the Dutch {\TeX} User Group
	(NTG) the NTG Board was asked to find out in what way
	{\TeX} and {\LaTeX} is used by its members. Main motivation
	for this question was to find out how important funding of
	the {\LaTeX}-3 project for the members of NTG is.
	Therefore it was necessary to have insight in the use of
	{\TeX} and related products/macro packages. It was decided
	that the board should held a inquiry among the members and
	if possible present the results at the fall 1993 meeting.
	This article describes the results of the survey.}}
}

@article{maps:12-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-21}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{67kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{The making of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}},
 keywords  = {{CDROM, 4all{\TeX}, 4{\TeX}, ISO9660}},
 abstract  = {{In about one half year the world's first turn-key {\TeX}
	system on CD-ROM was produced. It contains the ms-dos
	{\TeX} workbench 4{\TeX} version 3.20 in perhaps the largest
	form ever, plus many {\TeX} sources that are valuable to
	any {\TeX} user. In this article we present a look behind
	the scenes, so you get some insight in the course of
	events that mark the production of NTG's first CD-ROM.}}
}

@article{maps:12-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{22-24}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}},
 title     = {{FGBBS: de jonge jarige}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, bulletin board, Fidonet, internet, 4all{\TeX}, LittleComm, CDROM}},
 abstract  = {{Stonden de eerste zes maanden van het FGBBS in het teken
	van onafgebroken uitbreiding van file- en
	berichtengebieden en het telkens vergroten van de beoogde
	gebruikersvriendelijkheid, het afgelopen halfjaar hebben
	we met succes gestreefd naar stabilisatie van het systeem,
	overigens zonder de actualiteit uit het oog te
	verliezen.}}
}

@article{maps:12-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-26}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{4{\TeX} 3.20 a technical note}},
 abstract  = {{With the release of the CD-ROM there will also be a new
	release of the 4{\TeX} workbench (version 3.20). In this
	note I will try and explain what will be different from
	the earlier versions (e.g. installed with 4all{\TeX}).}}
}

@article{maps:12-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-30}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Frequently Asked Questions about 4{\TeX} (2)}},
}

@article{maps:12-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-33}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{100kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Robert Best}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (III)}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Draw, MIDI{\TeX}, Music{\TeX}, Big{\TeX}, MakeIndex}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX}Draw wordt getest. Veel Atari ST's worden gebruikt
	om electronisch muziek te maken, op te nemen (MIDI) en af
	te drukken in muziekschrift. Dat afdrukken kan ook met
	{\TeX}. Uitbreidingen van {\TeX} zoals {\LaTeX}, {\TeX}sis en
	Music{\TeX} maken het zetwerk makkelijker en mooier, maar
	{\TeX} heeft ook meer werkruimte nodig. We maken een
	Big{\TeX} en een trefwoordenregister voor een lange tekst.
	Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het
	blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de
	tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:12-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{34-36}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mark van Veen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (IV)}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}2e}},
 abstract  = {{Deze keer gaat het over een recent uitgekomen
	macro-pakket, dat {\LaTeX}2e heet. Dit pakket vormt een
	krachtige set macro's, waarmee je zonder al te veel van
	{\TeX} af te weten goed uitziende teksten kan produceren.
	Deze cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het
	blad ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de
	tekst genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:12-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-46}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}2e, an overview}},
 abstract  = {{This article gives an overview of the new or extended
	user commands available with {\LaTeX}2e, the new {\LaTeX}
	release, compared to the previous version {\LaTeX} 2.09.
	After introducing the newpreamble commands, the extensions
	for defining new commands and environments, and handling
	length and boxes are discussed. The new font selection
	commands are explained, both for text and math, and it is
	shown how to easily use different font families. A list of
	supported class and package files is given and new
	possibilities for controlling page contents and floats are
	discussed. Most of this material is described in much
	greater detail in `The {\LaTeX} Companion' and in the
	second edition of the {\LaTeX} Reference Manual.}}
}

@article{maps:12-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-49}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Standard Document Classes and Packages}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the Document Classes and Packages
	that are availabel or will be available shortly for use
	with {\LaTeX}2e . The number of available Packages and
	Classes will obviously change once {\LaTeX}2e is the
	`official' {\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:12-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{50-52}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Upgrading old styles}},
 abstract  = {{This article deals with the things you have to look for
	when upgrading and old .sty file for {\LaTeX}2e , turning
	it into either a Document Class or a Package.}}
}

@article{maps:12-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-57}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{359kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{A brief guide to {\TeX} assistants}},
 abstract  = {{This paper offers a `back to basics' overview of the
	various types of software which are of assistance to the
	{\TeX}nical writer on a personal computer (this includes
	Unix machines, but excludes, for instance, VMS or VM/CMS
	systems). It is based on a presentation to the October
	UK-TUG meeting, and I am grateful to the other speakers,
	and our chairman Allan Reese, for insights and news. I
	would also like to refer readers to the Dutch {\TeX}
	Group's journal MAPS, whose issue 93.2 contains a variety
	of useful papers on {\TeX} interfaces, two of which are
	reproduced in Baskerville Volume 3.2 (December 1993).}}
}

@article{maps:12-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{58-59}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Jeffrey}},
 title     = {{Building virtual fonts with `fontinst'}},
 abstract  = {{This document gives a brief overview of the fontinst
	package. The fontinst package is used to build virtual
	fonts (VFs) which allow PostScript fonts to be used as
	drop-in replacements for the Computer Modern fonts in
	{\TeX}. Below, I'll describe VFs briefly, and describe how
	they can be built using the fontinst package.}}
}

@article{maps:12-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{60-62}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nikos Drakos}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} to Hypertext Conversion with {\LaTeX}2HTML}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML is a conversion tool that allows existing
	documents written in {\LaTeX} to become part of a global
	multimedia system. This paper presents some of the reasons
	for using such a system and describes the basic conversion
	process.}}
}

@article{maps:12-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{63-68}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{200kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{Colour slides with {\LaTeX} and `seminar.sty'}},
}

@article{maps:12-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-91}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{550kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Norman Walsh}},
 title     = {{Making {\TeX} work}},
 keywords  = {{book, table of contents, abstract, preface, book review, review}},
 abstract  = {{This article contains the Table of Contents, Preface, and
	Chapter 4 of `Making {\TeX} Work' by Norman Walsh; published
	by O'Reilly and Associates (ISBN 1-56592-051-1). No effort
	has been made to preserve the `look and feel' of the book
	in this text, and some simplifications have been performed
	(particularly with respect to special formatting issues
	and package names).}}
}

@article{maps:12-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{92}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Thompson}},
 title     = {{Review of `Making {\TeX} work'}},
 keywords  = {{book review, review}},
 abstract  = {{This is a review of the book `Making {\TeX} Work' by Norman
	Walsch}}
}

@article{maps:12-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{93-96}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dimitrios Filippou}},
 title     = {{Typesetting Greek texts by {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, Greek, fonts, packages, freeware, commercial}},
 abstract  = {{This paper contains some information on whatever exists
	for typesetting by {\TeX} documents which contain entirely
	or in part Greek text. Those who would like to typeset
	Greek texts not by plain {\TeX}, but rather with {\LaTeX},
	may find this short article quite useful as well.}}
}

@article{maps:12-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{97-99}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Angelika Binding}},
 title     = {{Springer authors do it with {\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:12-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{100-102}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-verwerking bij PRAGMA}},
 keywords  = {{use of {\TeX}, practice}},
 abstract  = {{PRAGMA uses {\TeX} for producing educational texts. To facilitate
	development of educational materials, a dedicated macro package has been
	developed as well as a full featured {\TeX}(t) editing environment.}}
}

@article{maps:12-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{103-105}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Computerondersteund tekstgebruik}},
}

@article{maps:12-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{106-107}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Data publishing}},
 keywords  = {{databases, spreadsheet, tables}},
 abstract  = {{This paper demonstrates how commercial software and {\LaTeX}
	can work together in data publishing.}}
}

@article{maps:12-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{108-110}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Table design}},
 keywords  = {{tables design, rules, whitespace, fonts, alignment, justification}},
 abstract  = {{A critical look at table typesetting as practiced by {\LaTeX}
	users, with before-and-after examples.}}
}

@article{maps:12-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{111-114}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Transparencies}},
 keywords  = {{foils, formatting, generic style, slides, transparencies}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} macros for formatting transparencies are provided.
	The macros have been designed with reusability of earlier
	formatted document parts in mind, with a wink to
	maintenance of the tranparency set.}}
}

@article{maps:12-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Bibliography}},
 keywords  = {{literature database, bibliography, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{In addition to the earlier method of maintaining a
	database in {\TeX}, it is shown how to load the entries
	selectively, without modifying the entries of the
	database.}}
}

@article{maps:12-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{116-118}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Verbatim}},
 keywords  = {{escape character, formatting, generic style, semi-transparent, verbatim}},
 abstract  = {{A suite of macros for verbatim mode is provided, which
	are simple, concise and flexible. The functionalities are:
	verbatim text, and file verbatim inclusion, with `options'
	for numbering and enabling of metacode. Options can be
	supplied via the toks variable \verb|\thisverbatim|,
	and globally via \verb|\everyverbatim|. The place within
	context can be handled via the defs \verb|\preverbatim|
	and \verb|\postverbatim|. The macros are context
	independent and can be used at the inner level with
	Any{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:12-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{119-150}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{361kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{TUGboat BLUes}},
 keywords  = {{block comment, computer-assisted typography, Euro{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, markup, optional parameters, preprints, publisher formats, TTN, TUGboat, multi-columns, verbatim}},
 abstract  = {{The significance of TUGboat for the {\TeX} community at
	large is praised. (l)tugboat.sty, tugboat.cmn and the TUG
	authors' guide are discussed, next to their siblings
	(l)tugproc.sty and the option euro{\TeX}.sty. Article
	templates for the various `styles as is' are provided.
	Independent and in addition to these I included customing
	files. Also included is my concrete proposal for a tug.ppt
	style-for preprints of tugboat.sty, and tugproc.sty, in
	the spirit of ams.ppt. Furthermore, a new and simple
	alternative to the handling of options for {\TeX} is
	proposed, based on the toks variable \verb|\this<foo>|,
	analogous to \verb|\every<foo>|. This is applied to handling
	verbatims, with as a result a compact suite of verbatim macros
	to be used with Any{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:12-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{151-152}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nico Poppelier}},
 title     = {{Book review: `Practical SGML' \& `Math into {\TeX}'}},
 keywords  = {{book review, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{Two new books are discussed: `Practical SGML' from Eric
	Herwijnen, and `math into {\TeX}, a simple introduction to
	AMS-{\LaTeX}' from George Grätzer.}}
}

@article{maps:12-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{153-154}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Donald Arseneau, Raymond Chen, Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{The {\TeX} Hierarchy}},
 abstract  = {{For the UNIX operating system, a list of
	characterizations exists describing what constitutes a
	novice, a user, a guru, ... Here we give a similar list
	for users of {\TeX}. The reader is kindly asked to take this
	purely in a humorous vein.}}
}

@article{maps:12-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{155-156}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{Obtaining {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{CTAN, FTP, archives}},
 abstract  = {{The UK{\TeX} Archive (Internet `Daughter' archive) on
	ftp.{\TeX}.ac.uk is part of a collaborating network of
	archives organised by the {\TeX} Users Group known as CTAN
	(Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network). The three main
	archives now follow the same structure and have identical
	files (ftp.{\TeX}.ac.uk, ftp.shsu.edu and
	ftp.uni-stuttgart.de).}}
}

@article{maps:12-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{157-158}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Leslie Lamport, {\LaTeX}3 project team}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}2e — Second Test Release}},
 abstract  = {{The second test release of {\LaTeX} is now available.
	Notes about this release are at the end of this
	announcement. The first release revealed a few serious
	bugs and several other areas which need attention. Many
	people reported that documents and style files had been
	processed by the new system without serious problems; this
	includes one very important test — the original text of
	`The {\LaTeX} Manual'! We can also report that this release
	has been tested with all the files in the {\LaTeX} 2.09
	test suite and produces only predictable differences in
	the output.}}
}

@article{maps:12-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{159-164}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Thomas}},
 title     = {{Literate Programming Frequently Asked Questions}},
 abstract  = {{This document is for new and experienced users of
	literate programming tools. The purpose is to explain the
	concept of literate programming and to provide a resource
	for locating files of interest to literate programmers and
	those interested in literate programming.}}
}

@article{maps:12-38,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{165-166}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Report Bacho{\TeX}'94}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, trip report, music, book design, BLUe introduction}},
 abstract  = {{Education was about:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item survey of {\TeX},
	\item Polish typographical tradition,
	\item {\LaTeX}2e,
	\item LaMeX2e,
	\item Indexing and bibliography making,
	\item dvips use and so on,
	\item fonts with {\TeX} and PostScript,
	\item METAFONT.
	\end{itemize}
	The contributions to the conference were about:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item emerging GUST archive,
	\item {\LaTeX} and Polish,
	\item AmS{\LaTeX}.
	\end{itemize}
	Phil Taylor had the stage when talking in full colour about
	book design. Kees van der Laan talked about Manmac, and his
	BLUe system.}}
}

@article{maps:12-39,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{167}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Report N{\TeX}'94}},
 keywords  = {{Nordic TUG, NTUG annual meeting}},
 abstract  = {{The meeting of the Nordic countries was attended. Few people
	did show up because of the distance. Issues at stake were:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item hyphenation patterns for Norwegian,
	\item how to create your own documentsstyle,
	\item TUGboat blues.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:12-40,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{168-169}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement TUG '94}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Santa Barbara}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of TUG '94 conference.}}
}

@article{maps:12-41,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{170}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement Euro{\TeX}'94}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, announcement, Gdansk}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of Euro{\TeX}'94 conference.}}
}

@article{maps:12-42,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{171-174}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Announcement 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}},
 keywords  = {{announcement, 4{\TeX}, 4all{\TeX}, CDROM}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of NTG's 4all{\TeX} cd-rom}}
}

@article{maps:12-43,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{175}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Cursusaankondiging 4{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{courses, 4{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Aankondiging 4{\TeX} cursus}}
}

@article{maps:12-44,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{176-177}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{12}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Table of Contents TUGboat}},
 keywords  = {{TUGboat, contents}},
 abstract  = {{Table of contents of TUGboat Volume 14.4, and 15.1.}}
}

@book{maps:13,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-214}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{3930kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 94.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:13-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1994/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 13e NTG bijeenkomst 9 juni 1994;
	Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 18 november 1993;
	Ingekomen stukken en Mededelingen;
	NTG ledenvergadering;
	Verslag werkgroepen;
	Rondvraag en Sluiting;
	Voordrachten: `{\TeX} en Educatie';
	Volgende bijeenkomsten;
	Sluiting}}
}

@article{maps:13-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:13-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1994/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:13-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-9}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1994/2)}},
}

@article{maps:13-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-11}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Listserver {\TeX}-NL}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:13-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12-13}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG's Listserver 4{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, 4{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:13-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{14-17}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{69kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Verslag TUG '94}},
 keywords  = {{conference, TUG conference, Santa Barbara}},
}

@article{maps:13-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{18-22}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Goossens at TUG '94}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Santa Barbara}},
}

@article{maps:13-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{23-26}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{338kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Report CyrTUG '94}},
 keywords  = {{CyrTUG, Dubna, PostScript, {\LaTeX}2e}},
 abstract  = {{A magnificant trip to get to know the CyrTUG and its
	chapters better. Not only Moscow, but also Kazan and
	St-Petersburg. The driving force is hosted at MIR. The
	cooperation of the JINR at Dubna and CyrTUG is bound te
	become beneficial. As usual there were courses around the
	conference. Issues discussed during the conference:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item {\LaTeX} developments,
	\item Use of colours,
	\item {\LaTeX} and PostScript,
	\item UNIX platforms next to DOS,
	\item Various user reports,
	\item BLUe's set of macros on top of manmac.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:13-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-30}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Goossens at Euro{\TeX}'94 in Gdansk}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Gdansk}},
 abstract  = {{Report of Euro{\TeX}'94 conference in Gdansk.}}
}

@article{maps:13-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{31-33}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Henk de Haan}},
 title     = {{FGBBS: de kastelein}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, bulletin board, Fidonet, FrontDoor, internet, 4all{\TeX}, CDROM}},
 abstract  = {{De komst van de 4all{\TeX} CD-ROMs heeft de afgelopen
	maanden voor veel nieuws gezorgd, ook op FGBBS. Het NTG
	schonk FGBBS een CD-ROM drive, waarop de 4all{\TeX} werd
	geplaatst. Inmiddels is de tweede editie 4all{\TeX} gearriveerd,
	en deze is in zijn geheel beschikbaar via het bulletin board
	systeem.}}
}

@article{maps:13-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{34-36}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{General information 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, 4all{\TeX}, CDROM}},
 abstract  = {{The most important items concerning the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}
}

@article{maps:13-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{37-38}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Paijmans}},
 title     = {{4all{\TeX}, the ultimate {\TeX}-resource}},
 keywords  = {{4all{\TeX}, review}},
 abstract  = {{In het Nederlandse maandblad `Personal Computer Magazine'
	verscheen in het oktober nummer de hier beschreven
	recensie van {\LaTeX}/{\TeX} en de onlangs verschenen
	4all{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}
}

@article{maps:13-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{39}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Renkema}},
 title     = {{The NTG 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM on the Macintosh}},
}

@article{maps:13-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40-42}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Makefont: a new 4{\TeX} utility}},
 abstract  = {{The second release of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM comes with
	4{\TeX} 3.25. This version of 4{\TeX} has a new utility that
	is not described in the manual. In this note I will
	explain the use of this extra feature: Makefont. With the
	makefont utility it becomes easy to include whatever
	PostScript font you need into your (La){\TeX} documents.
	If you have a complete font family of PostScript fonts you
	can also decide to develop your own style file and use
	this as your default font family (instead of the CMR
	family).}}
}

@article{maps:13-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{43-44}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Robert Best}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (V)}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} kan niet alleen instructies uitvoeren maar ook
	vragen. Het resultaat hangt dan af van de antwoorden van
	de gebruiker: interactie. Als voorbeeld maken we een brief
	waarbij de gebruiker (die niets van {\TeX} hoeft te weten)
	nog de afzender en de geadresseerde kan aangeven. En
	... {\TeX} doet niet moeilijk over Poolse accenten. Deze
	cursus is een herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad
	ST, uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst
	genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:13-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{45-50}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rens Swart}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} zonder omhaal; voor Atari ST en andere PC's (VI)}},
 abstract  = {{METAFONT is een programma waarmee het mogelijk is om via
	wiskundig beschreven curves en oppervlakken lettertypes
	of andere symbolen te ontwerpen. Deze kunnen gebruikt
	worden in het zetprogramma {\TeX}. Dit artikel gaat niet in
	op het werkelijke ontwerp-proces en zelfs nauwelijks op de
	faciliteiten die METAFONT hiertoe biedt, maar op de vraag
	hoe METAFONT functioneert in de Atari-omgeving, gebaseerd
	op het Public Domain pakket van Christoph Strunk. Kortom:
	hoe kun je aan het werk met METAFONT? Deze cursus is een
	herdruk van een serie artikelen uit het blad ST,
	uitgegeven door Stichting ST. Daar zijn de in de tekst
	genoemde schijfjes te verkrijgen.}}
}

@article{maps:13-18,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{51}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Langbein}},
 title     = {{N{\TeX} 1.2}},
}

@article{maps:13-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-54}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{BLUe blood in math mode?}},
 keywords  = {{Palatino, Johan Polak, Donald Knuth, Hermann Zapf, math fonts, TYPO-L, typography}},
 abstract  = {{Some time ago I started work on a book (a collection of
	letters written by one of the most renowned Dutch
	publishers, Johan Polak) and at the time I was typesetting
	it in the Palatino font. Then I heard that the creator of
	Palatino, the world famous Hermann Zapf, has worked with
	Donald Knuth. What did they do, I wondered? Is {\TeX} more
	famous than we think it is? Did the fingers of both
	geniuses touch in the creation of our Math fonts? The
	replies to my queries in TYPO-L were promising. You
	decide.}}
}

@article{maps:13-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{55-56}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{42kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{CijferBLUes: Verborgen schoonheid in {\LaTeX} 2.09}},
 keywords  = {{oldstyle, mediaeval, digits, numbers}},
 abstract  = {{Een toevallige samenloop van omstandigheden brengt een
	even verbluffend mooie als oeroude optie van {\TeX} aan het
	licht, die tot dusverre door bijna iedereen over het hoofd is
	gezien. Prachtige `hangende cijfers' zijn in de
	standaard Computer Modern fonts al sinds jaar en dag
	beschikbaar, als math italic.}}
}

@article{maps:13-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{The new {\LaTeX}: {\LaTeX}2e}},
 abstract  = {{The {\LaTeX}3 project team is pleased to announce the
	release of the new standard version of {\LaTeX}. It is
	upwardly compatible with existing {\LaTeX} documents, and
	contains new features including the long-awaited graphics
	extensions.}}
}

@article{maps:13-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{58-64}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{101kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Document Classes and Packages for {\LaTeX}2e}},
 abstract  = {{In the first section of this article I describe what
	document classes and packages are and how they relate to
	{\LaTeX} 2.09's style files. Then the process of upgrading
	existing style files for use with {\LaTeX}2e is described.
	Finally I give an overview of the standard packages and
	document classes that are part of the distribution of
	{\LaTeX}2e.}}
}

@article{maps:13-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-72}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{164kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dag Langmyhr}},
 title     = {{How to make your own document style in {\LaTeX}2e}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}2e, document class design, document class implementation, lecture notes}},
 abstract  = {{The new {\LaTeX}2e makes it very easy to create new
	document classes. This paper describes how to use the new
	features of {\LaTeX}2e. The class `lecnotes' — a
	document class suitable for lecture notes — is used as an
	example.}}
}

@article{maps:13-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{73-110}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{798kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Tetsuo Iwakumay, Tetsuo Furukawa}},
 title     = {{A Guide to use Macros and Style Files in {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}2.09, optional style files}},
 abstract  = {{People may not need to read this article any more if
	{\LaTeX}2e has been completed. But since this is somehow
	transient period from {\LaTeX} v.2.09 to a new one, this
	kind of documents may be useful for those who are making
	documents every day and night. This is a concise guide for
	these people. Authors are hoping this may become a help to
	many users of {\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:13-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{111-114}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{199kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Henk de Haan}},
 title     = {{Een proefschrift zonder knippen en plakken}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX} wordt voor veel verschillende soorten drukwerk
	gebruikt. In dit artikel wordt het vormgeven van een
	proefschrift met behulp van {\LaTeX}2e beschreven. Hierbij
	spelen de persoonlijke voorkeuren van de auteur een
	belangrijke rol, zonder dat daarbij de krachtige
	mogelijkheden van {\LaTeX} onbenut blijven.}}
}

@article{maps:13-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{115-117}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{88kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Renkema}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}: buitengewoon goed tekstverwerken}},
 abstract  = {{In bepaalde kringen is het tekstverwerkingsprogramma (of
	beter: het zetsysteem) {\TeX} bijzonder populair. Het
	programma is vrij verkrijgbaar bij Bulletin Boards en
	bestaat ook in een versie voor de Mac. Hans Renkema is een
	enthousiaste {\TeX} Macintosh gebruiker. In dit artikel
	geeft hij een beschrijving van {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:13-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{118-122}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Simon Pepping}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} en SGML bij Elsevier Science}},
 keywords  = {{Elsevier, electronic publishing, {\LaTeX}, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft enkele aspekten van Elsevier Science's
	electronic publishing programma. Alle tijdschriften in de Physics en
	Mathematics uitgeefprogramma's accepteren {\LaTeX} files van auteurs
	en gebruiken die voor publikatie. De dvi files gebruiken PostScript
	fonts die gekombineerd zijn in in-huis ontwikkelde virtuele fonts. In
	andere wetenschappelijke disciplines worden auteurs files van een
	breed scala aan tekstverwerkings programmas geaccepteerd en gebruikt
	voor publikatie.
	In zijn toekomstige electronic publishing strategie kent Elsevier
	Science een centrale rol toe aan SGML. Alle binnenkomende artikelen
	zullen uniform gestruktureerd worden met gebruik van SGML. Alle
	benodigde publikatietypen zullen uit deze ene bron worden
	gegenereerd. {\TeX} is een uitstekende formatter voor sommige van deze
	publikatietypen.}}
}

@article{maps:13-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{123-126}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{Real life book production — lessons learned from `The {\LaTeX} Companion'}},
 abstract  = {{Some aspects of the production of The {\LaTeX} Companion are
	described.}}
}

@article{maps:13-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{127-135}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{96kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Headers and footers in {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Standard {\LaTeX} offers the page styles empty, plain,
	headings and myheadings. For simple page layouts these
	suffice, but they are rather rigid. A more flexible page
	layout may be obtained by using the FANCYHEADINGS package.
	This article describes how to create advanced page headers
	and footers in {\LaTeX} documents by using this package.
	Some of the techniques described are also applicable with
	other page styles.}}
}

@article{maps:13-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{136-138}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{114kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Phons Bloemen}},
 title     = {{METAFONT als matrixprinter}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT}},
 abstract  = {{Een verslagje van een stoeipartij met METAFONT, waarbij
	METAFONT wordt `misbruikt' als matrixprinter. Door alleen
	de vorm van de `printnaalden' te definiëren, en een
	beperkt aantal plaatsen waar ze neer mogen komen, kun je
	heel snel een font in elkaar zetten.}}
}

@article{maps:13-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{139-148}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{131kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Phons Bloemen}},
 title     = {{PostScript fonts in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript fonts, automated font generation, font installation}},
 abstract  = {{A guide through the jungle of installing and using
	PostScript and other types of fonts in {\TeX}. The
	installation of the font is discussed, and it is shown how
	to use the fonts in an automatic font generation scheme.}}
}

@article{maps:13-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{149-152}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{148kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jos Winnink}},
 title     = {{(Al)Dra{\TeX}, a package for doing (portable) graphics in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{graphics, {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, Dra{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Eitan Gurari's graphics package for (La){\TeX} is discucced.}}
}

@article{maps:13-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{153-166}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{495kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jeroen Fokke, Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Plaatjes in een tekst}},
 abstract  = {{In deze artikel wordt eerst aandacht besteed aan de
	(beperkte) mogelijkheden die {\LaTeX} zelf biedt voor het
	maken van plaatjes. Soms zijn die voldoende, en dan is het
	wel zo gemakkelijk om die te gebruiken. Daarna wordt de
	rol van PostScript besproken bij het gebruik van plaatjes,
	al of niet in combinatie met {\LaTeX}. Vervolgens wordt een
	vijftal tekenprogramma's besproken waarmee interactief
	ingewikkeldere figuren gemaakt kunnen worden. Tenslotte
	wordt aangegeven hoe `bitmaps' (letterlijke afbeeldingen
	van het scherm van een computer) als plaatje behandeld
	kunnen worden. Dit laatste is vooral van belang bij het
	schrijven van handleidingen voor programma's.}}
}

@article{maps:13-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{167-177}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{201kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{PPCH{\TeX}: Chemische Structuurformules in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t chemics, PPCH{\TeX}, chemical formulas, structure formulas}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt een macropakket beschreven waarmee
	chemische (structuur)formules kunnen worden gezet. Dit
	pakket is te gebruiken bovenop Plain {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} en
	andere pakketten. Het pakket is in eerste instantie
	ontwikkeld bovenop Con{\TeX}t.\\
	This article is about a package for typesetting chemical
	formulas. The package has a multi-lingual interface. This
	means that all all commands and keywords can be toggled to
	English. Some day, this article and the manual will be
	translated in English too.}}
}

@article{maps:13-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{178-182}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Een meertalige interface naar {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{interface, user interface, multilingual interface, Con{\TeX}t interface}},
 abstract  = {{Macropakketten voor {\TeX} zijn vrijwel altijd
	Engelstalig. In dit artikel wordt een meertalige interface
	beschreven, zoals die is toegepast in PPCH{\TeX}, een pakket
	dat kan worden gebruikt om chemische structuurformules te
	zetten.}}
}

@article{maps:13-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{183}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Sub- en Superscripts in Chemische Formules}},
 keywords  = {{superscript alignment, subscript alignment, PPCH{\TeX}, font dimensions}},
 abstract  = {{In dit (korte) artikel wordt een mechanisme beschreven om
	subscript op een lijn te krijgen. Dit is nodig omdat de
	positie van een subscript mede bepaald wordt door de
	hoogte en diepte van een eventueel aanwezig superscript.}}
}

@article{maps:13-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{184-188}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Kuykens}},
 title     = {{MIDI2{\TeX}, een Music{\TeX} tool}},
}

@article{maps:13-38,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{189-199}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{137kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Format}},
 keywords  = {{active documents, design, documentation, error handling, floats, format, inner versus outer world, inserts, lifephases formats, markup language, plain {\TeX}, scripts, software engineering, reusable software parts, style, transparencies}},
 abstract  = {{An independent format — blue.fmt — is proposed to
	assist authors with creating, formatting, exchanging and
	maintaining compuscripts during the lifephases of
	publications. The format builds upon manmac.{\TeX} and the
	functionalities provided by tugboat.sty. Experience gained
	by publishers has been picked up too, because of my
	in-depth study of the activities of AMS with respect to
	{\TeX} formatting. More recent work of Knuth and co-authors
	has been borrowed from gkpmac.{\TeX}. The design goal was to
	provide a format which suits me, which is easy to
	customize — to the world outside, and in general to changing
	circumstances — and which complies with the adages of
	software engineering. Another aim of blue.fmt is that it
	can be used throughout the lifecycle of publications on
	modest equipment to format articles, transparencies and
	you name it. The hoped for lifety is a lifetime.
	En-passant the design process is accounted for. New is the
	handling of a database of references — with
	cross-referencing — or pictures all in one-pass job.}}
}

@article{maps:13-39,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{200-206}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Graphs}},
 keywords  = {{circle, curve, databases, disks, graphics, format, lines, pictures, plain {\TeX}, reusable software parts, selective loading, software engineering, splines, vectors}},
 abstract  = {{Graphics facilities for plain {\TeX} have been collected
	from The {\TeX}book, manmac and gkpmac, as part of
	blue.fmt. The gkpmac picture macros are handy and provide
	a subset of {\LaTeX}'s functionality. A database of pictures
	is proposed. No interaction with METAFONT (or )
	nor the incorporation of encapsulated PostScript have been
	treated.}}
}

@article{maps:13-40,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{207-209}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Cross-referencing}},
 keywords  = {{compatible extension, cross-referencing, graph referencing, math referencing, optional parameters, plain {\TeX}, symbolic names, tables referencing}},
 abstract  = {{A one-pass semi-automatic cross-referencing scheme for
	math is proposed, which requires some hand adjustments
	when forward references are used. The method is just a
	little beyond manmac's approach, to assist BLUe.}}
}

@article{maps:13-41,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{210-211}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Plain's \verb|\item|-s extended}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, items, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The design and coding of items for BLUe's format is
	explained. The treated items — bulleted, (automatically)
	numbered or alphabetisized — are a compatible extension to
	plain's \verb|\item|. Pitfalls in use are mentioned.}}
}

@article{maps:13-42,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{212-214}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Headache?}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, headings, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The design of headings for BLUe's format is explained,
	starting from the basic and general two-part macros up to the
	full-blown blue((sub)sub)head versions.}}
}

@book{maps:13a,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-27}},
 year      = {{1994}},
 volume    = {{13a}},
 size      = {{256kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Robin Fairbairns}},
 title     = {{100 Frequently Asked Questions}},
 keywords  = {{FAQ, frequently asked questions, Baskerville}},
 abstract  = {{100 frequently asked questions answered. Topics are
	{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, METAFONT, PostScript, special typesetting,
	format conversions, DVI drivers \& previewers, recent
	{\TeX} developments and more.}}
}

@book{maps:14,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-214}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{3540kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{MAPS 95.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:14-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1995/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 14e NTG bijeenkomst 17 november 1994;
	Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 9 juni 1994;
	Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen;
	Begroting 1995;
	Wat verder ter tafel komt;
	Communicatie;
	Rondvraag en Sluiting;
	Voordrachten;
	Volgende bijeenkomsten}}
}

@article{maps:14-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:14-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1995/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:14-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-10}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1995)}},
}

@article{maps:14-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-12}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1995}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:14-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag NTG 1994}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:14-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-17}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1994}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:14-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{18}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Christina Thiele}},
 title     = {{From the TUG President}},
}

@article{maps:14-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19-20}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Op FGBBS vaart alles wel}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, bulletin board, statistics, 4all{\TeX}, OS/2}},
 abstract  = {{FGBBS kreeg weer de nodige uitbreidingen, waarvan een sneller
	modem het meest merkbaar is.}}
}

@article{maps:14-10,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{21}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-NL discussielijst}},
 keywords  = {{listserver, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{Overzicht gebruikers listserver.}}
}

@article{maps:14-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{22-23}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{70kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Henk de Haan}},
 title     = {{De NTG op het World Wide Web}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, internet, WWW, WWW}},
 abstract  = {{Het internet is een van de meest snel groeiende
	elektronische media. Dit is mede te danken aan het
	zogenaamde World Wide Web (WWW). In dit artikel wordt
	ingegaan op de functie van het Word Wide Web, het
	gebruikte tekstformaat (HTML) en de mogelijkheden die het
	voor de NTG kan hebben. Er wordt ingegaan op de huidige
	(experimentele) service en er worden een aantal mogelijke
	nieuwe toepassingen vermeld.}}
}

@article{maps:14-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24-26}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{General information 3rd edition of the 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM}},
}

@article{maps:14-13,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-29}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{47kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Some Announcements from Usenet}},
}

@article{maps:14-14,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{30}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{Announcement from the {\LaTeX}3 Project Team}},
 abstract  = {{We are pleased to present the final report on `Math Font
	Encoding' produced by Justin Ziegler for the {\LaTeX}3 project.}}
}

@article{maps:14-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{31-34}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{278kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen}},
 title     = {{Diplomatic edition of a medieval Icelandic manuscript}},
}

@article{maps:14-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{35-36}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ed Boets}},
 title     = {{Het digitaal produceren van een proefschrift}},
 keywords  = {{thesis, DocuTech, 4all{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Het digitaal produceren van een proefschrift beschrijft
	hoe een proefschrift, in {\LaTeX} gemaakt, als
	PostScript-file via het modem naar de drukker gestuurd kan
	worden om vervolgens op een DocuTech systeem (600 dpi)
	gedrukt te worden.}}
}

@article{maps:14-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-39}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{57kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{METAFONT's mode\_def in action}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, mode\_def, bitmapped fonts}},
 abstract  = {{In order to obtain maximum output quality when using
	METAFONT for rendering bitmapped fonts you need to specify
	the characteristics of the intended output device. This is
	done by defining a mode\_def in which several variables
	are assigned. The meaning and effect of these variables
	are discussed in a case study of two types of laser
	printers.}}
}

@article{maps:14-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40-46}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{132kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Vladimir Batagelj}},
 title     = {{Combining {\TeX} and PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript, inclusion of graphics, dictionaries, error handling}},
 abstract  = {{PostScript is becoming a de facto standard as a device
	independent page description language. By embedding
	PostScript elements in {\TeX} we can extend the use of
	{\TeX} to new areas of application. In the first part of
	the paper we give some general information about
	PostScript and its features. In the rest of the paper we
	present some of our own experiences and solutions in
	combining {\TeX} and PostScript:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item dictionaries, prolog files and how to save a lot of
	space with PostScript figures produced in CorelDRAW,
	Mathematica, ...;
	\item writing {\TeX}-PostScript macros, case: drawing graphs
	(combinatorics) in {\TeX}; PostScript error handling
	mechanism, an application in function graph drawing
	macro.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:14-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-48}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{24kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Barron}},
 title     = {{Portable Documents: Why Use SGML?}},
 abstract  = {{In this article we present a few ideas as a framework for
	the discussion of portable documents. We address a number
	of questions:
	\begin{itemize}
	\item What are portable documents?
	\item Who needs them, and why?
	\item How to produce them, now and in the future.
	\end{itemize}}}
}

@article{maps:14-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-52}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{90kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jonathan Fine}},
 title     = {{Formatting SGML Manuscripts}},
 abstract  = {{This article is about typography, SGML, {\TeX}, and SIMSIM,
	which is a new {\TeX} macro package. Close by are copies of
	several of the OHP transparencies. They were typeset
	directly from an SGML document instance using SIMSIM.}}
}

@article{maps:14-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-55}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Horst Szillat}},
 title     = {{SGML and {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{SGML — Standard Generalized Markup Language — is a
	formal language to describe structured text documents. It
	should be introduced here by comparison to {\TeX} and
	{\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:14-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{56-60}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Peter Flynn}},
 title     = {{HTML \& {\TeX}: Making them sweat}},
 abstract  = {{HTML is often criticised fo its presentation-oriented
	conception. But it does contain sufficient structural
	information for many everyday purposes and this has led to
	its development into a more stable form. Future platforms
	for the World Wide Web may support other applications of
	SGML, and the present climate of popularity of the Web is
	a suitable opportunity for consolidation of the more
	stable features. {\TeX} is pre-eminently stable and
	provides an ideal companion for the process of translating
	HTML into print.}}
}

@article{maps:14-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-63}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{41kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Geeti Granger}},
 title     = {{The Inside Story of Life at Wiley with SGML, {\LaTeX} and Acrobat}},
}

@article{maps:14-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{64-66}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Martin Key}},
 title     = {{Theory into Practice: working with SGML, PDF and {\LaTeX} at Elsevier Science}},
}

@article{maps:14-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{67-68}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nikos Drakos}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML Update'95}},
 abstract  = {{A new version of {\LaTeX}2HTML (version 95.1) is
	available since January 1995. This article outlines some
	of the main changes.}}
}

@article{maps:14-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{69-73}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{117kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Arno Kemperman}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML ervaringen; Van Handleiding in {\LaTeX} tot Hulp Module op Internet}},
 abstract  = {{Welkom op de digitale snelweg! Steeds meer informatie
	wordt er aangeboden op het Internet, en met het uitgroeien
	van het Internet groeit de onoverzichtelijkheid. In dit
	artikel wordt een toepassing van {\LaTeX}2HTML beschreven
	waarbij een {\LaTeX} document wordt omgezet naar een reeks
	goed gestructueerde pagina's op het World-Wide Web. Deze
	toepassing betreft een document die een handleiding is
	voor Internet-gebruikers (voornamelijk voor medewerkers
	van Laboratoriumvoor Analytische Chemie, KUN, Nijmegen).
	Er worden wat voordelen en voorbeelden van het {\LaTeX}2HTML
	gebruik gegeven en hoe je het programma kunt aanpassen
	naar je eigen wensen. Bekijk de {\LaTeX} documenten ook
	eens op deze moderne manier en blader eens met de muis
	door je tekst, getransformeerd tot een digitaal wonder op
	je scherm. Oftewel: {\LaTeX}2HTML2!}}
}

@article{maps:14-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{74-76}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{74kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karen Strom}},
 title     = {{Electronic Publication and Data Distribution for the Five College Astronomy Department}},
 keywords  = {{electronic publishing, thesis, WWW, preprints, data distribution}},
 abstract  = {{The Star Formation Group at FCAD has begun to make use of
	the World Wide Web to explore the advantages of hypermedia
	presentations for the distribution of preprints, Ph. D.
	theses and observatory publications. As a byproduct of
	this work, a method for displaying subscripts and
	superscripts has been developed. This set of bitmaps is
	publically available.}}
}

@article{maps:14-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-82}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{204kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Norman Walsh}},
 title     = {{A World Wide Web Interface to CTAN}},
 abstract  = {{There are a lot of different software packages, style
	files, fonts, etc. in the CTAN archives. Finding the
	things you need in a timely fashion can be difficult, as I
	found out while writing Making {\TeX} Work. The ability to
	combine descriptions of packages with the directory
	listings from CTAN could help alleviate some of the
	difficulty. HTML, the document structuring language of the
	World Wide Web, provides one possible means of combining
	different views of the archive into a single vision. The
	CTAN-Web project is my attempt to provide this vision.}}
}

@article{maps:14-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{83-86}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{57kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Arthur Smith}},
 title     = {{An Introduction to Hyper{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{hyper{\TeX}, hyperlink, xhdvi, HTML, \special}},
 abstract  = {{The popularity of the World-Wide-Web and the HTML
	hypertext language for electronic distribution of
	information over the internet has thus far been difficult
	to extend to scientific documents, in part because {\TeX},
	the word processing language of choice for technical and
	mathematical documents, does not have the hypertext
	capabilities necessary for full integration into the WWW.
	Hyper{\TeX} consists of a collection of extensions of {\TeX}
	to handle both internal and external (local or networked)
	hypertext, thus allowing the huge body of {\TeX}-based
	documents to be more fully integrated with the WWW. This
	introduction was originally prepared for the American
	Physical Society e-print meeting at Los Alamos, New
	Mexico, Oct. 15, 1994.}}
}

@article{maps:14-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-98}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{144kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Otfried Schwarzkopf}},
 title     = {{The Hyper{\LaTeX} Markup Language}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, HTML, conversion, {\LaTeX}, WWW, emacs lisp}},
 abstract  = {{Hyper{\LaTeX} is a little package that allows you to use
	{\LaTeX} to prepare documents in HTML (the hypertext markup
	language used by the World Wide Web), and, at the same
	time, to produce a fine printed document from your input.
	You can use all of {\LaTeX}'s power for the printed output,
	and you don't have to learn a new language for creating
	hypertext documents.}}
}

@article{maps:14-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{99-108}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{178kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous}},
 title     = {{HTML ⟶ {\LaTeX} ⟶ PDF, of de intrede van {\TeX} in het hypertext tijdperk}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat, DVIHPS, PDF, repere, recticrt}},
 abstract  = {{Wij beschrijven hier het produktieproces van
	elektronische hyper-documenten met behulp van {\LaTeX} en
	Adobe Acrobat. Na een algemene beschrijving van de voor-
	en nadelen van {\LaTeX} terzake geven we een omschrijving
	van elke stap, alsook van zekere te nemen voorzorgen met
	als doel efficiënte Acrobat documenten te bekomen. De
	lezer zal in dit artikel een beschrijving vinden van de
	software tools DVIPS repere en recticrt, en eveneens de
	basisprincipes van het formaat PDF.
	Vertaald door Philippe Vanoverbeke.}}
}

@article{maps:14-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{109-119}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{239kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wiegert Tierie}},
 title     = {{Adobe Acrobat 2.0; Beyond the bounds op paper}},
}

@article{maps:14-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{120-124}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{79kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Marion Neubauer}},
 title     = {{Conversion from WORD/WordPerfect to {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{conversion, MS-WORD, WinWord, WordPerfect, RTF}},
 abstract  = {{Production of a large document with many contributors may
	require conversion of all submitted manuscripts into the
	same format, for example {\LaTeX}. A large proportion of
	manuscripts are submitted in the formats of WORD and
	WordPerfect, two very popular word processing programs. I
	will discuss different approaches converting such files to
	{\LaTeX} format. First of all the differences between the
	word processors MS-WORD and WordPerfect versus the document
	preparation system {\LaTeX} will be explained, and problems
	encountered during text conversion into {\LaTeX} will be
	discussed. The conversion can be done either by means of a
	seperate program (external conversion) or using macros,
	style sheets and a printer driver from within the word
	processors (internal conversion). Advantages and
	disadvantages of both methods for different types of text
	elements such as plain text, lists, tables and
	mathematical formulas will be discussed. This is followed
	by an overview of the conversion programs currently
	available.}}
}

@article{maps:14-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{125-126}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Renkema}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}tures: zo goed als gezegd wordt?}},
}

@article{maps:14-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{127-128}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jan Krugers}},
 title     = {{Scientific Word / Workplace 2.0.1; Whats new?}},
 keywords  = {{Scientific Word, WYSIWYG, Windows, OS2WIN}},
 abstract  = {{Scientific Word version 1.x from TCI Software Research
	has gotten improvements and an offspring. The improvements
	are not only better support for different {\LaTeX} styles
	and dialects but also more user conveniences and better
	stability. The offspring is Scientific Workplace, a
	similar Windows software package under Windows 3.1. But
	besides all the Scientific Word functions it also has a
	built-in Maple Version V interface and many Maple symbolic
	calculation functions. Not to forget that version 2.0.1.
	works fine under OS/2 Warp with all its speed and data
	exchange advantages.}}
}

@article{maps:14-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{129-130}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{42kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Cees Fortuin}},
 title     = {{Scientific WorkPlace; een eerste indruk}},
 abstract  = {{Het pakket SCIENTIFIC WORKPLACE. versie 2.0(SWP), vroeger
	Scientific Word, is een uitgebreide versie van een
	`WhatYouSeeIsWhatYouGet' tekstverwerker gebaseerd op
	{\LaTeX}2e en werkend onder Microsoft Windows. De
	uitbreiding bestaat uit een deel van een `Computer
	Algebra' pakket, de kernel van Maple. Verder is er een
	programma om toetsen samen te stellen, uit databestanden
	met opgaven. Deze voorlopige test van versie 2.0 is
	uitgevoerd op een IBM compatibele PC, met een 486
	processor en 8MBintern geheugen, door een persoon met
	{\LaTeX} 2.09 en Maple ervaring, maar zonder kennis van
	MSWindows (`waar is dat nou voor nodig...') of
	SCIENTIFIC WORKPLACE. Voor het installeren en testen zijn
	twee volle dagen gebruikt. Dit verslag geeft
	vanzelfsprekend slechts een eerste indruk van het
	pakket.}}
}

@article{maps:14-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{131-136}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Kleurgebruik in TABLE}},
 keywords  = {{\TaBlE, color tables, tables color, Con{\TeX}t tables}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft enkele macro's die het mogelijk
	maken binnen TABLE cellen van een tabel van een
	achtergrondkleur of raster te voorzien. We beperken ons
	tot een wat technische beschrijving en gaan voorbij aan de
	esthetische kant van de zaak.}}
}

@article{maps:14-38,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{137-138}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}-verwerking in kleur}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} visualizing, editing colored {\TeX}, color {\TeX} visualization}},
 abstract  = {{Vooral beginnende {\TeX}-gebruikers ervaren de mix van
	commando's en tekst als verwarrend. Mede om die reden
	hebben wij zo'n vier jaar geleden onze tekstverwerker
	afgestemd op het gebruik van {\TeX}, door {\TeX}-commando's op
	een wat afwijkende manier weer te geven. Het blijkt dat,
	afgezien van aanvullende mogelijkheden om de syntax te
	controleren, het aantal fouten in commando's drastisch
	afneemt.}}
}

@article{maps:14-39,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{139-145}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{376kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Johan Jonker}},
 title     = {{Een zwart-wit kijk op kleur}},
 keywords  = {{color gray conversion, color gray printing, color optimizing use, Con{\TeX}t color palets}},
 abstract  = {{Wie tegenwoordig op een zwart-wit tv-toestel een
	uitzending volgt zal zich vaak tevreden moeten stellen met
	een weinig contrastrijk beeld. Na de introductie van de
	kleuren-tv is nog lang rekening gehouden met
	zwart-witkijkers. De keus van kleuren in decors werd mede
	afgestemd op de weergave in zwart-wit. Dit is niet
	verwonderlijk, omdat de zwart-witkijkers een ruime
	meerderheid vormden. Op papier lijkt zich een dergelijke
	ontwikkeling af te spelen. Voor kleurenprinters geschikte
	illustraties, kunnen op zwart-wit printers een matig beeld
	opleveren. Het is dan ook de vraag hoe we aan de `wensen'
	van de overgrote meerderheid van zwart-wit printers
	tegemoet kunnen komen.}}
}

@article{maps:14-40,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{146-148}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herman Haverkort}},
 title     = {{Genezen van WPosis — nu heb ik chronische {\TeX}itis...}},
 abstract  = {{Bij het vormgeven van een voorstel voor reglementen
	overschreed een verstokte WordPerfect-gebruiker de grenzen
	van zijn geliefde tekstverwerker. Frans Goddijn hielp hem
	aan de {\TeX}. In dit artikel geeft een nieuwe
	{\TeX}-gebruiker een globale indruk van zijn laatste
	ervaringen met WordPerfect en zijn eerste ervaringen met
	{\TeX}. Hij doet dit aan de hand van het werk aan een
	document waarin het mogelijk moest zijn om vele
	typografische middelen onafhankelijk van elkaar te
	gebruiken om verschillende soorten passages aan te duiden.
	Dit bleek in {\TeX} goed te realiseren, zij het met veel
	inspanning, en het resultaat was zeer bevredigend. Toen
	het eerste document eenmaal gereed was, bleek het
	bovendien daarna zeer eenvoudig om soortgelijke documenten
	te zetten.}}
}

@article{maps:14-41,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{149-155}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{137kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herman Haverkort}},
 title     = {{HH Gets Carried Away; hhmuf, hhflxbox and hhcount}},
 keywords  = {{circle, counter, dice, footnote, forbidden environment, frame, index}},
 abstract  = {{This article presents hhmuf's multinotes: special cheery
	footnotes to be used in special situations, including
	so-called `forbidden environments'. Then it presents
	hhflxbox's self-scaling frames: encircling macros are
	provided but you can define enwhatevering macros yourself
	by means of the macros provided by hhflxbox. Finally
	hhcount is presented: macros to handle simple and
	composite counters in a fancy way.}}
}

@article{maps:14-42,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{156-162}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{129kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herman Haverkort, Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{The Scenario — in Three Versions; hhparmrk does it}},
 keywords  = {{paragraph, mark, distribution, select}},
 abstract  = {{During work towards a flexible document as a continuous
	report on a wide variety of contacts for the Meridian Arts
	Ensemble in New York, Frans Goddijn felt the need to tag
	and mark certain paragraphs for specific groups of
	readers. Herman Haverkort wrote a package for {\LaTeX}2e,
	hhparmrk, which facilitates this by offering the
	possibility to set various signs next to paragraphs. This
	article presents hhparmrk, gives examples of its use and a
	short manual. For the hackers among us some of the
	{\TeX}nical tricks involved behind the scenes are glanced
	at.}}
}

@article{maps:14-43,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{163-168}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bernd Raichle}},
 title     = {{Sorting in {\TeX}'s Mouth}},
 keywords  = {{expansion, sorting, algorithms}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX}'s macro processor, the so-called mouth, can be used
	to perform very complex tasks. Because this part of {\TeX}'s
	programming language is as powerful as a Turing machine,
	it is possible to implement algorithms using only {\TeX}'s
	mouth. I will show how sorting algorithms can be
	implemented in a straight-forward and very elegant and
	under-standable way using only macros and macro expansion
	{\TeX}niques.}}
}

@article{maps:14-44,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{169}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{One by one the guests arrive}},
 keywords  = {{philosophy, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A plea is made for writing macros in plain {\TeX} sufficiently
	documented to be used with all flavours of {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:14-45,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{170-177}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{102kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Format Databases}},
 keywords  = {{active list separators, addresses, comment blocks, compatible extension, data integrity, databases, FIFO, lazy evaluation, list element tag, mail-merge, number ranges, pattern matching, pictures, plain {\TeX}, references, reusable software parts, searching, selective loading, set macros, software engineering, table of contents, variant document parts}},
 abstract  = {{The backgrounds, use, and coding of BLUe's Format
	Databases have been discussed. Two kinds of databases have
	been introduced class I (data, such as addresses,
	references, and script parts for example pictures), and
	class II (macros, such as variant formats and tools). At
	the heart lies the selective loading {\TeX}nique, which
	allows that only what is needed will be loaded on-the-fly.
	The data structures and operations on them have been
	treated. The use within the Con{\TeX}t of typesetting scripts
	have been elucidated via examples. At the end the coding
	is explained.}}
}

@article{maps:14-46,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{178-186}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{117kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Index}},
 keywords  = {{compatible extension, index, number ranges, one-pass job, ordering table, plain {\TeX}, reusable software parts, software engineering, sort keys}},
 abstract  = {{The creation of a modest index within a one-pass {\TeX}
	job is proposed. In general a proof run and a final run
	are needed. The markup for the index entries is the same
	as used by Knuth for The {\TeX}book. The process is
	controlled by the tags: \verb|\sortindex| and
	\verb|\pasteupindex|. The file which emerges after
	\verb|\sortindex| can be enriched by hand, for example to
	include `see also' and the like. Sorting keys can be
	specified too, as well as items which have to be ignored
	for the sorting. The macros have been developed for use
	with English documents. To leave open the use with other
	languages the ordering has been parameterized in an
	ordering table.}}
}

@article{maps:14-47,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{187-192}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{73kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Letters}},
 keywords  = {{active list separators, addresses, compatible extension, databases, data integrity, FIFO, lazy evaluation, letter, list element tag, mail-merge, pattern matching, plain {\TeX}, reusable software parts, set macros, software engineering}},
 abstract  = {{The backgrounds, use, design, and coding of BLUe's
	Letters format have been discussed. The purpose is to
	format a letter, merge it with address(es) from a
	database, and typeset it all with the appropriate
	background such as logo and the like, completely within
	{\TeX}. Separate labels can be obtained too, either
	specified by name or searched for by pattern.}}
}

@article{maps:14-48,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{193-199}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Reports}},
 keywords  = {{active list separators, compatible extension, databases, data integrity, FIFO, house style, lazy evaluation, list element tag, pattern matching, plain {\TeX}, reusable software parts, separation of concerns, set macros, software engineering}},
 abstract  = {{The backgrounds, use, design, and coding of BLUe's
	Reports format have been discussed. The purpose is to
	format a report as a compatible extension of the default
	note format of BLUe's format. As such it is an example of
	how to customize BLUe's format system with a format of
	your own. The differences have to do with not only using
	titles but also reusing the titles for table of contents,
	list of examples, and running headlines the preliminary
	pages and cover pages which are absent with the default
	note format appendices may contain collected information
	from the script such as answer to the exercises (similar
	as in The {\TeX}book), table of examples, table of
	contents, and an index.}}
}

@article{maps:14-49,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{200-204}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{73kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Two-part macros}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, catcodes, multiple use of copy, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The use of two-part macros in BLUe's format is discussed.
	First the reason why in general two-part macros are
	beneficial is explained. Practical examples from the
	{\TeX}-NL discussion list have been treated. The
	automatically generation of a one-part macro on top of
	two-part macros is given. The impossibility of reusing
	copy with different catcodes in {\TeX} is mentioned and
	illustrated with an example from the {\TeX}book.}}
}

@article{maps:14-50,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{205-207}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Parameterization I — options}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, optional parameters, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The use of options in BLUe's format is discussed. A
	survey is given of how Knuth coped with the functionality
	of optional arguments in {\TeX} and manmac. As an extension
	to {\TeX}'s \verb|\every<tag>| the BLUe's \verb|\this<tag>|s are
	introduced, with the advantage of simpler handling of
	arguments. It is contrasted with the use in TUGboat's style
	files and AMS's ppt.sty.}}
}

@article{maps:14-51,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{208-210}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{45kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's Typesetting of PASCAL}},
 keywords  = {{compatible extension, FIFO, Pascal, pattern matching, plain {\TeX}, pretty-printing, reusable software parts, software engineering}},
 abstract  = {{The formatting of PASCAL programs within plain
	{\TeX} is proposed. Only \verb|\beginpascal| and
	\verb|\endpascal| have to be added as markup. In general
	the literate programming tools are to be preferred,
	especially when designing, developing, documenting, and
	maintaining professional software.}}
}

@article{maps:14-52,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{211}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{TUG'95}},
}

@article{maps:14-53,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{212-213}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Reisverslag Bacho{\TeX}'95}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, report, GUST, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag bijeenkomst Poolse {\TeX} users group GUST.}}
}

@article{maps:14-54,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{214}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{14}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}'95}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, announcement}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of Euro{\TeX}'95 conference.}}
}

@book{maps:15,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-22}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{1675kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{MAPS 95.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:15-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1995/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 15e NTG bijeenkomst 24 mei 1995;
	Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 17 november 1994;
	Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen;
	NTG ledenvergadering;
	Verslag commissie voor kascontrole / vaststelling nieuwe commissie;
	Bestuursverkiezingen;
	Euro{\TeX}'95;
	Miscellaneous;
	Rondvraag en sluiting;
	Voordrachten.}}
}

@article{maps:15-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1995/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:15-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Van de TUG President (1995)}},
}

@article{maps:15-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1996}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:15-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-13}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{1471kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol, Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Verslag 16e TUG-bijeenkomst}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, St. Petersburg, Florida}},
}

@article{maps:15-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-20}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{77kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{TUG'95 at St. Petersburg Beach — a Personal View}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, St. Petersburg, Florida}},
}

@article{maps:15-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{21-22}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15}},
 size      = {{57kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}'95 in Nederland!}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Arnhem}},
 abstract  = {{Programma en inschrijfformulier Euro{\TeX} conferentie.}}
}

@proceedings{maps:15a,
 type      = {{proceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-441}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{6708kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, Euro{\TeX}, conference, proceedings, Arnhem}},
 abstract  = {{Proceedings Euro{\TeX}'95 in Arnhem}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-01,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{200kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Andrey Astrelin}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Graphics for {\TeX}: a new implementation}},
 keywords  = {{graphics, picture environment, \special}},
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-02,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-10}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{430kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Plotter — a program for creating 2D and 3D pictures}},
 keywords  = {{graphics 3D, pictures, graphics, plotting}},
 abstract  = {{The MS DOS program which creates 2D and 3D {\TeX} pictures
	for the plots of functions of two variables f(x,y) is
	described. In comparison with Gnuplot this program enables
	to plot the equilines (2D view) and the surface (3D view)
	pictures correctly and without memory overflow even for
	complex cases. The input is the ASCII file which contains
	the data points (Xij, Yij, Zij) of the function z = f(x,y)
	calculated over non-regular quadrangular mesh. The output
	is the ASCII file which contains the required picture in
	{\TeX} format. The program has a flexible menu driven user
	interface and enables to create and to preview the output
	pictures with a variety of styles. At the time being the
	program supports {\LaTeX} commands, EPIC/EEPIC macros and
	em{\TeX} specials. In future the program should support
	{\TeX} graphical tools like MFPiC, PiC{\TeX} and
	EPS-files.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-03,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{11-16}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{264kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Alexander Berdnikov, S. Turtia}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{VFComb — a program for design of virtual fonts}},
 keywords  = {{virtual fonts, VFcomb}},
 abstract  = {{The MS DOS program which enables to simplify the design
	of the virtual fonts is described. Its main purpose was to
	facilitate the integration of CM-fonts with cyrillic
	LL-fonts created by O. Lapko and S. Strelkov but it can be
	used for various applications. It uses the information
	from TFM-files (converted to ASCII form by TFtoPL) and the
	ASCII data files created by the User on its input, and
	produces the VPL-file on its output which can be converted
	to the virtual font using VPtoVF. The characteristic
	feature of the program is that it can assemble the font
	ligature tables and user defined ligature tables for the
	characters extracted from various fonts and combine the
	metric information from various TFM-files. VFComb supports
	the full syntaxis of PL-files and VPL-files as it was
	defined by D.E. Knuth and adds new commands like symbolic
	variables or conditional operators, which simplifies the
	creation and the debugging of the virtual fonts.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-04,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{17-26}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{282kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{The status of Babel}},
 keywords  = {{Babel, multilingual}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I will give an overview of what has
	happened to Babel lately. First I will briefly describe
	the history of Babel; then I will introduce the concept of
	`shorthands'. New ways of changing the `language' have
	been introduced and Babel can now easily be adapted for
	local needs. Finally I will discuss some compatibility
	issues.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-05,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-34}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{254kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Stanisław Brabec}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Upages — plain {\TeX} for professionals}},
 keywords  = {{typography, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{When I have started my professional typography works in
	plain {\TeX}, I found many things, which are done in each
	document. Some of them are language specific or trivial,
	but there exists many topics, which are strongly
	untrivial, and often required. {\TeX} has many limitations,
	but there is (in recent time) nothing better in whole the
	world. Thus, we have powerful macro language but we
	haven't easy way to do many things: references, contents,
	page offsetting, interpretation of text token by token,
	cooperation with PostScript devices, device independent
	color and line drawing capabilities, easy box rotation and
	landscaping, making sheets and booklets, making other
	margins than 1in, creating cropmarks, color signatures,
	color separations etc.\\
	Certainly, there is many powerful macro systems, but they
	are very big, often slow, and cancels many capabilities of
	plain {\TeX}. I have been particularly inspired by them, and
	particularly by some macros for plain {\TeX}. But many of
	these macros are incompatible, if you want to use two of
	them, because one overwrites settings of the second.\\
	This all is good reason to write powerful macros these
	things instead of creating trivial macros twice a month.
	Then you needn't spend much time to correct bugs caused by
	these trivial macros. That's why I have written my
	upages.{\TeX} macros. This chapter doesn't want to be a
	manual to these macros, but only an introduction with
	examples.\\
	upages.{\TeX} macros consists on more parts. In this text I
	will describe the most powerful and interesting parts of
	them. I hope that my macros will greet many plain
	{\TeX}ists. They makes easy to prepare documents and to
	make hooks and patches.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-06,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35-104}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{808kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{A practical introduction to SGML}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, HTML, WWW, DTD, ISO8879}},
 abstract  = {{SGML, the Standard Generalized Markup Language, deals
	with the structural markup of electronic documents. It was
	made an international standard by ISO in October 1986.
	SGML soon became very popular thanks in particular to its
	enthusiastic acceptance in the editing world, by large
	multi-national companies, governmental organizations, and,
	more recently, by the ubiquity of HTML, Hypertext Markup
	Language, the source language of structured documents on
	WWW. This article discusses the basic ideas of SGML and
	looks at a few interesting tools. It should provide the
	reader with a better understanding of the latest
	developments in the field of electronic documents in
	general, and of SGML/HTML in particular.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-07,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{105-168}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{891kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Janne Saarela}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{From {\LaTeX} to HTML and back}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML, HTML, {\LaTeX}, translation, conversion, tools}},
 abstract  = {{Both {\LaTeX} and HTML are languages that can express the
	structure of a document, and similarities between these
	two systems are shown. A detailed study is made of the
	{\LaTeX}2HTML program, written by Nikos Drakos, that is
	today the most complete utility for translating {\LaTeX}
	code into HTML, providing a quasi-automatic translation
	for most elements. A discussion of a few other tools for
	translating between HTML and {\LaTeX} concludes the
	article.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-08,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{169-180}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{355kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Pedro Palao Gostanza, Manuel Núñez García}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Pascal: formatting Pascal using {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Pascal, formatting, program code}},
 abstract  = {{This paper is based on our ideas about how a system which
	formats programs written in a structured language must
	work. Particularly, tools which help in typesetting texts
	where algorithms are described. Most of our ideas have
	been put in practice in the pascal system, which
	automatize the elegant layout of Pascal programs. This
	system is programmed as a {\TeX} macro package.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-09,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{181-196}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{451kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Beyond the bounds of paper and within the bounds of screens;
    the perfect match of {\TeX} and Acrobat}},
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-10,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{197-222}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{337kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{PPCH{\TeX}: typesetting chemical formulas in {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This article is about a package for typesetting chemical
	formulas. The primary interface of this package is in the
	dutch language. Because PPCH{\TeX} has a multilingual
	interface, all commands and keywords can be toggled to
	english. The Dutch version of this article is published in
	NTG's MAPS (94.2) and is translated to English by H. de
	Weert.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-11,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{223-238}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{381kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous, Sebastian Rahtz}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}, HTML and PDF, or the entry of {\TeX} into the world of
    hypertext}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, HTML, PDF, hyper{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{An onverview of the relation between {\LaTeX}, HTML (WWW) and PDF is
	presented.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-12,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{239-256}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{812kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Jörg Knappen}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{The release 1.2 of the Cork encoded DC fonts and the text companion symbol fonts}},
 keywords  = {{DC fonts, TS1 text symbol encoding}},
 abstract  = {{I present the release 1.2 of the dc fonts and the
	companion text symbol fonts. I give an overview of the
	improvements on the dc fonts from version 1.1 to 1.2. The
	rationale for introducing a text symbol font is explained
	and the text symbol encoding TS1 is presented. In the
	appendix, there are font tables of the mentioned fonts.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-13,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{257-272}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{522kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{A METAFONT—EPS interface}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, PostScript, MFtoEPS}},
 abstract  = {{The MFtoEPS package enables METAFONT to produce
	EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) output.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-14,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{273-278}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{278kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Use of {\TeX} as database with Any{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{active list separators, addresses, comment blocks, compatible extension, data integrity, databases, FIFO, lazy evaluation, list element tag, mail-merge, number ranges, pattern matching, pictures, plain {\TeX}, references, reusable software parts, searching, selective loading, set macros, software engineering, table of contents, variant document parts}},
 abstract  = {{The use of BLUe's format databases is treated. A
	new issue is introduced since the emerge of BLUe's Format
	system this spring. Boolean tags can be added to for
	example address.dat entries to denote fields and their
	contents. Together with \verb|\search| one can easily
	obtain the list of names — and via these names the full
	entries, i.e., the addresses — of those who have not
	paid their membership fee, for example.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-15,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{279-288}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{294kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Indexing in {\TeX} with Any{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{compatible extension, index, number ranges, one-pass job, ordering table, plain {\TeX}, reusable software parts, software engineering, sort keys}},
 abstract  = {{The creation of a modest index within a one-pass {\TeX}
	job is treated. In general a proof run and a final
	run are needed.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-16,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{289-294}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{279kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Olga Lapko, Irina Makhovaya}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{A Russian style for Babel: problems and solutions}},
 keywords  = {{Babel, Russian, typography}},
 abstract  = {{As with other languages using nonlatin basis there are
	some typographic features and national peculiarities that
	must be shown in the style. The paper describes the
	Russian style with macros \verb|\captionrussian| for four
	standard Russian documents, \verb|\daterussian|,
	\verb|\Asbuk| and \verb|\asbuk| for Russian alphabet
	counters and \verb|\mathrussian| for Russian math
	operators. Some problems concerning the usage of this
	style (e.g. usage of different encodings) are described.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-17,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{295-308}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{285kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Andries Lenstra, Steven Kliffen, Ruud Koning}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Data with da{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{databases, data manipulating, filtering, ASCII}},
 abstract  = {{The authors explain how to handle data in {\TeX}
	documents, in particular, how to avoid ever having to type
	in — and check! — the same data or text twice. These
	data may be stored in ordinary (non-{\TeX}) databases, in
	ASCII files arranged according to the easy da{\TeX} format,
	or in the {\TeX} document itself. da{\TeX} works in plain
	{\TeX} and is supposed to work in {\LaTeX}.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-18,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{309-314}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{242kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{{\LaTeX}3 project team}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Modifying {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, modifications}},
 abstract  = {{This is an updated version of a document that was first
	written to be part of the distribution of the new standard
	{\LaTeX}. It was produced in response to suggestions that
	the modification and distribution conditions for the files
	in our system should be similar to those implied by
	Version 2 of the GNU General Public Licence, as published
	by the Free Software Foundation.\\
	Although we are by now convinced that the principles
	described here are sound, the detailed consequences of
	these for the distribution and modification conditions are
	still evolving. Thus this article should not be treated
	as a definitive version of these conditions, even at the
	date of its publication.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-19,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{315-316}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{156kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Joachim Schrod}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{The proposed {\TeX} Directory Structure}},
 keywords  = {{TDS, standardization}},
 abstract  = {{The concept of a standardized {\TeX} directory
	structure is explained.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-20,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{317-330}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{311kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Laurent Siebenmann}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Occam's Razor and macro management}},
 keywords  = {{Occam's Razor, macro management, plain {\TeX}, {\TeX} typescripts, electronic publishing, docstrip, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The philosophical principle known as Occam's Razor
	asserts that entities should not be multiplied beyond
	necessity. The {\TeX} utility OCCAM is a tool to eliminate
	from a collection of supporting {\TeX} macros (composite
	commands) those that are unnecessary in a given
	typescript. Hopefully, it will serve to (a) let Plain
	{\TeX} users produce typescripts which can be
	electronically posted in a compact form that is
	nevertheless autonomous and perfectly archival, and (b) to
	simplify a macro package before making modifications for a
	special purpose.\\
	The OCCAM utility will ultimately be programmed entirely
	in {\TeX} language to assure that it is universally
	available. Today it is just an evolving prototype
	implemented with a bit of help from an editor (on
	Macintosh) that has a programmable control language
	based on GREP.\\
	To achieve reasonably automatic functioning of OCCAM, not
	requiring surveillance by a {\TeX} programmer, it is
	necessary to maintain a carefully structured master
	version of each macro package involved; this .occ version
	can double as the documented source version of the
	package.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-21,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{331-338}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{301kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Andrey Slepuhin}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{A package for Church-Slavonic typesetting}},
 keywords  = {{Church-Slavonik}},
 abstract  = {{The multilingual ability of {\TeX} is one of its most
	important properties. Due to {\TeX} it became possible to
	produce high-quality books in many different languages
	(sometimes with very exotic grammatic rules). For more
	than 10 years of its existence {\TeX} became a real
	polyglot and it seems that it doesn't want to stop
	evaluating. In this paper one more, may be rather exotic,
	example of practical usage of {\TeX} is considered, and
	also many ideas and solutions which result from 5-year
	experience of {\TeX} using.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-22,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{339-350}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{337kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Antonín Strejc}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{The W95 environment}},
 keywords  = {{Windows, typesetting proceedings, non-{\TeX}-users}},
 abstract  = {{Since 1992 the ``WORKSHOP 9x'' seminar takes place at the
	Czech Technical University (CTU) every year. The aim of
	this wide seminar is to give all the CTU researchers or
	teams an oportunity to present their research projects in
	twenty minutes of speech and two pages of proceedings of
	the seminar. I solved the technical problem of making the
	proceedings using {\LaTeX}. As the number of contributions
	increases year by year and the time for making the book is
	limited some automation of the typesetting process was and
	still is necessary. The W94 and W95 are attempts to
	transfer part of the typesetting work from the final
	typesetter to the authors. The W9x is simple
	single-purpose user-interface between {\LaTeX} and the
	MS-DOS user who may know nothing about {\TeX} and {\LaTeX}.
	Some experiences (both technical and psychological) of
	using this system in the two last years are discussed in
	the paper and may be useful for organizers of seminars,
	conferences etc. where contributors are not {\TeX} users
	and the proceedings are to be made with {\TeX}.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-23,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{351-358}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{304kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Daniel Taupin}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{MusiX{\TeX}, even more beautiful than Music{\TeX} for music typesetting}},
 keywords  = {{Music{\TeX}, MusiX{\TeX}, music}},
 abstract  = {{MusiX{\TeX} is a new music typesetting package derived
	from Music{\TeX}, but it provides more beautiful scores than
	Music{\TeX} did. While Music{\TeX} was a single pass
	package, MusiX{\TeX} is a three pass system: the first pass
	performs a rough {\TeX}ing which reports the spacings of
	each music section, the second pass is a computation of
	the best note spacings, and the third one is the final
	{\TeX}ing process. The beauty of single notes does not
	significantly differ from Music{\TeX}, but slurs are much
	more beautiful, and notes are regularly spaced instead of
	being irregularly spaced with glue.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-24,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{359-370}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{284kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Philip Taylor}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{e-{\TeX}: a 100\%-compatible successor to {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{e-{\TeX}, NTS, extended {\TeX}, extensions, compatibility}},
 abstract  = {{e-{\TeX} is the first concrete result of an international
	research \& development project, the NTS Project, which
	was established under the aegis of DANTE during 1992. The
	aims of the project are to perpetuate and develop the
	spirit and philosophy of {\TeX}, whilst respecting Knuth's
	wish that {\TeX} itself should remain frozen.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-25,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{371-390}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{429kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Wiegert Tierie}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Adobe Acrobat 2.0: Beyond the bounds of paper}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat, PDF}},
 abstract  = {{An overview of the concept and features of Adobe
	Acrobat is given.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-26,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{391-424}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{752kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Typesetting commutative diagrams}},
 keywords  = {{commutative diagrams, macro packages}},
 abstract  = {{There have been several efforts aimed at providing {\TeX}
	and its derivatives with a suitable mechanism for
	typesetting commutative diagrams, with the consequent
	availability of several macro packages of widespread use
	in the category theory community, and a long debate about
	the best syntax to adopt for commutative diagrams in
	{\LaTeX}3 has taken place during 1993 in the CATEGORIES
	discussion list. From the user's point of view, however,
	there is not much guidance when it comes to choosing a
	macro package, and even after a decision is made, the
	conversion of diagrams from the particular conventions of
	a macro package to another macro package's conventions may
	prove to be rather hard.\\
	Typesetting commutative diagrams is a surprisingly
	difficult problem, in comparison with {\TeX} macro packages
	for other purposes, as judged by the amount of code needed
	and years of development invested. The existing macro
	packages for typesetting commutative diagrams are reviewed
	in this paper and they are compared according to several
	criteria, among them the capability to produce complex
	diagrams, quality of the output diagrams, ease of use,
	quality of documentation, installation procedures,
	resource requirements, availability, and portability. The
	compatibility of the different macro packages is also
	analyzed.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-27,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{425-430}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{229kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Erik-Jan Vens}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Conversion of the Euler METAFONTs into the PostScript Type1 language}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, PostScript, Type 1 fonts, conversion}},
 abstract  = {{A report of the process of converting Hermann Zapf's
	Euler fonts from METAFONT sources to PostScript Type1
	format.}}
}

@inproceedings{maps:15a-28,
 type      = {{inproceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{431-441}},
 year      = {{1995}},
 volume    = {{15a}},
 size      = {{288kb}},
 booktitle = {{Proceedings of the Ninth European {\TeX} Conference}},
 author    = {{Jiří Zlatuška}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{When METAFONT does it alone}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, graphics}},
 abstract  = {{Combining METAFONT and {\TeX} when typesetting text and
	graphics together is shown on several occasions to bring
	very impressive results. A. Hoenig presented a method for
	communication between {\TeX} and METAFONT in order to solve
	two problems otherwise difficult to handle within {\TeX} or
	METAFONT alone: label placement for diagrams generated by
	METAFONT, and curvilinear typesetting. We show that the
	method for curvilinear typesetting (involving three passes
	in Hoenig's approach) can be considerably simplified by
	using the extended ligature mechanism of {\TeX} 3, and that
	a single METAFONT pass is actually sufficient, with quite
	a simple interface on {\TeX}'s side. Institutional seal text
	placement can be realized as a simple METAFONT application
	using this method. While PostScript offers ready-to-use
	easy solutions to this class of problems, METAFONT
	solutions can still be preferable to PostScript because of
	the ability of adding META-ness, e.g., by introducing
	second-order magnitude corrections/distortions to the
	letters and/or logos in order to enhance legibility when
	used in smaller sizes.}}
}

@book{maps:16,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-139}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{1463kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{MAPS 96.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:16-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1996/1)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 16e NTG bijeenkomst 5 september 1995;
	Verslag NTG bijeenkomst van 24 mei 1995;
	Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen;
	Begroting 1996;
	Verslag TUG'95;
	Rondvraag en sluiting;
	Volgende bijeenkomsten.}}
}

@article{maps:16-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:16-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1996/1)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:16-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes, Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1996/1)}},
}

@article{maps:16-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag 1995}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:16-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-11}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:16-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12-13}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Van de TUG President (1996)}},
}

@article{maps:16-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{14-15}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Bericht van FGBBS}},
 keywords  = {{BBS, internet}},
 abstract  = {{Een beschouwing over de vraag of, sinds de
	opkomst van Internet, er nog behoefte is
	een een BBS systeem. De voorlopige conclusie
	luidt dat een BBS op regionaal en klein-nationaal
	gebied een prettige aanvulling kan zijn op hetgeen
	het Internet te bieden heeft.}}
}

@article{maps:16-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{16}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{11kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{A plug-and-play te{\TeX} CD-ROM}},
 abstract  = {{GUTenberg and UKTUG, in collaboration with TUG and NTG,
	are producing a plug-and-play CD-ROM based on Thomas
	Esser's te{\TeX} distribution. It adheres to the TDS ({\TeX}
	Directory Structure) tree structure (see, for instance,
	TUGboat 16(4), pages 401-412).}}
}

@article{maps:16-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{17-23}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{105kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Attending Euro{\TeX}'95 in Papendal}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Arnhem}},
 abstract  = {{Report of Euro{\TeX}'95 conference in Arnhem.}}
}

@article{maps:16-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24-25}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Bacho{\TeX} 1996}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, report, GUST, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag bijeenkomst Poolse {\TeX} users group GUST.}}
}

@article{maps:16-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{26-29}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{The 17th Annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Dubna}},
}

@article{maps:16-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{30-32}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{154kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dirk van Delft}},
 title     = {{De kunst van het programmeren}},
 abstract  = {{Sinds 1962 werkt Donald Knuth aan een informaticabijbel
	die over twintig jaar af moet zijn. Tussendoor ontwierp
	hij een tekstververwerker met eigen typografie en legde
	hij een Mona Lisa uit dominosteentjes.}}
}

@article{maps:16-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-37}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{94kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jack Woehr}},
 title     = {{An Interview with Donald Knuth}},
}

@article{maps:16-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{38-49}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{201kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Christina Thiele}},
 title     = {{Knuth meets NTG members}},
 keywords  = {{Knuth, dutch, visit, interview, NTG}},
 abstract  = {{On January 6th 1996, Kees van der Laan informed the
	NTG that Donald Knuth would be in Holland in March. Knuth
	was invited by the Mathematisch Centrum (MC, nowadays
	called Centrum voor Wiskunde en Infor-matica, CWI) because
	of CWI's 50th anniversary. Both Knuth and Mandelbrot were
	invited as speakers at the celebration. The NTG noticed
	that this was an exceptional occasion to organize a
	special meeting with Knuth for all Dutch {\TeX} and
	METAFONT users who would like to meet the Grand Wizard
	himself. Fortunately Knuth accepted the NTG invitation and
	so a meeting was organized in `De Rode Hoed' in Amsterdam
	on March 13th. About 35 people from all over the country
	and even from Belgium joined to meet Knuth. Everything was
	recorded on both video and audio tape by Gerard van Nes.
	Christina Thiele volunteered to write this transcript.}}
}

@article{maps:16-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{50-53}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} without 4{\TeX} on the PC}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, configuring, DOSKEY, GhostScript}},
 abstract  = {{An example of a command-line interface for an existing 4{\TeX}
	installation. Configuration involves defining environment variables
	and DOSKEY macros. This simplicity comes at the cost of greater
	dependence on PostScript/GhostScript and the loss of some advanced
	features.}}
}

@article{maps:16-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{54-56}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Cees Fortuin}},
 title     = {{Van dictaat tot boek}},
 abstract  = {{In 1980 werd ik docent natuurkunde aan de HTS te Arnhem
	voor de afdeling elektrotechniek. Toendertijd werd een
	leerboek gebruikt dat heel aardig de meer traditionele
	componenten behandelde, maar bijna niets wist te melden
	over wat tegenwoordig in een schakeling zit: dioden,
	transistoren en dat soort componenten. Een eerste navraag
	bij landelijke collega's leverde wel een soort werkgroepje
	op, maar niet de gezochte `nieuwe' leerstof. Dus maar zelf
	schrijven. Dat moet in eerste instantie letterlijk worden
	opgevat, maar ook met een tekstverwerker als {\LaTeX} moet
	veel zelf worden gedaan. Wat begon rond 1985 als dictaat,
	per hoofdstuk afgedrukt, eindigde rond 1995 als boek:
	twee delen `Elektron natuurkunde' in de serie natuurkunde
	voor het HBO bij de Educatieve Uitgevers.}}
}

@article{maps:16-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{57}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rom Pijlgroms}},
 title     = {{Enkele ervaringen met {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Ter sprake komen de persoonlijke ervaringen met {\LaTeX}
	rond onder meer de uitwerkingen en antwoorden-boeken van
	de methode `Wiskunde voor het hoger onderwijs' (R. van
	Asselt, e.a., uitgave van: Educatieve Partners Nederland
	BV), de ervaringen met betrekking tot verzorgde
	bijscholingscursussen {\LaTeX} t.b.v. het personeel van de
	faculteit en de overige tekstverwerkingsactiviteiten.}}
}

@article{maps:16-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{58}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{13kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rein Smedinga}},
 title     = {{Een {\LaTeX}-cursus in Groningen}},
 abstract  = {{Begin mei heeft bij de afdeling wiskunde en informatica
	van de Rijksuniversiteit Groningen voor de tiende keer een
	{\LaTeX}-cursus plaatsgehad. Onderstaand een kort relaas
	over het ontstaan van deze cursus en het doel ervan.}}
}

@article{maps:16-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{59}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ben Geels}},
 title     = {{Het gebruik van {\LaTeX} voor wiskunde lessen}},
}

@article{maps:16-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{60}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet Tutelaers}},
 title     = {{Van ms-troff naar {\LaTeX}}},
}

@article{maps:16-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-73}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{172kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herbert Swan}},
 title     = {{The {\LaTeX}2HTML translator: An Overview}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX}2HTML is, as its name implies, a translator which
	converts a standard {\LaTeX} document into Hypertext Markup
	Language (HTML), for incorporation into the World-Wide
	Web. Like {\LaTeX}, it is freely available software,
	supported by highly dedicated volunteers. Unlike {\LaTeX},
	it is currently available only on UNIX platforms.}}
}

@article{maps:16-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{74-75}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jan Jacobs, Jan-Egbert Sturm}},
 title     = {{Zijn Scientific Word en {\TeX} uitwisselbaar?}},
}

@article{maps:16-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{76-81}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{180kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Typografisch programmeren}},
 keywords  = {{typographic programming, database publishing, Con{\TeX}t interactive documents, screen design, interactive documents}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt de ontwikkeling van een interactief
	document beschreven. De getoonde voorbeelden demonstreren
	de kracht van {\TeX} als typografische programmeertaal.
	Omdat dergelijke documenten het moeten opnemen tegen (vaak
	dedicated) programma's, kan het ontwikkelen ervan worden
	omschreven als typografisch programmeren.}}
}

@article{maps:16-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{82-84}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: It's all in the game}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, dialogue with {\TeX}, games, plain {\TeX}, user interface}},
 abstract  = {{With the game tic-tac-toe as example it is shown how to
	dialogue with {\TeX}. Three versions of a macro are
	discussed. The first prototype implements the
	bare-to-the-bones game. The other versions have
	increasingly better user interfaces and more intelligence
	implemented.}}
}

@article{maps:16-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-90}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{94kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: The winds and halfwinds — Details matter}},
 keywords  = {{binary tree, BLUe format, graphics, plain {\TeX}, recursion, trinary tree, turtle graphics}},
 abstract  = {{The implementation of the turtle graphics idea in plain
	{\TeX} as part of BLUe's format graphics facilities has
	been discussed. Examples are the (recursive) coding of the
	Pythagorian and trinary trees. As spin-off the
	implementation of a (binary) chart — a binary tree with
	labels — is given. Rotation of trees goes simply by
	renaming the wind directions.}}
}

@article{maps:16-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-99}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{113kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe-2-{\LaTeX} — expansion and some more}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe script, conversion, MAPS, mouth processing, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Conversion should not be a problem. It is best to use a
	general accepted tool, which comes with a preprint format.
	Until BLUe's format is generally accepted a BLUe script
	has to converted to comply with publishers' formats to get
	it out. Conversion via {\TeX}'s expansion is exercised in
	this note, with as result a plain {\TeX} Convertor
	Assistant, in the spirit of AWK. In netland it does not
	matter because BLUe's format system is available from CTAN
	and NTG's 4all{\TeX} CD-ROM, and therefore everybody can
	format BLUe scripts, and no conversion is needed.}}
}

@article{maps:16-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{100-107}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{137kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Graphics and {\TeX} — a reappraisal of METAFONT}},
 keywords  = {{computer art, constructivism, graphics, Hilbert, hidden lines, METAFONT, PostScript, projection}},
 abstract  = {{It is all about the author's first steps in METAFONT, for
	creating graphics to be included in {\TeX} documents, with
	a wink to . The graphics comprises 2D pictures and
	2.5D images of 3D objects via projection techniques.
	Learning METAFONT was much easier than learning {\TeX}.
	Included examples are: cat, Hilbert curve, and Gabo's
	linear construction in space no 2. A few highlights on
	macro writing in METAFONT have been selected. The appendix
	contains the table of contents of my anthology.mf file of
	examples.}}
}

@article{maps:16-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{108-125}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{167kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Page layout in {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes how to customize the page layout
	of your {\LaTeX} documents, i.e how to change page margings
	and sizes, headers and footers, and the proper placement
	of figures and tables (collectively called floats) on the
	page. Originally this was the documentation of the
	fancyheadings package. It did contain also other info,
	e.g. advanced use of marks. It has now been upgraded to
	include more, e.g. the handling of floats. The
	fancyheadings documentation has been upgraded to conform
	to version 2 of this package 1 . For reasons of
	compatibility with certain operating systems, the name of
	the package has been changed to fancyhdr. Although this
	paper uses {\LaTeX}2e commands, most of the techniques can
	be used with older {\LaTeX} versions with appropriate
	changes.}}
}

@article{maps:16-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{126-139}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{16}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Colored Verbatim}},
 keywords  = {{visualizing {\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t verbatim, color verbatim, {\TeX} visualizing}},
 abstract  = {{This module implements (just another) verbatim
	environment. Especially when the output of {\TeX} is viewed
	on an electronic medium, coloring has a positive influence
	on the readability of {\TeX} sources. About half of the
	module is therefore dedicated to typesetting {\TeX}
	specific character sequences in color. In this article
	I'll present some macro's for typesetting inline, display
	and file verbatim. The macro's are capable of handling
	<tabs> too.}}
}

@book{maps:17,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-175}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{1504kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{MAPS 96.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:17-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-3}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag (1996/2)}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening 17e NTG bijeenkomst 1 juni 1996;
	Notulen van de zestiende bijeenkomst van 5 september 1995;
	Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen;
	NTG ledenvergadering;
	Verslag commissie voor kascontrol en vaststelling nieuwe commissie voor kascontrole;
	Bestuursverkiezingen;
	Miscellanious;
	Rondvraag en sluiting.}}
}

@article{maps:17-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:17-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1996/2)}},
 keywords  = {{chairman}},
}

@article{maps:17-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Van uw MAPS Editor (1996/2)}},
}

@article{maps:17-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{Concept begroting 1997}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:17-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{Een rol voor {\TeX} in het 3de millennium}},
}

@article{maps:17-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan, Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{(Cyr)TuG, and some more}},
 keywords  = {{CyrTUG, TUG conference, Dubna}},
 abstract  = {{Report of TUG meeting in Dubna, Russia.}}
}

@article{maps:17-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-16}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{De spelling van het lot}},
 keywords  = {{new dutch, dutch spelling, spell checker, Groene Boekje}},
 abstract  = {{Het SPELLINGBESLUIT gepubliceerd in Staatsblad 394
	(Besluit van 19 juni 1996, houdende voorschriften omtrent
	de schrijfwijze van de Nederlandse taal) heeft niet alleen
	gezorgd voor veel gekrakeel tussen neerlandici, maar het
	vormde ook een buitenkans voor uitgeverijen van werken als
	HET GROENE BOEKJE (binnen zes maanden 500.000 verkochte
	exemplaren). Kleinere ondernemingen brachten floppies op
	de markt met woordenlijsten en algoritmen. Intussen sloeg
	een groepje mensen (bestaande uit — in alfabetische
	volgorde — Erick Branderhorst, Erik Frambach, Frans
	Goddijn, Hans Hagen, Gerard van Nes, Piet Tutelaers,
	Jacoline van Weelden en Peter van Zeeland, en terzijde
	gestaan door Hans Linders) de handen ineen om te komen tot
	een vrij beschikbare, zo correct mogelijke Nederlandse
	woordenlijst.}}
}

@article{maps:17-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17-22}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Heeft {\TeX} nog toekomst?}},
 keywords  = {{future, {\TeX} reflection}},
 abstract  = {{This articles is meant as a starting point for further discussion on the
	future of {\TeX}. The author wrote this expose after a discussion in the
	NTG board concerning the future of {\TeX} and the NTG.}}
}

@article{maps:17-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{23-31}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{117kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio}},
 title     = {{Do journals honor {\LaTeX} submissions?}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, journals, submissions, academic}},
 abstract  = {{The survival of {\LaTeX} in the academic world will depend
	on {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} evolving towards changing publishing
	practices, but also on publishers actually accepting
	{\LaTeX} submissions. Much has been said about the former,
	with a recent feature number of TUGboat addressing the
	subject of electronic publishing. When it comes to the
	latter issue, however, it is often taken for granted that
	scientific journals honor {\LaTeX} submissions. An
	extensive research over the Internet reveals that, on the
	contrary, at the turn of the century many journals still
	regret to accept {\LaTeX} submissions, sometimes preferring
	RTF or even bare ASCII sources to {\TeX} or {\LaTeX}. This
	note discusses some of the issues behind this situation
	and compiles all journals known to the au-thor that accept
	electronic submission of {\LaTeX} articles in source form,
	thereby complementing the {\TeX} counterpart.}}
}

@article{maps:17-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{32-33}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Hoenig}},
 title     = {{Introduction to ``{\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} \& {\TeX} Strategies, Fonts, Graphics, and More''}},
}

@article{maps:17-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{34-40}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{131kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Hoenig}},
 title     = {{Virtual Fonts, Virtuous Fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Virtual fonts allow us to use all digital fonts with
	{\TeX}, even non-{\TeX} ones, and do much more for us. What
	are virtual fonts? Several projects grant us necessary
	experience with them. This document comprises somewhat
	less than half of the similarly named chapter which will
	appear in the book {\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} and {\TeX}
	Strategies for Fonts, Graphics, and More, by Alan Hoenig,
	to be published in early 1997 by Oxford University Press.
	This excerpt is simplified so that it may be printed using
	the standard suite of {\TeX} fonts; the original depends
	heavily on PostScript fonts and the author's style file
	for its typesetting. Consequently, some displays could not
	be included. For any questions or comments, please contact
	the author at ajhjj@cunyvm.cuny.edu.}}
}

@article{maps:17-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-45}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alan Hoenig}},
 title     = {{Detailed Contents for ``{\TeX} Unbound: {\LaTeX} \& {\TeX} Strategies, Fonts, Graphics, and More''}},
 abstract  = {{This book will be published by Oxford University Press in
	early 1997. Contact the author at ajhjj@cunyvm.cuny.edu
	for further information.}}
}

@article{maps:17-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{46-51}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Carlisle}},
 title     = {{A {\LaTeX} tour, part 1: the base distribution}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, base distribution, documentation, guide}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I hope to give a `guided tour' around the
	files that make up the basic {\LaTeX} distribution.
	Subsequent articles in this mini-series will cover other
	packages by the {\LaTeX} development team, and also some of
	the main contributed packages.}}
}

@article{maps:17-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-56}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{98kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Carlisle}},
 title     = {{A {\LaTeX} tour, part 2: the Tools and Graphics distribution}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, tools package distribution, documentation, guide}},
 abstract  = {{In the previous article in this series I started by
	giving a description of the files in the `base' {\LaTeX}
	distribution. In part 2, I shall cover the `tools' and
	`graphics' distributions. These are distributed in the
	tools and graphics subdirectories of the CTAN directory
	macros/{\LaTeX}/packages. Although these files are not part
	of the min-imal base distribution they should normally be
	included in the {\LaTeX} installation at any site. The
	{\LaTeX} book assumes that at least the graphics
	distribution is installed.}}
}

@article{maps:17-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-64}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{165kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herman Haverkort}},
 title     = {{FRISTI}},
 keywords  = {{small, lists, directory, calendar, key fob, credit card, stuffing}},
 abstract  = {{This article gives an impression of my way of designing
	and typesetting very small telephone and address lists,
	birthday calendars etc. Design considerations and
	typesetting tricks are presented. The latter include
	macros which define the sheets (from A4 to credit card and
	even key fob size), macros to process data records
	(typically specified in a separate file) in various ways,
	and macros to stuff and stow data in very limited space.}}
}

@article{maps:17-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-71}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{143kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Alexander Berdnikov, Olga Grineva}},
 title     = {{PMGRAPH.STY: some useful macros which extends the {\LaTeX} picture environment}},
}

@article{maps:17-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{72-114}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{277kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Keith Reckdahl}},
 title     = {{Using EPS Graphics in {\LaTeX}2e Documents}},
 abstract  = {{This document explains how to use Encapsulated PostScript
	(EPS) files in {\LaTeX}2e documents. The graphics and
	graphicx packages provide commands which insert, scale,
	and rotate EPS graphics.}}
}

@article{maps:17-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-121}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{107kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dag Langmyhr}},
 title     = {{Star{\TeX} — a {\TeX} for beginners}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} format, novice {\TeX}, robust {\TeX}, error recovery in {\TeX}, {\TeX} with SGML notation}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes Star{\TeX}, a new {\TeX} format for
	students writing their first report and other novice
	users. Its aim is to provide a simpler and more robust
	tool for users with no previous knowledge of {\TeX} and
	{\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:17-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{122-125}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{79kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Loops}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, loops, plain {\TeX}, tail recursion}},
 abstract  = {{The implementation of loops in plain {\TeX} is surveyed.
	Van der Goot's loop is a remarkable straight
	implementation of tail recursion. Nesting of loops and the
	pitfalls in there are discussed. The use of hidden
	counters and the flip-flop traversal are given.}}
}

@article{maps:17-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{126-131}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Searching}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, databases, pattern recognition, plain {\TeX}, tree searching, selective loading}},
 abstract  = {{Various ways of searching in plain {\TeX} are surveyed.
	Its use in BLUe's format for selective loading of macros,
	addresses, pictures, formats and tools is discussed.
	Interactively searching through a binary tree in dialogue
	with {\TeX} is also given.}}
}

@article{maps:17-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{132-136}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{77kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Sorting}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe format, heap sort, index preparation, plain {\TeX}, quick sort}},
 abstract  = {{Various ways of sorting in plain {\TeX} are surveyed.
	Macros for linear sorting (in the mouth), quick sort and
	heap sort are given. The use for sorting index reminders
	for indexing on-the-fly is touched upon.}}
}

@article{maps:17-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{137-150}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{161kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Paradigms: Just a little bit of PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{declarative program, EPS, Escher, graphics, imperative code, {\LaTeX}, Koch island, Malevich, math graphs, METAFONT, MFtoEPS, Mondrian, PostScript, projection, reverse video, ROEX, Schroefer, sideways tables, suprematism, text along curved paths, tiling}},
 abstract  = {{It is all about creating EPS — with graphics — to be
	merged with (La){\TeX} scripts. The emphasis is on creating
	raw PostScript for simple symmetrical pictures. Asides,
	like incorporating accurate graphs of math functions,
	typesetting text along curved paths, or tables set
	sideways, next to reverse video, clipping and tiling have
	been addressed. A poor man's MFtoEPS approach is touched
	upon: (declarative) METAFONT into (imperative)
	PostScript.}}
}

@article{maps:17-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{151-156}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{168kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Visual Debugging in {\TeX}: a short introduction}},
}

@article{maps:17-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{157-174}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{119kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Visual Debugging in {\TeX}: how things are done}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, visual debugging, debugging, boxes, glue, penalties, kerns, fills}},
 abstract  = {{By redefining some {\TeX} primitives, one can get an impression of what
	{\TeX} and macros are doing behind the screens. This article visualizes
	some rather common but often unnoticed {\TeX} features. The visual
	debugger described here is part of Con{\TeX}t, but can be used in plain
	{\TeX} and other macro packages as well.}}
}

@article{maps:17-26,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{175}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{17}},
 size      = {{6kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Where to find Con{\TeX}t}},
}

@book{maps:17a,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-36}},
 year      = {{1996}},
 volume    = {{'17a'}},
 size      = {{1088kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{NTG's Public Relation Set}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, introduction}},
 abstract  = {{Informatie voor geïnteresseerden in {\TeX} \& de NTG.
	Introductie over {\TeX} met vele voorbeelden.}}
}

@book{maps:18,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-167}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{24776kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 97.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:18-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag Bijeenkomst}},
 keywords  = {{report, meeting, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening, Notulen, Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen,
	bestuursmutaties, subsidieaanvraag, begroting 1997, MAPS zaken,
	Activiteiten, Lustrumcommissie, Werkgroepen}}
}

@article{maps:18-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1997/1)}},
}

@article{maps:18-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{16kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel (1997/1)}},
}

@article{maps:18-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6-7}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:18-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-9}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{14kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag 1996}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:18-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-12}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag NTG 1996}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:18-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{33kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Users Group, gisteren, vandaag en morgen}},
}

@article{maps:18-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-17}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Bericht van FGBBS — Voorjaar 1997}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, report}},
 abstract  = {{Hoewel ``de loop eruit is'' in de \verb|BBS|
	winkelstraten, houdt \verb|FGBBS| stand als het rustige
	knopenwinkeltje dat met enige regelmaat wordt bezocht door
	een kleine maar trouwe klantenkring uit de wijde omgeving.}}
}

@article{maps:18-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{18}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{WG: Educatie — een overzicht en oproep}},
 keywords  = {{working group, education}},
 abstract  = {{Een overzicht van de activiteiten binnen en buiten de WG
	wordt gegeven, met daarnaast een suggestie.}}
}

@article{maps:18-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{12kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{WG: {\TeX} \& SGML}},
 keywords  = {{working group, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{Een korte introductie van de werkgroep SGML en een
	oproep voor geinteresseerde leden}}
}

@article{maps:18-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{21-23}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{88kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{De nieuwe NTG-WWW pagina's}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, internet, WWW}},
 abstract  = {{Sinds kort zijn de WWW-pagina's van de NTG
	(\verb|WWW.ntg.nl|) geheel vernieuwd. Dit artikel geeft
	een overzicht van de ideeën achter de nieuwe opzet en
	uitvoering.}}
}

@article{maps:18-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{25-36}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{95kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de {\TeX}-NL discussielijst (1997)}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, discussionlist, tips, hints, beginner, help, stylefiles}},
 abstract  = {{In 1993 publiceerde Philippe Vanoverbeke in de MAPS tweemaal een
	selectie van berichten uit de {\TeX}-NL lijst. Nu, een poosje later,
	wordt de draad weer opgepakt. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en
	gouden tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat
	ook alweer?''
	Deze informatie is, samen met nog veel meer van dergelijke waardevolle
	berichten uit {\TeX}-NL, ook na te lezen op FGBBS in
	het berichtengebied FGBBS.ARCHIVE.
	Opvallend is dat in bijna alle gevallen het snelste en definitieve
	antwoord wordt gegeven door Piet van Oostrum
	(piet@cs.ruu.nl, WWW.cs.ruu.nl/~piet),
	zonder wie {\TeX}-NL niet het zeer nuttige en snelle medium zou
	zijn dat het nu is. OOSTRUM-NL zou ook een goeie naam
	zijn.}}
}

@article{maps:18-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{37-39}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Conversie van Bib{\TeX} naar HTML, {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Bib{\TeX}, Perl, HTML, conversion}},
 abstract  = {{Bib{\TeX}-bibliografieën kunnen met behulp van een Perl-script vertaald
	worden naar HTML. Een variant op dat script levert een compleet
	{\LaTeX}-bestand. Nog een andere variant levert een plain {\TeX}-bestand dat
	naar believen bijgeschaafd kan worden. Als gereedschap is enkel
	Perl en (La){\TeX} nodig.}}
}

@article{maps:18-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{41-44}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ton Biegstraaten}},
 title     = {{Het invoeren en afdrukken van de Latin-1 Characterset}},
 abstract  = {{Ten behoeve van een collegedictaat is een tabel nodig met de Latin-1
	of iso-8859-1 characterset. Dit artikel behandelt het
	invoeren en afdrukken van deze characterset met behulp van {\LaTeX}2e.}}
}

@article{maps:18-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{45-52}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{5233kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{SGML entities in (La){\TeX}: \verb|sgmlent.sty|}},
 keywords  = {{SGML entities, SGML conversion, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{This package provides an easy-to-use interface to the
	SGML character entity sets (ISO 8879, Annex D). All entity
	sets defined in the Annex are supported, but there are still
	some minor problems.}}
}

@article{maps:18-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-60}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, Frank Mittelbach}},
 title     = {{The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}},
 keywords  = {{abstract, table of contents, preface, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This handy reference describes techniques and tricks needed to
	illustrate {\LaTeX} documents, and answers common user questions about
	graphics and PostScript fonts. It provides the first full description
	of the standard {\LaTeX} color and graphics packages, and shows how
	you can combine {\TeX} and PostScript capabilities to produce
	beautifully illustrated pages. Following the successful format of
	\textit{The {\LaTeX} Companion}, this new book will be an invaluable {\LaTeX}
	resource for incorporating pictures into text.}}
}

@article{maps:18-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-63}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Loading Pic{\TeX} without problems}},
 keywords  = {{PIC{\TeX}, PPCH{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{When using ppch{\TeX} in {\LaTeX}, one can run out of dimension registers.
	This article describes a loading mechanism that take care of proper
	loading of PIC{\TeX}, that is, by using as few dimensions as possible.}}
}

@article{maps:18-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{65-67}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{pdf{\TeX}, een eerste indruk}},
 keywords  = {{PDF, pdf{\TeX}, web2c}},
 abstract  = {{Currently a new extension of {\TeX} is under development. This web2c
	based extension pdf{\TeX} not only produces DVI output, but
	alternatively generates PDF code. Functionality as well as new
	primitives are described.}}
}

@article{maps:18-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{69}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{Even voorstellen: de EPDA}},
}

@article{maps:18-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{71-82}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{243kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Puzzling Graphics in METAPOST}},
 keywords  = {{METAPOST, puzzles, graphics}},
 abstract  = {{METAPOST can be used for more than math oriented graphics. This
	article describes some macros for drawing arbitrary jigsaw puzzles and
	shifting puzzles. METAPOST can be fun!}}
}

@article{maps:18-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{83-85}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{240kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Scans and bitmaps in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{scan, image, bitmap, resolution, halftone, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Guidelines are given for working with scans and bitmaps,
	with the emphasis on PostScript printing from {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:18-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-91}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{2634kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Using fonts in METAPOST — one way of forcing {\TeX} to include the right fonts}},
 keywords  = {{METAPOST, fonts in METAPOST, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{METAPOST graphics can contain {\TeX} produced text. Unfortunately, when
	including such graphics in {\TeX} documents, only DVIPS
	knows how to include the right glyphs. This articles describes a method
	(and macros) to handle glyph inclusion independant of DVI drivers. The
	Con{\TeX}t module described here can be used in other macro packages as
	well. (A later version of this module implements a more efficient
	mechanism as well as some additional functionality.)}}
}

@article{maps:18-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{93-98}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Stars around 1 — PostScript straightaway}},
 keywords  = {{EPS, fractal, intersection, Koch island, METAFONT, METAPOST, MFtoEPS, outline, PostScript, ROEX, star, tiling}},
 abstract  = {{Drawing the outline of stars is discussed.
	A METAFONT/Post and a PostScript program are included, next to
	a Colombus' egg PostScript solution.
	The appendices contain compositions of stars and
	a few versions of a PostScript operator to calculate
	the intersection point of two lines determined by four points.}}
}

@article{maps:18-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-102}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Stars around 2 — what a little math can do}},
 keywords  = {{analytic geometry, clipping, intersection, linear equations, logos, METAPOST, METAFONT, MFtoEPS, outline, PostScript, ROEX, tangent}},
 abstract  = {{The problems as treated by Jackowski in his lecture at
	NTG's 1996 fall meeting: a tangent to a circle, intersection of
	circles, V-like logo, and (circular) clipping of waves, are provided
	with alternative solutions, along with straightaway PostScript
	codes.}}
}

@article{maps:18-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{103-104}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Bacho{\TeX} 97 — {\TeX} from inside}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, GUST, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{A report of GUST's 5th conference in Bachotek, Poland.}}
}

@article{maps:18-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{105-113}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{1394kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ton Biegstraaten}},
 title     = {{Een greep uit de fontverzameling van {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{De verzameling fonts die beschikbaar is binnen {\TeX} is
	zeer omvangrijk. In dit artikel wordt een subjectieve poging
	gedaan hier iets van te laten zien.}}
}

@article{maps:18-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-116}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}, BLUes, and Jazz — a search for values}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe, databases, plain {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{How to use {\TeX} for a database oriented application
	is shown by the example of a collection of Jazz CDs.
	The request was to provide (part) of the title of a tune and to
	let {\TeX} response with all the CDs which contain that tune.
	Only a few lines of code was all that was needed to fulfill the purpose.
	The example might serve as a user-oriented stepping stone for understanding
	how in BLUe's format {\TeX} as database engine has been used.}}
}

@article{maps:18-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{117-123}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Andries Lenstra, Ruud Koning}},
 title     = {{Gegevensverwerking met da{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{databases, data integrity, da{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{De auteurs geven een inleiding in da{\TeX}. Dat is een
	verzameling macro's waarmee gegevens eenvoudig kunnen worden verwerkt
	in een {\TeX} of {\LaTeX} file. Twee voorbeelden illustreren de grote
	mogelijkheden van deze macro's. Een uitgebreide handleiding en de
	macro's zelf staan op \verb|WWW.xs4all.nl/~rhkoning|.}}
}

@article{maps:18-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{125-130}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{6095kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wiegert Tierie}},
 title     = {{Adobe Supra: Adobe's High-Performance Raster Image Processor (RIP) Architecture for Print-on-Demand Systems}},
}

@article{maps:18-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{131-144}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{7860kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philip Taylor}},
 title     = {{Computergestuurd Zetten of Electronisch publiceren? Nieuwe
    trends in wetenschappelijk publiceren}},
 abstract  = {{Abstract in het pools, tekst vertaald uit het engels
	door Taco Hoekwater}}
}

@article{maps:18-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{145-150}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{121kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{lyx: een front-end voor {\LaTeX} of een textprocessor?}},
 keywords  = {{LyX, review, WYSIWYG, front-end}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel is een recentie van het programma LyX. Lyx is een programma
	voor X windows dat dient als (bijna-)WYSIWYG schil bovenop {\LaTeX}.
	De huidige stabiele beta-versie, die hier dan ook besproken wordt,
	is versie 0.10.7. Het programma wordt geschreven door een aantal
	auteurs onder `leiding' van Matthias Ettrich
	(\verb|ettrich@informatik.uni-tuebingen.de|).}}
}

@article{maps:18-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{151-154}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{129kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{kdvi: een verbeterde xdvi}},
 keywords  = {{DVI previewer, previewer, X, interface}},
 abstract  = {{kdvi is een aangepaste versie van xdvi, een DVI
	previewer voor het X Window Systeem. De belangrijkste verandering is
	het gebruik van een `echte' grafische interface ter vervanging van de
	nogal primitieve widgets van xdvi. kdvi is \textit{alpha} software,
	de huidige versie is 0.2. De auteur is Markku Hihnala
	(\verb|mah@ee.oulu.fi|).}}
}

@article{maps:18-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{155-159}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{DVIPS manual — good old portability, and some more}},
 keywords  = {{aligning figures, BLUe format, captions, DVI, EPS, figures, minimal markup, overprinting, portability, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Portable manuals should be written and marked up in this
	way. Just a few macros to take care of the formatting. The manual
	can be easily personalized. The dvips manual has been made
	available as a BLUe report with an index — based on IR-s by
	Rokicki — and a ToC. Both are welcome when using the manual.
	Some experience in using dvips under UNIX is also reported:
	overprinting a picture, adding a caption, and aligning pictures. A
	pitfall in using psfig is mentioned as well.}}
}

@article{maps:18-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{161-166}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{How to handle compound and bounded words}},
 keywords  = {{compound words, hyphenation, Con{\TeX}t, boundary characters}},
 abstract  = {{The dutch language permits words to be combined in many ways. To permit
	such compound words to be hyphenated properly, a versatile mechanism is
	presented, that handles all kind of compound and boundary situations.
	Although part of Con{\TeX}t, this module can be used in other packages as
	well.}}
}

@article{maps:18-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{167-170}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Een moderne toren van Babel}},
 abstract  = {{In deze voordracht zal ik kort aandacht besteden aan
	`wat is {\TeX}', `wat is {\LaTeX}'. Hierbij komt ook het concept van
	`structuur markup' aan de orde. Vervolgens zal ik ingaan op de
	geschiedenis van het babel pakket. Aan de hand van een aantal
	voorbeelden zal ik toelichten welke problematiek zich voordoet bij
	het op een correcte wijze vormgeven van documenten waarin meerdere
	talen worden gebruikt.}}
}

@article{maps:18-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{171-174}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Stretching the limits of Babel, an Ever Growing Package?}},
}

@article{maps:18-37,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{175-190}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{18}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG Ledeninformatie}},
}

@book{maps:19,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-175}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{4016kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 97.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:19-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-3}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag 19de NTG Bijeenkomst}},
 keywords  = {{report, meeting, members meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Opening, Notulen, Ingekomen stukken en mededelingen,
	ledenvergadering}}
}

@article{maps:19-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1997/2)}},
}

@article{maps:19-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel (1997/2)}},
}

@article{maps:19-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6-7}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:19-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{13kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Begroting NTG 1998}},
 keywords  = {{budget}},
}

@article{maps:19-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG bestuur}},
 title     = {{Ontwerpwedstrijd}},
}

@article{maps:19-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-11}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{4all{\TeX} versie 4}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, 4all{\TeX}, em{\TeX}, plug \& play, CDROM}},
 abstract  = {{De vierde editie van de 4all{\TeX} cdroms komt eraan. Dit
	artikel beschrijft wat er zoal nieuw is in deze editie.}}
}

@article{maps:19-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{12}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{15kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Het herontwerp van de MAPS}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS, paper format, fontkeuze, multi-columns, layout}},
 abstract  = {{Toelichting bij de nieuwe vormgeving van de MAPS: papierformaat,
	font keuze, aanpassingen voor twee-kolomsopmaak.}}
}

@article{maps:19-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-18}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{De macros uit de nieuwe MAPS class}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS class file, macro design, layout}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft de macros die gebruikt worden in
	de nieuwe maps class file. De nadruk ligt op de macros die
	proberen een stramien te ondersteunen.}}
}

@article{maps:19-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-27}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philip Taylor}},
 title     = {{Book Design for {\TeX} Users — Part 1: Theory}},
 keywords  = {{design, typography, layout}},
 abstract  = {{Book design cannot be taught; it can only be learned,
	preferably by critical study of as many books as possible.
	Of all the elements which make up a book, white space
	is frequently the least considered and the most important.
	\textit{Avant garde} designs are compared and contrasted
	with more conservative and traditional approaches.
	Three key elements: \textit{uniformity}, \textit{information}
	and \textit{structure} are identified, and `good design
	practice' discussed in terms of each of these.}}
}

@article{maps:19-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{28-38}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{121kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philip Taylor}},
 title     = {{Book Design for {\TeX} Users — Part 2: Practice}},
 keywords  = {{design, typography, layout}},
 abstract  = {{In the predecessor to this paper, three fundamental
	concepts of \textit{uniformity}, \textit{information} and
	\textit{structure} were introduced, and general guidance given on
	each of them. In this paper, more practical advice is given,
	specifically in two areas: guidance on actual dimensions,
	proportions and layout; and guidance on implementing some of the
	ideas through the medium of the {\TeX} language. Finally, some
	difficult (and even insoluble) problems in layout are
	discussed.}}
}

@article{maps:19-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{39-67}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{819kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Tiling in PostScript and METAFONT — Escher's wink}},
 keywords  = {{Apollonius, computer art, Douat, Duerer, EPS, Escher, graphics, METAFONT, METAPOST, outline, Kepler, Mondrian, parquet, Penrose, PostScript, puzzles, Soddy, tiling, Truchet, turtle graphics, zero finding}},
 abstract  = {{Drawing tilings by computer is discussed.
	Examples are borrowed from literature.
	New are their included METAFONT and PostScript programs, with
	sometimes a new variation of a picture.}}
}

@article{maps:19-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{68-70}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox (1997)}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript, installation, toolbox}},
 abstract  = {{Er lopen in de wereld zo veel {\TeX}-gebruikers rond, dat het zelden zal
	voorkomen dat een normale gebruiker de eerste is die een probleem
	tegen komt. Meestal zal dit probleem ook al door iemand anders zijn
	opgelost en vaak staat de oplossing op de 4all{\TeX}, {\TeX}live of
	een andere cd-rom. Indien daar niet te vinden is staat er
	vast wel een oplossing op ctan
	of één of andere Internetsite. Het probleem zit hem niet in de
	beschikbaarheid, maar in het opsporen van de oplossing. Artikelen in
	maps zijn daarvoor natuurlijk een belangrijke informatiebron.
	Sommige oplossingen zijn echter zo eenvoudig dat er nooit een artikel
	aan gewijd zal worden. Over een draadstriptang valt nu eenmaal niet al
	te veel te vertellen. In Toolbox zal niet alleen de draadstriptang
	worden besproken, maar ook het gebruik van lucifers om het plastic van
	het einde van het snoer af te branden. Stuur ook informatie over uw
	favoriete tools naar mij op, zo kan Toolbox een belangrijke
	informatiebron worden over utilities, macro's en andere eenvoudige
	trucs voor de gewone {\TeX}-gebruiker. Deze keer is de spil van het
	verhaal PostScript.}}
}

@article{maps:19-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{71-72}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{TUG'97 conferentie}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, San Francisco}},
 abstract  = {{Een kort verslag van de conferentie van de {\TeX} Users
	Group 1997 in San Francisco, USA.}}
}

@article{maps:19-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{73-75}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{32kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Robbert Hardin}},
 title     = {{Installatie-handleidinkje voor `{\LaTeX} voor Windows 1.0'}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, Windows, systems, installation}},
 abstract  = {{Op verzoek van Frans Goddijn heeft FGBBS-user Robbert
	Hardin een verslag geschreven van de installatie van het pakket
	{\LaTeX} voor Windows (16 diskettes, ook op FGBBS te vinden).}}
}

@article{maps:19-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{76-78}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{110kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} \& Chinees}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, Chinese, CJK, fonts, PostScript, Big5}},
 abstract  = {{Met behulp van het {\LaTeX}-package `CJK' is het mogelijk om tekst te
	zetten in het Chinees, Japans en Koreaans. In dit artikel laat ik
	in het kort zien wat ervoor nodig is om Chinese tekst met {\LaTeX} —
	Japans en Koreaans blijven buiten beschouwing.
	Het installeren van de benodigde software wordt behandeld, evenals
	het gebruik van dit systeem in de praktijk.}}
}

@article{maps:19-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{79-86}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{98kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} inside, insight, in sight: get priorities right}},
 keywords  = {{active list separators, greyboxes, hyphenation of accented words, minimal markup, partitioned matrices, two-part macros}},
 abstract  = {{It is argued that for using {\TeX} — a multi-level tool —
	{\TeX} inside knowledge should not be necessary for the layman, for
	production purposes. The `why, what and when,' especially at the grey
	level will be discussed. Necessary insight issues are enumerated.}}
}

@article{maps:19-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{87-96}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{86kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Local Guide {\TeX}-installatie Fewec}},
 keywords  = {{local guide, {\LaTeX} installation, editor, Jed}},
 abstract  = {{Dit is de Local Guide van de {\LaTeX} installatie van de Faculteit der
	Economische Wetenschappen en Econometrie van de Vrije Universiteit te
	Amsterdam. De Local Guide is niet bedoeld als {\LaTeX}-handleiding,
	maar als aanvulling daarop. Er wordt een korte uitleg over {\LaTeX}
	gegeven, een aantal bijzonderheden van onze {\LaTeX}-installatie wordt
	genoemd en de gebruikte editor (Jed) wordt besproken. De
	Local Guide kan zeker worden uitgebreid. Eenieder die nieuw materiaal
	heeft kan dit aan mij doorsturen en ik zal zorgen dat het, zoveel
	mogelijk ongewijzigd, wordt opgenomen.}}
}

@article{maps:19-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{97-111}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{209kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kluwer Academic Publishers}},
 title     = {{User manual for kluwer.cls}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}2e, electronic submission, user manual, class file, Kluwer}},
 abstract  = {{This is the user manual for the kluwer.cls class file
	for the preparation of articles to be submitted to journals or
	spin-offs of journals published by Kluwer Academic Publishers. The
	kluwer.cls is a generic class, which allows us to have a simple
	conversion to different journal layouts. The kluwer.cls class file is
	similar to the \textit{article} class file of {\LaTeX}, but it has some extra
	fields in the preamble and some extended commands for the body text.}}
}

@article{maps:19-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{112-114}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Quark Xpress: een vakantieliefde}},
 keywords  = {{Quark Xpress, manual}},
 abstract  = {{Hoe prachtig ``ons {\TeX}'' ook is, in de wijde wereld daarbuiten
	is het onbekend. De meeste drukkers en grafische ontwerpers weten niet
	eens wat het is. Pas als je het magische woord ``Quark Xpress'' laat
	vallen, tel je voor hen mee. Afgelopen zomer kocht ik een manual van
	meer dan 600 pagina's en verslond dit in de vakantie. Wat heeft dat pakket
	dat wij niet hebben?}}
}

@article{maps:19-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{115-177}},
 year      = {{1997}},
 volume    = {{19}},
 size      = {{2263kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t voor beginners}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t manual}},
 abstract  = {{Hierna volgt een introductie op Con{\TeX}t. Deze handleiding is, net
	als Con{\TeX}t, beschikbaar in het Nederlands en Engels en binnenkort ook in het
	Duits. Dit is de eerste versie; op- en aanmerkingen zijn dan ook welkom.}}
}

@book{maps:20,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-348}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{15809kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 98.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:20-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{87kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag 20e bijeenkomst, 11 november 1997}},
 keywords  = {{report, members meeting}},
}

@article{maps:20-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{136kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1998/1)}},
}

@article{maps:20-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mimi Jett}},
 title     = {{From the TUG President}},
}

@article{maps:20-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel (1998/1)}},
}

@article{maps:20-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{138kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het weten waard}},
}

@article{maps:20-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Financieel verslag 1997}},
 keywords  = {{financial report}},
}

@article{maps:20-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11-14}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{95kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Jaarverslag ntg 1997}},
 keywords  = {{report NTG}},
}

@article{maps:20-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-16}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{105kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{De NTG en het Internet (1998/1)}},
 keywords  = {{discussionlist, TEX-NL}},
}

@article{maps:20-09,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17-19}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{FGBBS op snelheid — verslag van FGBBS}},
 keywords  = {{BBS, bulletin board, file requests, email, library}},
}

@article{maps:20-10,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{20-24}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{162kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{10 jaar NTG — wat vinden de leden}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS, enquete}},
}

@article{maps:20-11,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{25-26}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{129kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Het nieuwe NTG logo}},
 keywords  = {{NTG logo, EPS}},
}

@article{maps:20-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{26}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{93kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Why \expandafter is sometimes needed by common users too}},
 keywords  = {{\expandafter, macro language}},
}

@article{maps:20-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{27-32}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{141kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{10 jaar NTG}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, {\TeX} user groups, lustrum}},
 abstract  = {{Een terugblik op tien jaar NTG, met een vooruitblik naar de komende jaren.}}
}

@article{maps:20-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-37}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{250kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}'98 in Saint-Malo, France}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference, Saint-Malo}},
 abstract  = {{This year's Euro{\TeX} conference was held in Saint-Malo. On behalf of
	the NTG ERik Frambach, Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater and Siep Kroonenberg
	represented the dutch {\TeX}-community. In this report they discuss the
	social and {\TeX}nical aspects of the conference.}}
}

@article{maps:20-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37/43}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{163kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Expansion, what is that?}},
 keywords  = {{expansion, macro language}},
}

@article{maps:20-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{38-43}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{1101kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Color in professional print production}},
 keywords  = {{color printing, color model, device-independent color, color conversion, color separation, PDF}},
 abstract  = {{This paper takes a look at issues arising in color printing,
	such as color models, color conversion and color
	separation. Increasingly, it is feasible to perform these
	functions on existing PostScript files, independent of the
	authoring software. The PDF format plays a key role in this
	trend.}}
}

@article{maps:20-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{44-45}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{800kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Richard Kinch}},
 title     = {{Microsoft buys {\TeX}, plans new products}},
 keywords  = {{MicroSoft, Knuth, joke}},
}

@article{maps:20-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{46-64}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{876kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerard van Nes}},
 title     = {{Reprint Maps issue \#1}},
 keywords  = {{MAPS reprint}},
 abstract  = {{This is a fascimile of the very first MAPS
	issue, originally published in 1988}}
}

@article{maps:20-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{65-71}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{4106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gerrit Oomen}},
 title     = {{Het zetten van wetenschappelijk werk: 1973 vs 1998 — (Monotype vs {\TeX})}},
 keywords  = {{typesetting, monotype, traditional typesetting}},
}

@article{maps:20-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{72-79}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{360kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Typografische scanning}},
 keywords  = {{typography, dutch}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel geeft een beschouwing over ``Nederlandse''
	typografie, aan de hand van een aantal scans van in Nederland
	gepubliceerde boeken en tijdschriften uit de afgelopen drie
	eeuwen. Het artikel laat een aantal traditionele typografische
	vormen zien, met toevoeging van wat commentaren over het
	gebruikte proces.}}
}

@article{maps:20-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{80-107}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{379kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Vlakverdeling in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, layout, grids, two-up, logos, arranging pages}},
 abstract  = {{This article is actually chapter 3 of the Con{\TeX}t reference
	manual, typeset in the MAPS layout. Attention will be paid to
	defining layout specific areas, rearranging pages, locating
	logos, typesetting on a grid and adding cutmarks.}}
}

@article{maps:20-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{108-116}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{230kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Klaus Lagally}},
 title     = {{Arab{\TeX} — Typesetting Arabic with Vowels and Ligatures}},
 keywords  = {{Arab{\TeX}, transliteration, arabic, Farsi, Urdu, Pashto}},
 abstract  = {{We present a {\TeX} macro package for generating the arabic
	writing from a standardized ASCII input notation. It can handle
	partial or full vocalization, and generates automatically most
	of the common ligatures. There is limited support for Farsi,
	Urdu, and Pashto. Arab{\TeX} is compatible with Plain {\TeX} and
	also most {\LaTeX} environments; arabic and other material can be
	mixed freely. For special purposes the standard transliteration
	can be additionally generated. Arab{\TeX} uses no preprocessor
	and thus should be compatible with any {\TeX} implementation that
	allows dynamic loading of additional macro files and fonts.}}
}

@article{maps:20-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{117-119}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{71kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Dartele cijfers: poor man's oldstyle}},
 keywords  = {{oldstyle, mediaeval, digits, numbers, trucs, pstricks}},
 abstract  = {{Erik Frambach vroeg zich af of het mogelijk zou zijn om met wat
	trucs de oldstyle cijfers te emuleren dij fijnproevers zo mooi
	vinden. En het kostte nog minder moeite dan hij had verwacht!}}
}

@article{maps:20-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{120-124}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{154kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}},
 title     = {{DVIview, a new previewer}},
 keywords  = {{DVIview, previewer, Windows, outline fonts}},
 abstract  = {{DVIview is a new viewer for the Windows platform. Key features:
	virtual fonts, rotated and colored text and performance. This
	article focuses on the development process and hilights some
	features of the software.}}
}

@article{maps:20-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{125-130}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{190kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox (1998)}},
 keywords  = {{Bib{\TeX}, bibliography, bibdb, bibedit, toolbox}},
 abstract  = {{Literatuurverwijzingen vormen deze keer de hoofdmoot van het
	verhaal.}}
}

@article{maps:20-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{131-137}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{170kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Carlisle}},
 title     = {{A {\LaTeX} Tour, part 3: mfnfss, psnfss and babel}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, psnfss, mfnfss, Babel}},
}

@article{maps:20-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{138-141}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{178kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Conversie van any{\TeX} naar HTML met {\TeX}4ht}},
 keywords  = {{conversion, HTML, WWW, tex4ht}},
 abstract  = {{Gurari's {\TeX}4ht-programmatuur maakt het mogelijk om in {\TeX}
	geschreven teksten (plain {\TeX}, {\LaTeX} of wat dan ook) vrij
	eenvoudig te converteren naar HTML. Als voorbeeld nemen we de
	4{\TeX}-handleiding die in {\LaTeX} is geschreven.}}
}

@article{maps:20-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{142-145}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{242kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Visual {\TeX} 5.10 for MS-Windows}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} implementations, visual {\TeX}, Windows, HTML}},
 abstract  = {{MicroPress' Visual {\TeX} is a complete {\TeX} implementation for
	MS-DOS and all flavors of MS-Windows. The Windows version is
	reviewed here. It supports several interesting features that go
	beyond standard {\TeX}, such as outline fonts and conversion to
	HTML.}}
}

@article{maps:20-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{146-149}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{141kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Fabrice Popineau}},
 title     = {{Windvi User's Manual}},
 keywords  = {{DVI previewer, windvi, manual}},
 abstract  = {{This article is an adaptation of the HTML file that comes with
	the current (0.40) version of windvi}}
}

@article{maps:20-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{150-209}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{742kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{PPCH{\TeX} — a macropackage for typesetting chemical structure formulas with {\TeX} — release 2}},
 keywords  = {{PPCH{\TeX}, chemical formulas, graphics, manual}},
 abstract  = {{A few years ago PPCH{\TeX} was introduced. This generic macro
	package can be used to typeset chemical structure
	formulas. Currently the NTG supports a dedicated mailing list,
	to which quite some users subscribed.
	Here we present the long awaited for english update of the
	manual. The dutch and german manuals were already available for
	about a year and can be uploaded from the NTG server.}}
}

@article{maps:20-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{210-213}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{120kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}},
 title     = {{The DJGPP port of web2c}},
 keywords  = {{web2c, {\TeX} implementations, MS-DOS, djgpp}},
 abstract  = {{Web2c is getting popular and popular. Why? Because it is
	widespread. I'll discuss some of the aspects of the port to the
	MS-DOS environment. I used the variant on the 4all{\TeX}4 CD-ROM.}}
}

@article{maps:20-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{214-232}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{223kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst (1998)}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, registered, guru, tips, hints, hack, bugs}},
 abstract  = {{Dit is het vierde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe Vanoverbeke in
	de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van berichten uit de
	TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden tips over onderwerpen
	waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook alweer?'' In de MAPS van
	voorjaar 1997 stond deel 3. Voor deze aflevering is een aantal berichten
	gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1997 tot maart 1998.
	Tenzij anders is vermeld, zijn de onderstaande antwoorden van Piet van
	Oostrum. Omdat het wat bewerkelijk is om sommige trucs
	over te tikken, staat dit artikel ook op FGBBS.}}
}

@article{maps:20-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{233-234}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Bacho{\TeX}'98 — TUG at hand}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, GUST, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{A report on GUST's sixth conference in Bachotek, Poland}}
}

@article{maps:20-34,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{235-237}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{99kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{BLUe's OTR for notes: back-to-the-roots}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe, manmac, output routine, plain {\TeX}, preprints}},
 abstract  = {{The back-to-the-roots OTR for BLUE's notes is discussed. It
	consists of Plain {\TeX}'s OTR for 1-column and the compatible
	extension as given in the {\TeX}book for 2-columns. Only the
	pagebody differs: 2-columns instead of 1-column. This
	replacement is aimed at facilitating a personalized preprint
	OTR, such that BLUe can easily adapt it. The modified
	\verb|blue.tex| will be distributed by CTAN, and NTG's
	4All{\TeX} CD-ROM.}}
}

@article{maps:20-35,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{238-242}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Carlisle}},
 title     = {{The Oldenburg e{\TeX}/{\LaTeX}3/Con{\TeX}t meeting}},
 keywords  = {{e-{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}3, Con{\TeX}t, meeting}},
}

@article{maps:20-36,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{243-246}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{95kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Barbara Beeton, Thierry Bouche, Taco Hoekwater, Patrick Ion, Jörg Knappen, Chris Rowley, Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Summary of math font-related activities at Euro{\TeX} '98}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, math fonts, bof}},
}

@article{maps:20-37,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{247}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{94kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roger Kehr}},
 title     = {{Summary of indexing-related activities at Euro{\TeX} '98}},
 keywords  = {{xindy, Euro{\TeX}, bof}},
 abstract  = {{This is an adaptation of the ascii file posted to the xindy
	newsgroup by Roger Kehr in the week following Euro{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:20-38,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{248-263}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{221kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTS team, Peter Breitenlohner}},
 title     = {{The e-{\TeX} manual, version 2, februari 1998}},
 keywords  = {{e-{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The preparation of this report was supported in part by DANTE,
	Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung {\TeX} e.V. `{\TeX}' is a
	trademark of the American Mathematical Society.}}
}

@article{maps:20-39,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{264-275}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{657kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Generating Type 1 fonts from METAFONT Sources}},
 keywords  = {{METAFONT, PostScript, Type 1 fonts, conversion, metafog}},
 abstract  = {{This article makes a comparison between bitmapped and vector
	fonts, and presents some of the problems I encountered when I
	tried to convert METAFONT sources into PostScript Type 1 fonts.}}
}

@article{maps:20-40,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{276}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{78kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Simon Pepping}},
 title     = {{Vergelijking van SGML en XML}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, XML, comparison}},
 abstract  = {{Dit is een inleiding op de volgende bijlage}}
}

@article{maps:20-41,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{277-279}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{107kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{James Clark}},
 title     = {{Comparison of SGML and XML}},
 keywords  = {{SGML, XML, comparison}},
 abstract  = {{This document provides a detailed comparison of SGML (ISO 8879)
	and XML.}}
}

@article{maps:20-42,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{280-285}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{155kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Comparing Con{\TeX}t and {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, {\LaTeX}, comparison, copyright, size, speed, functionality}},
 abstract  = {{Some aspects of Con{\TeX}t and {\LaTeX} are compared: the
	political decisions, the offered functionality, size of the
	system, and relative speed.}}
}

@article{maps:20-43,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{286-289}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{105kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Pretty printing {\TeX} METAPOST, Perl and JavaScript}},
 keywords  = {{verbatim, METAPOST, Perl, JavaScript, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{Although for real pretty printing of sources one has to use CWEB
	like environments, {\TeX} can als do a pretty job rather
	well. The Con{\TeX}t verbatim environment has pretty printing
	built in. One can either use color or fonts. The latter is used
	in the MAPS, the former in this article.}}
}

@article{maps:20-44,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{290-296}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{933kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The Calculator Demo — Integrating {\TeX}, METAPOST, JavaScript and PDF}},
 keywords  = {{METAPOST, JavaScript, PDF, Con{\TeX}t, pdf{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Due to it's open character, {\TeX} can act as an authoring
	tool. This article demonstrates that by integrating {\TeX},
	METAPOST, JavaScript and PDF, one can build pretty advanced
	documents. More and more documents will get the characteristics
	of programs, and {\TeX} will be our main tool for producing
	them. The example described here can be produced with pdf{\TeX} as
	well as traditional {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:20-45,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{297-298}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Contending with Office suites}},
 keywords  = {{Windows, suites, wordprocessors, graphics, export, import, OLE, frogs}},
 abstract  = {{The author is tried beyond endurance by current Office software.}}
}

@article{maps:20-46,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{299-301}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{156kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol}},
 title     = {{4{\TeX}5.0: TDS, Web2c, and Windows 95/NT}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, Windows, beta preview}},
}

@article{maps:20-47,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{302-304}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{126kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Gilbert van den Dobbelsteen}},
 title     = {{Perl and {\TeX} a simple application}},
 keywords  = {{Perl, {\TeX}, application}},
 abstract  = {{A simple application where perl is used to extract data from
	log-files and create output using {\TeX}. The perl-scripts in
	this article run under perl 4.036 and should also run under
	perl 5.}}
}

@article{maps:20-48,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{305-310}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{110kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Some funny macro's}},
 keywords  = {{dropped caps, Con{\TeX}t, first line treatment}},
 abstract  = {{Sometimes documents can be enhanced with special typography for
	the first character or lines of chapters. In this article I
	present some macros for dropped caps and first line
	treatment. Although more advanced solutions are possible, the
	examples show at least how things work. Users can derive their
	own macros from them.}}
}

@article{maps:20-49,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{311-347}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{20}},
 size      = {{1150kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t — een handleiding}},
 keywords  = {{manual, beginner, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This is the second half of the Con{\TeX}t manual for
	beginners. Those who want an index and a quick reference guide,
	can dowload the complete manual from the NTG server. The layout
	is adapted to the MAPS layout.}}
}

@book{maps:21,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-84}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{3430kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 98.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:21-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Verslag 21ste ledenvergadering NTG}},
 abstract  = {{Opening; Notulen 20ste bijeenkomst; Verslag van de secretaris;
	Verslag penningmeester en kascontrolecommissie;
	Bestuursverkiezingen; Erelidmaadschap.}}
}

@article{maps:21-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de Voorzitter (1998/2)}},
}

@article{maps:21-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel (1998/2)}},
}

@article{maps:21-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{122kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Het Weten Waard}},
}

@article{maps:21-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{87kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Verslag 21ste bijeenkomst NTG}},
}

@article{maps:21-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{109kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden}},
 title     = {{De NTG en het Internet (1998/2)}},
 keywords  = {{discussionlist, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig,
	maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel
	wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan-
	en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens
	wordt een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige
	{\TeX}-gerelateerde lijsten.}}
}

@article{maps:21-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-12}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{316kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} User Groups around the world}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} user groups, addresses}},
}

@article{maps:21-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{13-19}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{176kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} in 2003: Part I}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, future, proposals}},
 abstract  = {{Propositions and conjectures on the future of {\TeX}. This
	article was presented at TUG'98 in Torun, Poland.}}
}

@article{maps:21-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{20-27}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{175kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG {\TeX} Future working group}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} in 2003: Part II}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, future, proposals, \special, standard}},
 abstract  = {{Proposal for a \verb|\special| standard. This
	article was presented at TUG'98 in Torun, Poland.}}
}

@article{maps:21-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{28-30}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{160kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox: let's keep things plain}},
 keywords  = {{plain {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, integrating, toolbox}},
 abstract  = {{This Toolbox follows the eclectic approach that most readers will
	know from previous ones. Without aiming to give a comprehensive
	oversight of the logic behind them, I present some plain
	{\TeX}-commands that can be used directly in {\LaTeX}. As the editors
	of this journal decided to make English the preferred language for
	contributions, this column is no longer in Dutch. However, as far as
	my limited command of the language allows, I will try to keep the
	tone informal and the discussion accessible to novice users.}}
}

@article{maps:21-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{31-34}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{128kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kaveh Bazargan, Philip Taylor}},
 title     = {{The 19th annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting}},
 keywords  = {{TUG conference, Torun, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{The 19th annual {\TeX} Users Group Meeting took place in Torun,
	Poland, in August of this year. The following is the impression
	of the authors who tried to attend all the talks. Unfortunately a
	couple of the talks were not attended by either of the authors.
	Apologies to those authors.}}
}

@article{maps:21-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35-39}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{210kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Parameterized data for tables in {\TeX} — Dynamics, aha!}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe, btable, code tables, data generation, dynamical markup, parameterization, tables, tail recursion}},
 abstract  = {{The issue of generating and using parameterized data for tables
	in {\TeX} is elaborated upon. The automatic insertion of markup
	along with the use of parameterized markup and the
	\verb|\btable| macro is not the issue, but are prerequisites.
	\verb|\btable|'s use, along with the automatic insertion of
	markup in the data as such, can be seen as tools, stepping
	stones, which made it possible to concentrate on pure data
	generation, or its use in typesetting tables by {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:21-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40-41}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{126kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Poor man's cyrillics on a Mac — {\TeX}ing English and Russian}},
 keywords  = {{cyrillics, MIME, Macintosh, pdf{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The typesetting in {\TeX} of English mixed with Russian is
	discussed for a Macintosh. Starting from the WNCY-fonts only a
	few extra control sequences have to be remembered for the
	keyboarding. The approach is suitable for all machines which
	have the WNCY-fonts. Email in cyrillics can be handled by
	formating via pdf{\TeX} and sending the .pdf file as attachment
	in a MIME message.}}
}

@article{maps:21-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{42-48}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{211kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Minimal markup — expansion in the gullet, aha!}},
 keywords  = {{BLUe, crosswords, expansion, fifo, look ahead, minimal markup, mouth processing, preprocessing, tables, tail recursion}},
 abstract  = {{A plea is made for a reappraisal of {\TeX}'s capabilities of
	expansion in the gullet of minimal marked up scripts into
	complete marked up scripts. Attention is focused on expansion
	of implicitly marked up table data by spaces and e-o-l-s into
	data separated by \verb|\cs| and \verb|\rs|, the abstract but explicit
	column and row separators, respectively. The ultimate aim is
	that the processing tool can't be distilled from the `marked up'
	script.}}
}

@article{maps:21-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-52}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{153kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Catching up — PDF and HTML at the heart}},
 keywords  = {{internet, HTML, multi-media, PDF, pdf{\TeX}, PostScript, WWW}},
 abstract  = {{New hardware not only urged me to get {\TeX} \& Co running
	again, in a richer environment, but I had also to catch up with
	developments since. Most noteworthy in relation with {\TeX} and
	documents, are the acceptance of the PDF exchange format and the
	HTML format, next to the realization of multi-media.}}
}

@article{maps:21-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{ne}},
 pages     = {{53-60}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{166kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ton Otten, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Eenheid in eenheden}},
 keywords  = {{SI-units, units, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{In order to support a consistent typography of units in
	technical documents the Con{\TeX}t module \verb|units| was
	developed. When this module is loaded all SI-units are
	available. Seldom used and/or complex units can be defined by
	the user with the command \verb|\unit[]{}{}|.}}
}

@article{maps:21-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-69}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{415kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sebastian Rahtz}},
 title     = {{The {\TeX} backend for Jade and the Jade{\TeX} macros}},
 keywords  = {{jade, jadetex, dsssl}},
 abstract  = {{Jade is an implementation of the DSSSL specification, and
	includes a {\TeX} backend; the Jade{\TeX} macro package is needed
	to process the Jade {\TeX} output. We describe how Jade and
	Jade{\TeX} work together.
	This article was written for the newsletter of the International
	SGML Users Group.}}
}

@article{maps:21-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{70-84}},
 year      = {{1998}},
 volume    = {{21}},
 size      = {{1013kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Thierry Bouche}},
 title     = {{Diversity in math fonts}},
 keywords  = {{math fonts, fontinst, MathTime, Lucida, mathptm, virtual fonts, math fonts, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{We will examine the issues raised when modifying (La){\TeX} fonts
	within math environments, and attempt to suggest effective means
	of accessing a larger variety of font options, while avoiding
	typographic nonsense.}}
}

@book{maps:22,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-176}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{3451kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 99.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:22-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Van de voorzitter}},
}

@article{maps:22-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:22-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{NTG and {\TeX} info}},
}

@article{maps:22-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Donald Knuth}},
 title     = {{Letter from Donald Knuth}},
 keywords  = {{NTG logo, FGBBS}},
}

@article{maps:22-05,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Bericht van voorheen FGBBS - Voorjaar 1999}},
 keywords  = {{FGBBS, geschiedenis}},
}

@article{maps:22-06,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden}},
 title     = {{De NTG en het Internet}},
 keywords  = {{NTG discussionlist, discussionlist, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig,
	maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel
	wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan-
	en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens
	wordt een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige
	{\TeX}-gerelateerde lijsten.}}
}

@article{maps:22-07,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{600kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Announcing Bacho{\TeX}'99}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}, GUST, conference, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:22-08,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{11}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{347kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Redaktie}},
 title     = {{TUG'98, Torun, Polen}},
}

@article{maps:22-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-31}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{79kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, guru, hints, hack, bugs}},
 abstract  = {{Dit is het vijfde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe
	Vanoverbeke in de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van
	berichten uit de TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden
	tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook
	alweer?'' In de MAPS van voorjaar 1998 stond deel 4. Voor deze
	aflevering is een aantal berichten gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1998
	tot januari 1999. Met dank aan Piet van Oostrum die opnieuw de meeste
	antwoorden aandroeg, en aan de andere actieve abonnees van TEX-NL!}}
}

@article{maps:22-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{32-36}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{PostScript Fonts op computers?}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, PostScript fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel geeft een korte inleiding in de interne
	werking van PostScript computer-fonts en hun coderingen.
	Dit artikel is een aanpassing van een serie slides
	die gepresenteerd werden op de NTG bijeenkomst
	van 22 oktober 1998 in Leuven.}}
}

@article{maps:22-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-42}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{How to install a Type1 font using fontinst}},
 keywords  = {{fontinst, Type 1 fonts, installation}},
 abstract  = {{In this brief tutorial I will describe how a PostScript Type 1 font
	can be made available to {\TeX} using the fontinst-utility (version
	1.8). I will not delve into the technical details of this program or
	the exact functionality of each of the font files used during this
	process, as those aspects of font-installation are described in
	other articles in this issue of MAPS. I will not delve into the
	advanced features of fontinst either, but rather will provide a
	hands-on tutorial.}}
}

@article{maps:22-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-51}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{80kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roland Kwee}},
 title     = {{Installing PostScript Fonts Under Unix/Linux}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, PostScript, Linux, Adobe, dvips, GhostScript}},
 abstract  = {{This article discusses practical issues for installing
	Adobe PostScript fonts for {\TeX} running on Unix/Linux.
	It also presents a script for automating the installation
	in order to install a package with over 200 fonts.
	As a useful side effect, the script creates a font data base
	and a font catalog to help the buyer/user of the font collection.}}
}

@article{maps:22-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-54}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{42kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{NFSS: using font families in {\LaTeX}2e}},
 keywords  = {{NFSS, font families, font attributes}},
 abstract  = {{This paper gives a brief overview of the {\LaTeX}2e NFSS
	font machinery and font definition files. It also gives examples of
	ad-hoc font changes with low-level NFSS commands.}}
}

@article{maps:22-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{55-76}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{237kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Fonts in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, fonts, encodings, typography}},
 abstract  = {{This article is the revised chapter 5 of the Con{\TeX}t
	reference manual, typeset in the MAPS layout. We will pay
	attention to all kind of font switching, fine tuning, and
	also provide some background information. Special attention
	is paid to the mapping of font names to files and some words
	are spent on encodings. This text is typeset in Lucida
	Bright but within the layout specification of the MAPS.}}
}

@article{maps:22-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{77-80}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{108kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hein Laan}},
 title     = {{De Euro in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{euro teken, euro fonts}},
}

@article{maps:22-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{81-88}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{164kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{A short introduction to font characteristics}},
 keywords  = {{typefaces, design, font classification}},
 abstract  = {{Almost anyone who develops an interest in fonts is bound
	to be overwelmed by the bewildering variety of letterforms
	available. The number of fonts available from commercial suppliers
	like Adobe, URW, LinoType and others runs into the
	thousands. A recent catalog issued by FontShop
	alone lists over 25.000 different varieties.
	And somehow, although the differences of the individual letters are
	hardly noticable, each font has its own character, its own
	personality. Even the atmosphere elucided by a text set from Adobe
	Garamond is noticably different from the atmosphere of the same text
	set from Stempel Garamond. Although decisions about the usage of
	fonts, will always remain in the realm of esthetics, some knowledge
	about font characteristics may nevertheless help to create some
	order and to find out why certain design decisions just do not
	work. The main aim of this paper is to provide such background by
	describing the main aspects that might be used to describe a font.}}
}

@article{maps:22-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{89-93}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{50kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Introducing Eetex}},
 keywords  = {{e-{\TeX}, ee{\TeX}, extensions, SGML}},
 abstract  = {{This article gives an introduction to eetex. Eetex is
	an extension to e-tex 2.0 that defines a collection of new
	primitives. Most of these deal with list data structures, but some
	other things are added as well.}}
}

@article{maps:22-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{94-114}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hàn Thê Thành, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The pdf{\TeX} users manual}},
 keywords  = {{pdf{\TeX}, manual}},
}

@article{maps:22-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{115-116}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}},
 title     = {{Introducing V{\TeX}/Linux}},
 keywords  = {{V{\TeX}, Linux, port, MicroPress}},
 abstract  = {{This document is a short introduction to V{\TeX} for Linux, a partial
	port of V{\TeX} that is free for non-commercial use. The most
	interesting feature of the compiler is the use of PDF
	as a backend instead of DVI.}}
}

@article{maps:22-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{117-122}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Michael Vulis}},
 title     = {{Introducing GeX}},
 keywords  = {{PDF, inline graphics, EPS inclusion, GeX, V{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This is a short introduction to the pilot release of GeX.
	GeX is the most rapidly evolving part of V{\TeX}; more detailed
	documentation is available in the distribution of V{\TeX}.
	This article specifically describes GeX as implemented in the public domain
	version of V{\TeX}/Linux. While the same or additional features may be available
	in the commercial Windows version, we describe what exists in the freely
	downloadable version. For information on downloading V{\TeX}/Linux see
	the NTG web site or the article in this MAPS issue.}}
}

@article{maps:22-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{123-126}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{82kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{4Spell, a spell-checker for Windows 95/98/NT}},
 keywords  = {{4spell, 4{\TeX}, spell checker}},
 abstract  = {{In this paper we will describe the features of 4Spell 1.1, a Windows
	spell-checker for {\TeX} documents. Since there aren't many good
	spell-checkers around and since 4Spell only works on Windows platforms, we
	will also explain how the spell-checking is done. This should make it
	possible to write a spell-checker for other platforms (why not use perl and
	become platform independent :-) 4Spell is part of the new 4{\TeX} for
	Windows (release expected by the end of March 1999). We realized, however,
	that this tool could be useful for people who do not want to use 4{\TeX} and
	hence we made it a stand-alone freeware program.}}
}

@article{maps:22-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{127-129}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{4Project: a project manager for {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{project management}},
 abstract  = {{A new project manager, 4Project, analyses your {\TeX} document and
	gives you easy access to any item in it.}}
}

@article{maps:22-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{130-135}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{85kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{How Perl can help {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Perl, mfpic, mkpic}},
 abstract  = {{Perl may be an easy interface to {\TeX} when it comes to repetitive
	tasks, like writing letters, creating reports from databases, and
	many more. This article shows how Perl can be used to generate many
	similar pictures via the \verb|mfpic| style}}
}

@article{maps:22-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{136-141}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Is {\TeX} Y2K-compliant?}},
 keywords  = {{millennium, Y2K}},
 abstract  = {{Will {\TeX} and related programs continue to work properly after
	the year 2000? This article describes how {\TeX} deals
	with dates and how this affects its behavior after the year 2000.}}
}

@article{maps:22-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{142-143}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Richard Müller}},
 title     = {{A Database for PPCH{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{PPCH{\TeX}, chemistry, structure formulas, databases}},
 abstract  = {{A database with PPCHTeX code would ease the work for
	those who have to draw chemical formulas only occasionally and have no
	time to become acquainted with it. But experts could also make use of
	it. The establishing of such a database is discussed and proposed.}}
}

@article{maps:22-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{144-147}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Berend de Boer}},
 title     = {{Beginnen met Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, tutorial}},
}

@article{maps:22-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{148-152}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{57kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Optimizing {\TeX} code}},
 keywords  = {{speeding up, format, optimizing code, e-{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{Macros can be collected in macro packages. These
	packages can be stored in a form that permits fast loading. Although
	{\TeX} is already pretty fast, for demanding applications it makes
	sense to speed up {\TeX} to the max. Switching to e-{\TeX} and beyond is
	one way to achieve this, another way can be found in optimizing the
	macro code by means of a dedicated program. Currently the combination
	of both can speed up {\TeX} runs by at least 10\%.}}
}

@article{maps:22-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{153-161}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Tabulating in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{tables, alignment, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the Con{\TeX}t tabulate environment,
	which can be used to typeset tables that are part of the
	text flow. This mechanism differs from the TaBlE based
	table mechanism, but recognizes the same preamble commands.
	It offers automatic width calculations when typesetting
	(multiple) paragraphs in tables and splits the tables over
	pages.}}
}

@article{maps:22-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{161}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{17kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Bug or Feature? — misleading font messages}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, error messages}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} error messages and warnings are not always that
	clear. Sometimes confusion is due to optimizations in {\TeX} the
	program. We will discuss the noty always honest \verb|\the\font|.}}
}

@article{maps:22-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{162-163}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{21kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kaveh Bazargan}},
 title     = {{Don't give authors the class files!}},
 keywords  = {{publishing}},
}

@article{maps:22-31,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{164-167}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{116kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Robin Williams over typografie — een dame geeft raad}},
 keywords  = {{typography, fonts, design, expert, book review}},
 abstract  = {{Tijdens de heuglijke NTG-dag in het vorstelijke Leuven vond ik op de
	boekentafel van Addison-Wesley twee leuk uitziende boeken over
	typografie en ontwerp. Mooie, knalgele boekjes die even onderhoudend als
	leerzaam bleken, geschreven door Robin Williams:
	\textit{The Non-designers's Type Book} en
	\textit{The Non-designers's Design Book}. Ik sla er één voor u open.}}
}

@article{maps:22-32,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{168-173}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{941kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Typography to a purpose}},
 keywords  = {{graphic design, typography}},
 abstract  = {{This paper shows some real-life examples of typography, some good,
	some not so good. We shall have a look at what is on the page and
	speculate about what the publisher or designer is trying to
	accomplish.}}
}

@article{maps:22-33,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{174-175}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{22}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Report on {\TeX}-Tagung Dante'99 in Dortmund}},
 keywords  = {{report, Dante, NTS, e-{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A report on Dante's 20th meeting which took place in
	Dortmund. The future of the NTS project and the e-{\TeX}
	project were hot issues that were discussed during this
	meeting.}}
}

@book{maps:23,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-116}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{5200kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 99.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:23-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{35kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:23-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG bestuur}},
 title     = {{NTG and {\TeX} info}},
}

@article{maps:23-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{De NTG en het Internet (1999/2)}},
 keywords  = {{discussionlist, TEX-NL}},
}

@article{maps:23-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-7}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{91kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} User Groups around the world}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} user groups, addresses}},
}

@article{maps:23-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{8-12}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{174kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{TUG'99, Vancouver}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} user groups, Vancouver, TUG conference}},
}

@article{maps:23-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-31}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{187kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, guru, hints, hack, bugs}},
 abstract  = {{Dit is het zesde deel uit een serie die in 1993 door Philippe
	Vanoverbeke in de MAPS is gestart. Philippe maakte een selectie van
	berichten uit de TEX-NL lijst. Een aantal oplossingen, hints en gouden
	tips over onderwerpen waarvan je weleens denkt: ``hoe zat dat ook
	alweer?'' In de MAPS van najaar 1998 stond deel 5. Voor deze
	aflevering is een aantal berichten gezeefd uit TEX-NL van maart 1999
	tot juli 1999.}}
}

@article{maps:23-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{32-47}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{123kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The NTG MAPS bibliography — from SGML to {\TeX} to PDF}},
 keywords  = {{CDROM, Con{\TeX}t, NTG, MAPS, PDF, SGML, XML}},
 abstract  = {{A few years ago, the NTG decided to put their MAPS volumes on the internet
	in the PDF file format. At about the same time, it was decided to build the
	associated bibliography in such a way that it could be used to produce both
	a HTML and PDF document.
	\\
	Recently, the MAPS bibliography has been converted to a proper XML
	document source. In the process, the descriptions were made as consistent as
	possible. The XML source was used as input for a PDF document, that
	provides extensive browse and search options. This PDF file, along with the
	MAPS articles, is provided to NTG members as an additional service.
	\\
	In this article the electronic NTG MAPS will be presented and the
	specific characteristics of the production process will be explained. Also,
	some of the complicating aspects will be discussed. I assume that the reader
	is familiar with SGML and {\TeX}. The focus will be on the interface between
	SGML, {\TeX} and PDF.}}
}

@article{maps:23-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{48-52}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{186kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wietse Dol, Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{4{\TeX} 5.0 for Windows and the 4all{\TeX} CDroms}},
 keywords  = {{4{\TeX}, 4all{\TeX}, Windows, software}},
 abstract  = {{Every year many software distributors launch a new
	version of their software products. They all tell you that there
	are fundamental improvements and bug fixes and that you
	have to upgrade immediately. With the release of edition 5 of
	4all{\TeX} you could ask yourself what this new edition offers as
	compared to e.g. the older versions of 4all{\TeX} and the {\TeX}-live
	CDrom. Below we will give a summary of all of the goodies of
	the new 4all{\TeX} distribution and give you pointers to the
	internet where you can find more information.}}
}

@article{maps:23-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-55}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{78kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox: the toolbox?}},
 keywords  = {{mail-merge, regular expressions, emacs, Excel, makefiles, toolbox}},
 abstract  = {{This MAPS is about the {\TeX} Toolbox, about other programs than {\TeX}
	itself. So this MAPS's toolbox should probably deal with this kind of
	material. As a consequence this toolbox is even more eclectic than
	earlier ones. First I will show you how I make mailings to
	NTG-members, by combining Excel and {\LaTeX}. Next I will present the
	most ugly regular expression I know of, and finally I will say
	something about using makefiles.}}
}

@article{maps:23-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{56-68}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{81kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Huygen}},
 title     = {{Maak een logo met behulp van literate programming}},
 keywords  = {{literate programming, WEB, Nuweb, logos}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt beschreven hoe de \textit{literate
	programming} techniek gebruikt kan worden om complexe
	taken uit te voeren en te documenteren. Als voorbeeld wordt een
	logo ontworpen met behulp van de gereedschappen AWK, pic{\TeX} en
	{\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:23-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{69-71}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Huygen}},
 title     = {{Zet tekst op een vaste plaats op een bladzijde}},
 keywords  = {{DTP, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel is beschreven hoe een {\LaTeX} probleem werd opgelost
	door het aan de {\TeX} kopstukken voor te leggen via de NTG mailing
	list. Het concrete {\LaTeX} probleem was het plaatsen van tekst op
	een vaste plaats op een bladzijde.}}
}

@article{maps:23-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{72-74}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{67kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roland Kwee}},
 title     = {{DTP with {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{programming, DTP, vertical mode}},
 abstract  = {{A set of simple macros is presented, in the style of
	modular programming, to make it easy to put texts at arbitrary
	positions on the page, without being restricted by formatting
	rules. This is not only useful for single-page documents like
	announcements and business cards, but also for designing
	stationery with letterheads or printing labels. The method is
	based on putting kerned texts in boxes with zero horizontal and
	vertical size and staying in vertical mode. This works with plain,
	and any other, {\TeX} and can be combined with any other document
	formatting.}}
}

@article{maps:23-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{75-76}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{30kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Het gebruik van KIX (tm) in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{KIX, font, barcode, PTT}},
 abstract  = {{Recentelijk introduceerde de Nederlandse PTT de
	zogenaamde KIX (tm)-code. Deze KlantIndex is een streepjescode die
	gebruikte wordt ten behoeve van de automatische verwerking van
	poststukken. In dit artikel laat ik zien hoe KIX met relatief
	weinig moeite gebruikt kan worden binnen {\TeX} en {\LaTeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:23-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-83}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{136kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{An Extended Maths Font Set for Processing MathML}},
 keywords  = {{math, fonts, PostScript, METAFONT}},
 abstract  = {{Last years autumn, work started on a new set of mathematical fonts
	that are intended to cover the full range of characters included in
	MathML as well as those included in the proposals for mathematical
	extensions in the next version of Unicode.\\
	This paper presents the
	first result of that work: A new Times-compatible maths font set
	consisting of about 1500 symbols and a few alphabets; along with a
	collection of {\TeX} macros to use them.\\
	These fonts are donated to the
	public domain by Kluwer Academic Publishers and are available in both
	METAFONT source and Adobe Type 1 formats.}}
}

@article{maps:23-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{84-89}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{338kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} as presentation tool — an introduction to the Con{\TeX}t presentation environments}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, presentation, slides, transparencies, PDF}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I will introduce a few styles I wrote on
	behalf of presentations. These styles are part of the Con{\TeX}t
	distribution and can serve as an example of defining layouts in
	this macro package. More details can be found in the documented
	styles.}}
}

@article{maps:23-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{90-102}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{175kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Typesetting flow charts — let {\TeX} and METAPOST do the job}},
 keywords  = {{flowcharts, graphics, charts, METAPOST, {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This article presents the Con{\TeX}t module that deals
	with flowcharts and related types of charts. The charts are drawn
	at run—time by METAPOST in close cooperation with {\TeX}. This not
	only gives us rather good graphics, but also provides a seamless
	integration of flow charts in documents, including hyperlink
	support and other fancy features.}}
}

@article{maps:23-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{103-107}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{3290kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{ASCII editors for {\TeX} on MS-Windows}},
 keywords  = {{ASCII editors, Windows, comparison}},
 abstract  = {{There are many good ASCII editor programs available for
	{\TeX}-users using MS-Windows. However, they all have there strong
	points and their weaknesses. In this article I will discuss a few
	of them.}}
}

@article{maps:23-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{108-112}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{96kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Using Emacs and Auc{\TeX} for preparing {\LaTeX} documents}},
 keywords  = {{emacs, Auc{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, {\TeX}, packages, editing}},
 abstract  = {{Users of {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} can be helped very much by
	an editor that knows about the specifics of these packages. For
	instance it can do syntax coloring so that the user sees
	immediately the difference between normal text and {\TeX} commands;
	it can insert skeletons for often used commands and environments
	in order to prevent missing elements (e.g. missing \end parts),
	etc.\\
	This article describes the use of the Emacs editing
	environment with the Auc{\TeX} package for the preparation of {\LaTeX}
	documents. The main characteristics of Emacs are discussed,
	followed by a more detailed description of the facilities that
	Auc{\TeX} offers to assist the author of {\LaTeX}
	documents. Finally we describe how Auc{\TeX} can be customized to
	support your own or external commands and {\LaTeX} packages.}}
}

@article{maps:23-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{112-116}},
 year      = {{1999}},
 volume    = {{23}},
 size      = {{133kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Tools for PostScript and PDF}},
 keywords  = {{PostScript, DSC comments, PDF, GhostScript, graphics, conversion, EPS inclusion, bounding box}},
 abstract  = {{This paper explains why PostScript is interesting for {\TeX}
	users, and describes various tools for working with
	PostScript, with special attention to GhostScript. The paper
	concludes with a section on PDF, the derivative of PostScript
	which is destined to take over much of the role of PostScript in
	the prepress workflow.}}
}

@book{maps:24,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-92}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{1236kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2000.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:24-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:24-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG bestuur}},
 title     = {{NTG- en {\TeX} Info}},
}

@article{maps:24-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-6}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Praten met drukkers — Een coproduktie van de MAPS-redaktie en het NTG-bestuur}},
 keywords  = {{drukkers, PostScript, DocuTech}},
 abstract  = {{Een beschrijving van de perikelen rondom het
	aanleveren van PostScript output aan een drukker.}}
}

@article{maps:24-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sven A. Bovin}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} met één toets vanuit vi}},
 keywords  = {{shell script, vi, {\LaTeX}, Unix}},
 abstract  = {{De ontstaansgeschiedenis van een shell script om vanuit vi
	met één toets {\LaTeX} op te roepen en,
	indien nodig, xdvi te starten voor het previewen.}}
}

@article{maps:24-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-11}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Building a {\TeX} installation for distribution}},
 keywords  = {{texmf tree, Windows, Linux, Perl, Configuration}},
 abstract  = {{At Kluwer Academic Publishers we use {\TeX} for typesetting journals.
	Since there are obvious advantages to using a standardized distribution,
	we provide our typesetters with one on CD. This article describes the
	principles of this setup.}}
}

@article{maps:24-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{12-26}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{464kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Thierry Bouche}},
 title     = {{Typesetting modern \& contemporary poetry with {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{poetry}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX}: a typesetting engine limited to scientific
	publishing? Where would be the fun?}}
}

@article{maps:24-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-37}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{168kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Yannis Haralambous, John Plaice}},
 title     = {{The Design and Use of a Multiple-Alphabet Font with Omega}},
 keywords  = {{Omega, Multiple-Alphabet Font, omlgc}},
 abstract  = {{The Omega project aims to offer open and flexible means
	for typesetting different scripts. By working at several
	different levels, it is possible to offer natural support
	for different languages and scripts, and strictly respect
	typographical traditions for each of them. This is
	illustrated with a large PostScript Type 1 font for the
	commonly used left-to-right non-cursive alphabets, called
	\verb|omlgc| (Omega Latin-Greek-Cyrillic). This
	font, which more than covers the Unicode sections
	pertaining to those alphabets, as well as those of IPA,
	Armenian, Georgian and Tifinagh (Berber), is
	built—virtually—out of smaller glyph banks. The Omega
	typesetting engine, based on that of {\TeX}, is used to
	print documents using this font. The characters can be
	accessed either directly, or through the use of filters,
	called Omega Typesetting Processes (OTPs), which
	are applied to the input stream.}}
}

@article{maps:24-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{38-40}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{60kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} in Polish}},
 keywords  = {{Polish, ogonek, input encoding}},
 abstract  = {{Writing in Polish with {\TeX} requires a few tricks. In
	Polish you need several accents that are often not
	available in `standard' fonts. Some {\TeX} macros can
	solve this problem more or less. We will show the pros
	and cons. Another `problem' is input encoding. One can
	use 8-bit input in combination with the corresponding
	codepage definition, or a 7-bit encoding with a few
	extras to make typing easier. Both methods will be
	discussed. This article reflects the content of a lecture
	held at the NTG meeting on 11 November 1999.}}
}

@article{maps:24-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-43}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{69kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox}},
 keywords  = {{make, texexec, PDF, EPS, math fonts, toolbox}},
 abstract  = {{This toolbox contains some varia. First I discuss some
	reactions on remarks I made in an earlier toolbox. Next,
	Hans Hagens \verb|texexec| is used in the following
	section to create EPS and PDF files
	from METAPOST source. Files created this way are often
	more usefull than the EPS files METAPOST itself
	creates. How to prepare a single source file for usage
	with both traditional {\TeX} and pdf{\TeX} is discussed
	next. I also show how easy it is to set up a font
	different from Computer Modern for typesetting simple
	mathematics, pay some attention to a failed attempt to
	install a TrueType font and present a small PostScript
	header file that can be used to produce watermarks.}}
}

@article{maps:24-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{44-45}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Making stand alone METAPOST graphics}},
 keywords  = {{METAPOST, PDF, pdf{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{When a METAPOST graphic uses fonts, the PostScript file
	is not self contained and hardly usable outside {\TeX}.
	One can however use {\TeX} itself, or actually pdf{\TeX},
	to create such a graphic. Although this method uses an
	Con{\TeX}t module, the solution provided here is
	independant of this macro package. The macros responsible
	for the process are collected in the file
	\verb|mptopdf.tex|.}}
}

@article{maps:24-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{46-48}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{52kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{Typesetting CD labels}},
 keywords  = {{CDROM labels, \parshape}},
 abstract  = {{Now that CD burners are becoming standard equipment in personal
	computers, there is a need for software to typeset CD labels.
	Of course, one can just squeeze a normal paragraph of text in the
	confines of a label, but it would be much more elegant to set the
	text to use all the available space. In this short article I will
	explain the macros that I wrote during a Christmas holiday, and
	that contain a few neat tricks.}}
}

@article{maps:24-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-51}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Victor Eijkhout}},
 title     = {{The ultimate loop macro}},
 keywords  = {{programming, loop macro}},
 abstract  = {{The plain {\TeX} format contains a \loop macro that has been a
	source of frustration and puzzlement to users ever since. Its
	syntax is somewhat strange, you have to insert an \if... condition
	in it but cannot use \else, and nested use of the macro runs into
	various problems. In this article I will describe my own improved
	loop macro, which I've called \repeat to prevent confusion.}}
}

@article{maps:24-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-53}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Annotating presentations}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, presentations}},
 abstract  = {{Today most presentations are enlightened by text shown on
	transparencies or using video beamers. This text is often
	rather limited in size. In this article I present a
	method of annotating pages that can be used with the
	Con{\TeX}t presentation styles.}}
}

@article{maps:24-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{54-57}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Postprocessing PDF files—an application of {\TeX}exec and pdf{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{PDF, postprocessing, texexec, pdf{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This article introduces some ways to manipulate PDF files
	using pdf{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t, and {\TeX}exec. The method
	described here can be used for arbitrary PDF input, given
	that it can be handled by pdf{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:24-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59-64}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{142kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael A. Guravage}},
 title     = {{Literate Programming}},
 keywords  = {{Literate Programming, Structured Programming, WEB}},
 abstract  = {{This article is a short introduction to the theory and
	practice of a programming style known as Literate
	Programming; a style that changes the focus of writing
	programs away from telling a computer what to do and
	toward explaining to a person what it is we are telling
	the computer to do. Literate Programming overcomes the
	limitations inherent in presenting traditionally
	structured program text. Using a balanced mix of informal
	and formal methods, literate programs are presented in a
	way suited for human understanding. Processing a
	literate program source results in both a nicely typeset
	document describing the parts of the program in an order
	that elucidates their design, and source code in an order
	in which it will compile.}}
}

@article{maps:24-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-92}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{24}},
 size      = {{80kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Berend de Boer}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} in proper Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, tutorial}},
 abstract  = {{If you are a {\LaTeX} user, switching to an entirely different
	macro-package is a very big step. Everything you put so much
	effort in to learn, doesn't work anymore. To help lessen the
	pain for users make the switch, this document shows short
	{\LaTeX} code snippets and how you do the same in Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@book{maps:25,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-124}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{1334kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Sven Bovin}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2000.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:25-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{31kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg, Sven Bovin}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:25-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-3}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{41kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX}2001 conference}},
 keywords  = {{Euro{\TeX}, conference}},
 abstract  = {{Announcement of the 12th European {\TeX} Conference, which will
	be held in Kerkrade in the Netherlands, from 23 to 27 September
	2001. The theme is ``{\TeX} and Meta: the Good, the Bad and the
	Ugly Bits''.}}
}

@article{maps:25-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{4-5}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{46kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden, Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{De NTG en het Internet}},
 keywords  = {{discussielijsten, TEX-NL}},
 abstract  = {{De NTG is niet alleen met webpagina's op het Internet aanwezig,
	maar ook middels een aantal discussielijsten. In dit artikel
	wordt kort aangegeven wat een discussielijst is, hoe je je aan-
	en afmeldt en wat je te wachten staat na aanmelding. Tevens wordt
	een overzicht gegeven van de in Nederland aanwezige {\TeX}-gerelateerde
	lijsten.}}
}

@article{maps:25-04,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{6-8}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach, Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} user groups around the world}},
 keywords  = {{user groups}},
 abstract  = {{A list of all {\TeX} user groups currently known to us.}}
}

@article{maps:25-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-12}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Nieuws van CTAN}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, packages, CTAN, proceedings}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit het
	CTAN archief. Het is de bedoeling om in elke MAPS zo'n artikel
	te plaatsen. Ik zal hierbij één of meer bijdragen
	wat uitvoeriger beschrijven en andere bijdragen kort noemen. De
	selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind en wat
	ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het is dus een
	persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig
	overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn ook geen
	handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een soort menukaart die de
	bedoeling heeft om de lezer te laten watertanden.}}
}

@article{maps:25-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{13-18}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Berend de Boer}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t en pdf{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, pdf(e)-{\TeX}, installatie, nieuws}},
 abstract  = {{In deze sectie zal het laatst bekende nieuws op het gebied van
	pdf{\TeX} en Con{\TeX}t aan de inner crowds worden ontfutseld. In
	deze eerste aflevering komt aan bod wat de laatste versies van
	pdf{\TeX} en Con{\TeX}t zijn. En tevens waar je ze kunt halen.
	En verder in iedere aflevering een Con{\TeX}t tip: vandaag over
	het produceren van A5 boekjes die op A4 worden afgedrukt.}}
}

@article{maps:25-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{19-55}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{180kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Gezeefd uit de TEX-NL discussielijst}},
 keywords  = {{TEX-NL, discussielijsten}},
 abstract  = {{This is part seven in a series of articles started in 1993 by
	Philippe Vanoverbeke. Philippe selected a number of messages
	from the TEX-NL mailing list which deserved to be remembered and
	lookup up by readers of MAPS. Solutions, hints and tips. MAPS of
	fall 1999 had part 5. This installment more or less covers
	august 1999 through july 2000. During a hectic year I had missed
	most messages and working through the backlog for this article
	provided me with a useful and time consuming opportunity to see
	what I would have missed otherwise. Questions and answers are
	marked in twins but sometimes a reply poses a new question, invoking
	one more answer, making for an instructive thread.
	As before, honorary member Piet van Oostrum, and also Hans Hagen
	are always helpful members of the list. To them and all the others
	feeding the list with their stimulating questions and helpful
	answers thanks!}}
}

@article{maps:25-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{56-71}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{137kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Gelderman}},
 title     = {{Toolbox: een syllabus}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, packages, praktijkvoorbeeld}},
 abstract  = {{In deze toolbox wordt een voorbeeld besproken van een redelijk
	omvangrijk {\LaTeX}-document. Het nut van de verschillende packages
	komt aan de orde en er wordt tevens besproken hoe de packages
	worden gebruikt in het document zelf en welke opties daarvoor in
	de preamble moeten worden opgenomen.}}
}

@article{maps:25-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{72-73}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{The {\TeX}Live CDROM}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX} Live, Unix}},
 abstract  = {{Recently all NTG members received the latest {\TeX}Live
	cdrom. This article describes a quick and efficient method of
	installing the content of the {\TeX} repository. Since you can
	download the latest cdrom image via the internet, you can also
	use this method for occasional updates.}}
}

@article{maps:25-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{74-78}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{pdf{\TeX}'s little secret}},
 keywords  = {{pdf, pdf{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t, em{\TeX}, specials, positioning}},
 abstract  = {{It is no secret that pdf{\TeX} introduces new primitives, but some
	of them are less known than others. In this article I will describe
	an example of the use of \pdfsavepos cum suis. We will investigate
	their usage by implementing a simple em{\TeX} specials simulator.}}
}

@article{maps:25-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{79-80}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{127kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Typesetting pdf annotations}},
 keywords  = {{pdf, fdf, annotations, pdf{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes how to use pdf{\TeX} to typeset
	annotations added to pdf documents. This method uses Con{\TeX}t
	but can be applied to any valid pdf document.}}
}

@article{maps:25-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{81-85}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{74kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Hanging punctuation, a pdf{\TeX} microtypographic extension}},
 keywords  = {{micro typography, margins, kerning, pdf{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{At the time of this writing, Hàn Thê Thành is
	writing his thesis, wherein he explains in great detail two
	extensions to {\TeX}'s typesetting engine. In this article we will
	explore marginal kerning, or character protruding. We will
	demonstrate the effects and introduce the new primitives, as well
	as explain how to enable this feature in Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@article{maps:25-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{86-102}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{672kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski, Janusz Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}},
 title     = {{Antykwa Półtawskiego: a parameterize outline font}},
 keywords  = {{Antykwa Półtawskiego, fonts, Type 1 fonts, METAFONT, METAPOST}},
 abstract  = {{The implementation of the Antykwa Półtawskiego font
	in METAPOST and its conversion to PostScript Type1 outline
	font.}}
}

@article{maps:25-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{103-113}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{95kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Santiago Muelas}},
 title     = {{A macro routine for writing text along a path in METAPOST}},
 keywords  = {{TXP, METAPOST, {\LaTeX}, METAGRAF, awk, {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{In this article we show a general macro written in \textit{pure
	METAPOST} for putting \textit{any} text using \textit{any}
	font over \textit{any} path. The routine will be explained in
	detail and some graphics will be included for clarifying
	purposes. Very special thanks are due to Maarten Gelderman who
	has made the final translation with the biggest care and
	interest.}}
}

@article{maps:25-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{114-124}},
 year      = {{2000}},
 volume    = {{25}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MetaFun, Chapter 3: Embedded graphics}},
 keywords  = {{METAPOST, MetaFun, Con{\TeX}t, graphics}},
 abstract  = {{This article is a nearly 100\% copy of chapter 3 of the MetaFun
	manual. This chapter discusses a few alternative ways to define
	and include METAPOST graphics in a document. This article contains
	some colors, so if you want to get the real picture, you should
	fetch the MetaFun manual from www.pragma-ade.com (beta manual
	download page). The MetaFun macros (METAPOST as well as {\TeX})
	are part of the regular Con{\TeX}t distribution.}}
}

@proceedings{maps:26,
 type      = {{proceedings}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-246}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{4502kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Simon Pepping}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2001.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS, Euro{\TeX}, proceedings}},
 abstract  = {{Euro{\TeX} proceedings}}
}

@article{maps:26-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-4}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{45kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Editorial}},
}

@article{maps:26-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{56kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{A note about the design of the Proceedings}},
}

@article{maps:26-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{7-17}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{130kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{David Antoš, Petr Sojka}},
 title     = {{Pattern Generation Revisited}},
 keywords  = {{patterns, Unicode, hyphenation, tagging, transformation, Omega, PatGen, PatLib, reimplementation, templates, C++}},
 abstract  = {{The program PatGen, being nearly twenty years old, doesn't suit today's
	needs: it is nearly impossible to make changes, as the program is highly
	optimised (like {\TeX}); it is limited to eight-bit encodings; it uses
	static data structures; reuse of the pattern technique and packed trie data
	structure for problems other than hyphenation (context dependent ligature
	handling, spell checking, Thai syllabification, etc) is cumbersome. Those
	and other reasons explained further in the paper led us to the decision to
	reimplement PatGen from scratch in an object-oriented manner (like NTS -
	New Typesetting System reimplementation of {\TeX}) and to create the PATtern
	LIBrary PatLib and the (hyphenation) pattern generator based on it. We
	argue that this general approach allows the code to be used in many
	applications in computer typesetting area, in addition to those of pattern
	recognition, which include various natural language processing, optical
	character recognition, and others.}}
}

@article{maps:26-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{18}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{S. Austin, D. Menshikov, Michael Vulis}},
 title     = {{Use of {\TeX} plugin technology for displaying of real-time weather and geographic information}},
 abstract  = {{In this article we show how by means of the GeX plugin technology one can process
	and display geographic information including real-time weather data as part of a
	{\TeX} to PDF compilation.}}
}

@article{maps:26-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-26}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Giuseppe Bilotta}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}lib: a {\TeX} reimplementation in library form}},
 abstract  = {{I first came across the need for a {\TeX} in library form when I was thinking about
	developing a graphical real-time front-end to {\TeX} (the {\TeX}Perfect project,
	more info at texperfect.sourceforge.net). A quick survey (on the
	comp.text.tex newsgroup) showed that other projects could have benefited from a
	library providing {\TeX} typesetting capabilities, and I thus decided to develop {\TeX}lib
	as a separate project from {\TeX}Perfect. A `call for developers' on the same newsgroup
	provided the project with developers/consultants/helpers.}}
}

@article{maps:26-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-39}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{130kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Berend de Boer}},
 title     = {{From database to presentation via XML, XSLT and Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{Much data exists only in databases. A familiar example is an address list. Every once
	in a while this data must be presented to humans. To continue with the address list
	example, annually an address list must be printed and mailed.
	In this article I attempt to given an exhaustive overview of going from structured
	data through Con{\TeX}t to output.}}
}

@article{maps:26-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Tobias Burnus}},
 title     = {{Usage of MathML for paper and web publishing}},
 abstract  = {{The Mathematical Meta Language (MathML) oft he World Wide Web Consortium
	(W3C) based on XML has gained more support in the last months. Looking at
	the W3C's list ofsof tware which supports MathML one sees that the number of
	applications which can produce MathML is rather long, but the list of applications
	supporting typesetting of MathML is rather short.}}
}

@article{maps:26-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-48}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{324kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{J. Chlebíková, J. Guričan, M. Nagy, I. Odrobina}},
 title     = {{The Euromath System — a structured XML editor and browser}},
 keywords  = {{structured editing, {\TeX}, XML}},
 abstract  = {{The Euromath System is an XML WYSIWYG structured editor and
	browser with the possibility of {\TeX} input/output. It was developed within the
	Euromath Project and funded through the SCIENCE programme of the European
	Commission. Originally, the core of the Euromath System was based on the
	commercial SGML structured editor Grif. At present, the Euromath System is in the
	final stage of re-implementation based upon the public domain structured editor Thot
	and XML. During the re-implementation process several principal differences between
	the basic features of Thot and the basic purposes of the Euromath System had to be
	resolved.}}
}

@article{maps:26-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-58}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{123kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jonathan Fine}},
 title     = {{Instant Preview and the {\TeX} daemon}},
 abstract  = {{Instant Preview is a new package, for use with Emacs and xdvi, that allows the user
	to preview instantly the file being edited. At normal typing speed, and on a 225MHz
	machine, it refreshes the preview screen with every keystroke.
	Instant Preview uses a new program, dvichop, that allows {\TeX} to process small files
	over 20 times quicker than usual. It avoids the overhead of starting {\TeX}. This
	combination of {\TeX} and dvichop is the {\TeX} daemon.
	One instance of the {\TeX} daemon can serve many programs. It can make {\TeX} available
	as a callable function. It can be used as the formatting engine of a WYSIWYG editor.
	This talk will demonstrate Instant Preview, describe its implementation, discuss its
	use with {\LaTeX}, sketch the architecture of a WYSIWYG {\TeX}, and call for volunteers
	to take the project forward.}}
}

@article{maps:26-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} and/or xml: good, bad and/or ugly}},
 abstract  = {{As a typesetting engine, {\TeX} can work pretty well with structured input.
	One can build interfaces that are reasonably well to work with and code in. XML on
	the other hand is purely meant for coding, and the more rigorous scheme prevents
	errors and makes reuse easy. Contrary to {\TeX}, xml is not equivalent to typesetting,
	although there are tools (and methods) to easily convert the code into other stuctured
	code (like HTML) that then can be handled by rendering engines. Should we abandon
	coding in {\TeX} in favor of xml? Should we abandon typesetting using {\TeX} in favor of
	real time rendering of relatively simple layout designs? Who are the good and bad
	guys in that world? And even more importantly: to what extent will document design
	(and style design) really change?}}
}

@article{maps:26-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{60}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Top Publishing: an overview}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} is used for producing a broad range of documents: articles, journals,
	books, and anything you can think of. When {\TeX} came around, it was no big deal to
	beat most of those day's typesetting programs. But how well does {\TeX} compete today
	with mainstream Desk Top Publishing programs?
	What directions will publishing take and what role can {\TeX} play in the field of
	typesetting? What are today's publishing demands, what are the strong and what are
	the weak points of good old {\TeX}, and what can and should we expect from the
	successors of {\TeX}?}}
}

@article{maps:26-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-73}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{93kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t Publication Module, the user documentation}},
 abstract  = {{This module takes care of references to publications and the typesetting of publication
	lists, as well as providing an interface between Bib{\TeX} and Con{\TeX}t.
	This is a preliminary version; changes may be needed or wanted in the near
	future. In particular, there are some minor issues with the multi-lingual interface that
	need to be solved.}}
}

@article{maps:26-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{74-94}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{224kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}},
 title     = {{mlbib{\TeX}: a New Implementation of bib{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Bibliographies, multilingual features, {\LaTeX}, bib{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This paper describes mlbib{\TeX}, a new implementation of bib{\TeX} with
	multilingual features. We show how to use it as profitably as possible, and go
	thoroughly into compatibility between bib{\TeX}s current implementation and ours.
	Besides, the precise grammar of mlbibtex is given as an annex.}}
}

@article{maps:26-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{95-110}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski, Krzysztof Leszczyński}},
 title     = {{Special fonts}},
 keywords  = {{cmdfont, special commands, METAPOST, fonts, postscript}},
 abstract  = {{We propose the use of a special pseudofont as an enhancement
	(in a sense) of the \special instruction. The examples of the implementation show
	that the technique applied here would prove to be extremely useful,
	especially with METAPOST.}}
}

@article{maps:26-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{111-119}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{221kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski, Janusz M. Nowacki, Piotr Strzelczyk}},
 title     = {{MetaType1: a METAPOST-based engine for generating Type 1 fonts}},
 keywords  = {{outline fonts, scalable fonts, parameterized fonts, Type 1 fonts, METAFONT, METAPOST}},
 abstract  = {{A package for preparing parameterized outline fonts in PostScript Type 1
	format is described. The package makes use of METAPOST, awk, and
	T1utils, therefore is supposed to be easily portable to various computer platforms.
	Its beta version along with a sample font (Knuth's logo font)
	is available from: ftp://bop.eps.gda.pl/pub/metatype1}}
}

@article{maps:26-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{120-129}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{144kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michal Marvan}},
 title     = {{Natural {\TeX} Notation in Mathematics}},
 keywords  = {{natural mathematical notation}},
 abstract  = {{In this paper we introduce Nath, a {\LaTeX} 2.09/2e style
	implementing a natural {\TeX} notation for mathematics.}}
}

@article{maps:26-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{130-140}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Moortgat, Richard Moot, Dick Oehrle}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} in teaching}},
 abstract  = {{A well-known slogan in language technology is `parsing-as-deduction':
	syntax and meaning analysis of a text takes the form of a mathematical proof.
	Developers of language technology (and students of computational linguistics) want to
	visualize these mathematical objects in a variety of formats.
	We discuss a language engineering environment for computational grammars. The
	kernel is a theorem prover, implemented in the logic-programming language Prolog.
	The kernel produces {\LaTeX} source code for its internal computations. The front-end
	displays these in a number of user-defined typeset formats. Local interaction with the
	kernel is via a tcl/tk GUI. Alternatively, one can call the kernel remotely from dynamic
	PDF documents, using the form features of Sebastian Rahtz' hyperref package.}}
}

@article{maps:26-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{141-145}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Janusz Marian Nowacki}},
 title     = {{Poligraf: from {\TeX} to printing house}},
 abstract  = {{The macro package Poligraf was for the first time presented at the Polish {\TeX}
	Users' Group meeting `Bacho{\TeX}'96'. Users' suggestions and remarks have been
	taken into account leading to this new, completely re-worked version.}}
}

@article{maps:26-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{146-150}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{70kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Simon Pepping}},
 title     = {{Extending Ex{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{ex{\TeX}, DSSSL, file location, extension of ex{\TeX}, primitives in ex{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{What can be done after the completion of Ex{\TeX}? I describe a dream,
	some results, and some further ideas.}}
}

@article{maps:26-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{151-161}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{157kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Fabrice Popineau}},
 title     = {{Directions for the {\TeX}Live system}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Live, web2c}},
 abstract  = {{This paper is about the current status of the {\TeX}Live software.
	The first part of the paper will address the structured description of its content and
	how the Windows 1 setup program can use it. The past experiments with the
	Windows installer have revealed that the problem was harder than expected. The new
	{\TeX}Live 6 description files will allow a more effective way to use the setup program.
	Some further enhancements are even scheduled.
	The second part of the paper will address a set of possible extensions to the
	Web2C/Kpathsea pair (read it as a call for code contributions!). Some aspects of its
	use were not foreseen when it was devised and it may be time for an enhancement.}}
}

@article{maps:26-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{162-172}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{144kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Pedro Quaresma}},
 title     = {{DCpic, Commutative Diagrams in a (La){\TeX} Document}},
 keywords  = {{Communicative diagrams, {\LaTeX}, {\TeX}, pic{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{DCpic is a package of {\TeX} macros for graphing Commutative Diagrams
	in a (La){\TeX} or Con{\TeX}t document. Its distinguishing features are: the use of
	PIC{\TeX} a powerful graphical engine, and a simple specification syntax. A commutative
	diagram is described in terms of its objects and its arrows. The objects are textual
	elements and the arrows can have various straight or curved forms.
	We describe the syntaxand semantics of the user's commands, and present many
	examples of their use.}}
}

@article{maps:26-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{173}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Martin Schröder}},
 title     = {{Using pdf{\TeX} in a PDF-based imposition tool}},
 abstract  = {{pdf{\TeX} has been used successfully to build an industrial-strength PDF-based imposition
	tool. This paper/talk describes the pitfalls we encountered and the lessons
	learned.}}
}

@article{maps:26-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{174-186}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{111kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Laurent Siebenmann}},
 title     = {{ASCII-Cyrillic and its converter email-ru.tex}},
 abstract  = {{A new faithful ASCII representation for Russian called ASCII-Cyrillic is presented
	here, one which permits accurate typing and reading of Russian where no Russian
	keyboard or font is available — as often occurs outside of Russia.
	ASCII-Cyrillic serves the Russian and Ukrainian languages in parallel. This article
	initially discusses Russian; but, further along, come the modifications needed to adapt
	to the Ukrainian alphabet.}}
}

@article{maps:26-24,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{187}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel Skoupy}},
 title     = {{A Tour around the NTS implementation}},
 keywords  = {{NTS, Java, extension}},
 abstract  = {{NTS is a modular object-oriented reimplementation of {\TeX} written in
	Java. This document is a summary of a presentation which shows the path along
	which the characters and constructions present in the input file pass through the
	machinery of the program and get typeset. Along the way the key classes and concepts
	of NTS are visited, the differences with original {\TeX} are explained and the good points
	where to dig into the system are proposed.}}
}

@article{maps:26-25,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{188-191}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Igor Strokov}},
 title     = {{Visual {\TeX}: {\TeX}lite}},
 keywords  = {{visual, {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A prototype of a visual {\TeX} is implemented by means of minor
	modifications of canonical {\TeX}. The changes include the ability to start compilation
	from an arbitrary page, fast paragraph reformatting, and retaining the origin of visual
	elements. The new features provide direct editing of the document preview and correct
	markup of the source text.}}
}

@article{maps:26-26,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{192-206}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{162kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Péter Szabó}},
 title     = {{Conversion of {\TeX} fonts into Type 1 format}},
 keywords  = {{PDF, font conversion, Type 1 fonts, METAFONT, vector, outline, raster, bitmap, pdf{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{This paper analyses the problem of converting {\TeX} fonts to Type 1 fonts,
	describes {\TeX}trace, a new free conversion program, and compares it to other possible
	methods and existing utilities. {\TeX}trace works by rendering the font in high
	resolution and then tracing (vectorizing) it.}}
}

@article{maps:26-27,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{207-216}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{120kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Math typesetting in {\TeX}: The good, the bad, the ugly}},
 keywords  = {{math typesetting, math fonts, symbol fonts, font metrics, font encodings}},
 abstract  = {{Taking the conference motto as a theme, this papers examines the good,
	the bad, and the ugly bits of {\TeX}'s math typesetting engine and the related topic of
	math fonts. Unlike previous discussions of math fonts, which have often focussed on
	glyph sets and font encodings, this paper concentrates on the technical requirements
	for math fonts, trying to clarify what makes implementing math fonts so difficult and
	what could or should be done about it.}}
}

@article{maps:26-28,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{217-218}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Wackers}},
 title     = {{Typography and production of manuscripts and incunabula}},
 keywords  = {{typography, manuscript, incunabulum}},
 abstract  = {{This paper describes how the modern type of books slowly came into
	existence during the middle ages. The first printers modeled their products on these
	handwritten books but needed — in time — some adjustments because of the differences
	in production between a manuscript and a printed book and because of the differences
	between producing for a patron or for an anonymous mass market.}}
}

@article{maps:26-29,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{219-243}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{505kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Włodek Bzyl}},
 title     = {{Reintroducing type 3 fonts to the world of {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Nowadays, a great number of documents are produced every day.
	Many authors would like their documents to stand out from the
	rest not only by content but also by typographic design. For this
	purpose one may use decorative letters, ornaments, dingbats
	and special fonts. If each document would have to look different
	from all the others a great many fonts and font deviations are
	needed. This could be achieved by combining the METAPOST
	language with the type 3 font format. This new font creation
	technology enables users endless single-use-only variations in
	weight and width, style and size, and in color. A new level of
	control over the embellishment level off onts in documents is
	thereby achieved.}}
}

@article{maps:26-30,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{244-245}},
 year      = {{2001}},
 volume    = {{26}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{Literate Programming, not just another pretty face}},
 abstract  = {{The structure of a software program may be thought of as a `web' that
	is made of many interconnected pieces. To document such a program, we want to
	explain each individual part of the web and how it relates to its neighbors. D.E.K.}}
}

@book{maps:27,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{NL/EN}},
 pages     = {{1-119}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{3635kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2002.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:27-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{45kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:27-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{2-5}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{60kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} gebruikersgroepen}},
 keywords  = {{gebruikersgroepen, user groups}},
 abstract  = {{Een overzicht van alle ons bekende {\TeX} gebruikersgroepen met
	bijbehorende contactgegevens.}}
}

@article{maps:27-03,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{6}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{43kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jules van Weerden}},
 title     = {{Agenda}},
}

@article{maps:27-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{7-9}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{62kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, Packages, CTAN, Type 1 fonts, fonts, PDF, pstricks, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit
	het CTAN archief. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf
	interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant
	is. Het is dus wel een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de
	bedoeling om een volledig overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere
	bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een
	soort menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer te laten
	watertanden.}}
}

@article{maps:27-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-12}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{93kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Patenten, copyright en 'intellectual property'}},
 keywords  = {{Software patenten, WIPO, EPO, standaarden, Europa}},
 abstract  = {{In dit stuk wordt aandacht gevraagd voor software patenten en
	andere aanslagen op onze elektronische vrijheid.}}
}

@article{maps:27-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{13}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{601kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Donald Knuth}},
 title     = {{Letter from Knuth}},
 keywords  = {{Letter}},
 abstract  = {{A facsimile copy of a letter by Donald E. Knuth to Siep Kroonenberg
	about the Euro{\TeX}2002 proceedings. In the letter, dated 26
	November 2001, Donald E. Knuth congratulates Siep Kroonenberg on
	the "most beautiful design and production of the Euro{\TeX}2001
	proceedings." He further describes how both he and Mrs. Knuth
	love its look and feel. The letter is hand written with a pencil
	on the personal stationery (Donald E. Knuth, Professor Emeritus
	of The Art of Computer Programming) of the Stanford University in
	Stanford, California. Although the actual text of the letter is
	somewhat more concise than this abstract, it is a must-see for
	any {\TeX} user.}}
}

@article{maps:27-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-19}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Patrick Gundlach}},
 title     = {{Meta-Euro}},
 keywords  = {{Euro symbol, MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{How to create the Euro symbol in Metapost.}}
}

@article{maps:27-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{20-22}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{54kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The euro symbol}},
 keywords  = {{Euro symbol, MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{When Patrick Grundlach posted a nice MetaPost version of the euro
	symbol to the Con{\TeX}t discussion list, he added the comment
	"The official construction is ambigious: how thick are the
	horizontal bars? How much do they stick out to the left? Is this
	thing a circle or what? Are the angles on the left side of the
	bars the same as the one on the right side? ..." The alternative
	below is probably not as official as his, but permits a finetuning.
	You are warned: whatever you try, the euro is and will remain an
	ugly symbol.}}
}

@article{maps:27-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{23-28}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{135kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}},
 title     = {{Doing it my way: a lone {\TeX}er in the real world}},
 abstract  = {{While a world-renowned standard in many academic fields,
	Don Knuth's much acclaimed typesetting system is almost unknown
	in most parts of the real world, where many a document designer
	has achieved professional success without ever hearing (let alone
	pronouncing) the word `{\TeX}'. Outside academia, the lone {\TeX}er
	faces not only compatibility headaches, but also outright
	incomprehension from his customers, colleagues, or competitors:
	why would anyone want to use {\TeX} to produce memos, two-color
	newsletters, full-color brochures, overhead transparencies, and
	other items — in short, anything but books that contain a lot of
	mathematics? As a consultant in professional communication, I
	have been using {\TeX} for all documents I have produced for my
	clients and for myself during the last ten years or so. Though it
	has turned out to be most successful, this approach is seen by
	most as a mere idiosyncrasy. And yet, the systematic use of my
	own {\TeX} and PostScript programming gives me three unequalled
	advantages over using off-the-shelf software: I travel light, I
	can go anywhere I please, and I guarantee I'll get there.}}
}

@article{maps:27-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{29-35}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{407kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Luc Doumont}},
 title     = {{Drawing effective (and beautiful) graphs with {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A standard approach to producing documents that include
	illustrations consists in typesetting text with specialized
	typesetting software (such as {\TeX}) and inserting illustrations
	created with different, equally specialized software. To better
	integrate the illustrations into the typeset page, it would be
	nice to be able to produce or modify them directly with the
	typesetting software. Drawing graphs with {\TeX}, for example,
	would allow one to set them \hsize wide and 0.75\hsize high,
	position labels exactly \baselineskip below the horizontal axis,
	and, especially, typeset all annotations with the same fonts,
	sizes, and mathematical beauty as the rest of the document. The
	hybrid {\TeX} and PostScript macros presented in this paper take
	advantage of {\TeX}'s power to graph and annotate data sets in a
	variety of ways in order to produce effective, beautiful,
	well-integrated graphs. They use {\TeX} to draw all horizontal and
	vertical lines (axes, tick marks, grid lines) and set all
	annotations, and PostScript to draw the data, as markers, lines,
	and areas. While fairly simple, they have been successfully
	harnessed to appear in a wide range of real-life applications, up
	to logarithmic graphs and (with some patience) complex multipanel
	displays. Of course, the macros are a tool for drawing final
	graphs rather than exploring or transforming data sets.}}
}

@article{maps:27-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{36-40}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{477kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Ton Otten}},
 title     = {{Figures}},
 abstract  = {{Within the {\TeX} community there is a widely used database for
	bibliographic references, BIB-{\TeX}, but not for figures. To
	manage figures Con{\TeX}t now supports a figures database. The
	database is setup in XML and converted to an interactive PDF
	figure library featuring ordered displays and a search mechanism.
	From the library, figures can be included easily in Con{\TeX}t
	documents as long as both the PDF and the XML files remain present.}}
}

@article{maps:27-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{41-44}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{258kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ernst van der Storm}},
 title     = {{DTP'en met {\LaTeX}, gebruik en adviezen}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, 4all{\TeX}, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{Verslag van het gebruik van {\LaTeX} voor DTP-doeleinden, met
	enkele eenvoudige macro's en het integreren van plaatjes: een
	beschrijving aan de hand van de praktijk.}}
}

@article{maps:27-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{45-50}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{419kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel Wesseling, Gertrude van der Sar, Jos Settels}},
 title     = {{From PC-Write to Con{\TeX}t easy speedy beauty}},
 keywords  = {{non-guru, 4{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{A tale of more than 10 years of joy and struggle with {\TeX}
	followed by a period of bliss, of easy to use tools, quickly
	obtained results and incredible possibilities from the coming of
	4TeX and Con{\TeX}t, narrated by non-gurus.}}
}

@article{maps:27-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{51-55}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{65kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel Wesseling}},
 title     = {{A do-it-yourself thebibliography in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{non-guru, {\LaTeX}, Con{\TeX}t, bibliography, citation command}},
 abstract  = {{Moving from {\LaTeX} to Con{\TeX}t is not really simple but to
	return from Con{\TeX}t to {\LaTeX} would have been equally hard
	were it not for a publication by Berend de Boer in MAPS 24 explaining
	how to do {\LaTeX} things in Con{\TeX}t. Only one thing was missing, a
	do-it-yourself thebibliography. Hans Hagen had a solution which is
	described below.}}
}

@article{maps:27-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{56-59}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{167kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} voor thuis}},
 abstract  = {{Dit verhaal richt zich tot mensen die op hun eigen machine {\TeX}
	aan de praat willen krijgen, zonder hulp van een systeembeheerder
	of guru-vriendje.}}
}

@article{maps:27-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{60-61}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{308kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Mac OS X als {\TeX} platform}},
 keywords  = {{Macintosh, Mac OS X, {\TeX}Shop}},
 abstract  = {{Nu het Macintosh platform tot Unix is bekeerd en ingebouwde
	ondersteuning heeft voor pdf, bezit de Mac hele goede papieren
	als een platform voor {\TeX}. Het programma {\TeX}Shop is hiervan
	het bewijs.}}
}

@article{maps:27-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{62-65}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{77kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Configuration}},
 keywords  = {{texmf trees, configuration, environment variables, file searching}},
 abstract  = {{Texmf trees can make a {\TeX} installation more maintainable. With
	creative use of environment variables, it is possible to run
	different versions and different configurations in different
	xterm or console windows.}}
}

@article{maps:27-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{66-119}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{27}},
 size      = {{208kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MathML}},
 keywords  = {{MathML, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{Typesetting math in MathML using Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@book{maps:28,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-85}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{1610kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2002.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:28-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Johannes Braams}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:28-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-4}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{110kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{De NTG Flyer}},
 keywords  = {{NTG Flyer}},
}

@article{maps:28-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-7}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Nieuws van CTAN — Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, packages, CTAN, classes, memoir, KOMA script, soul, underline, ulem, mathpazo, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit
	het CTAN archief. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf
	interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen
	interessant is. Het is dus wel een persoonlijke keuze. Het
	heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig overzicht te geven.
	De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen.
	Beschouw het maar als een soort menukaart die de bedoeling
	heeft om de lezer nieuwsgierig te laten worden.}}
}

@article{maps:28-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{10-13}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{TUG 2002, Thiruvananthapuram}},
}

@article{maps:28-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-19}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{230kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maps Editors, Patrick Gundlach}},
 title     = {{meta-euro (erratum)}},
 keywords  = {{Euro symbol, MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{How to create the Euro symbol in Metapost. Corrected
	reprint of this article in Maps 27.}}
}

@article{maps:28-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{20-24}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maps Editors, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MathML Correction}},
 keywords  = {{MathML, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{Typesetting math in MathML using Con{\TeX}t. Corrected pages
	of this article from Maps 27.}}
}

@article{maps:28-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-26}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Fonts for the MAPS}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, texnansi encoding, virtual fonts, reencoding}},
}

@article{maps:28-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{19kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t System Documentation}},
 keywords  = {{macro programming, Con{\TeX}t, api, general, documentation}},
 abstract  = {{A new website exists that contains documentation for the
	lower-level Con{\TeX}t macros. The URL for this website is
	tex.aanhet.net/context. This website also contains
	a full mirror of the pragma-ade website.}}
}

@article{maps:28-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{28-35}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Wisse}},
 title     = {{Hacking {\TeX}4ht for XML Output — The Road towards a {\TeX} to Word Convertor}},
 abstract  = {{This article explains how the author employs the {\TeX}4ht
	convertor to manage multiple format (XML and PDF)
	output from a single Latex source by writing a {\TeX}4ht
	configuration file and a Latex class file. Furthermore,
	it is explained how {\TeX}4ht and the new OpenOffice package
	can be used to create a new Latex to MS Word convertor.}}
}

@article{maps:28-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{36-52}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{114kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel H Wesseling, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}Exec User's Guide}},
 abstract  = {{This guide describes the uses and options of the texexec
	program that is available in the Con{\TeX}t distribution. The
	options are invoked by calls on a command line, which are
	words preceded by two hyphens as in —make. There are
	options for running Con{\TeX}t on your {\TeX} file to produce
	printable output, options to specify languages, an option
	to make listings of (software program) files word for word,
	options for conditional execution, for selecting pages
	to print, for printing on differently sized paper, for
	directing your output to a particular file, for conversion
	of SGML and XML to {\TeX}. If it is no problem to you to use
	a command line and to occasionally look things up in the
	help file or in this user s guide, you will find texexec
	to be a useful, even indispensable tool for Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@article{maps:28-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-58}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{40kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{The ctable package for use with {\LaTeX}2e}},
 abstract  = {{The ctable package lets you easily typeset centered,
	captioned table and figure floats with optional
	footnotes. Both caption and footnotes will be forced within
	the width of the table.}}
}

@article{maps:28-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59-64}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{mk — a {\LaTeX} maker}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, make, perl script}},
 abstract  = {{mk is a Perl script that, in close collaboration with
	vpp is helpful in the cyclic process of editing, viewing,
	and printing a latex document.}}
}

@article{maps:28-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-68}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{vpp — View and (selectively) Print PDF and PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{view, print, PDF, PostScript}},
 abstract  = {{vpp displays a PDF document or a PostScript document
	(after conversion to pdf) using gv, xpdf, or acrobat
	reader (in that order of choice), or perhaps another pdf
	viewer. One can use the viewer to print the document but,
	alternatively, leave the viewer and use vpp's facilities
	to print selected pages to a one- or two-sided hardcopy
	or an A5-booklet.}}
}

@article{maps:28-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-72}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Karel H Wesseling}},
 title     = {{Shifted bullets in graphs with MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{With MetaPost fully integrated in Con{\TeX}t using this
	graphic language has become convenient. When we tried to
	use John Hobby's `graph.mp' package, however, it turned
	out to require extra initializations and to produce
	unacceptable, shifted data graphs. Solutions to both
	problems are given.}}
}

@article{maps:28-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{73-79}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{228kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel H Wesseling}},
 title     = {{A letterhead in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{non-guru, Con{\TeX}t, MetaPost, layers, mode command}},
 abstract  = {{For years I have used a home-made logo in Pictex
	within {\LaTeX}, together with name and address as
	letterhead. Separate versions for myself and my wife were
	pre-printed on an HP 300 DPI Laserjet. With MetaPost fully
	integrated in Con{\TeX}t, we decided to convert to MetaPost
	and print the letterhead with each letter automatically. I
	used the versatile Con{\TeX}t layer mechanism and the mode
	option.}}
}

@article{maps:28-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{80-85}},
 year      = {{2002}},
 volume    = {{28}},
 size      = {{230kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Fabrice Popineau}},
 title     = {{Practical MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{In this article, I will explain how to practically use
	MetaPost. This program is very different from usual
	drawing programs, but it fits very well in a {\TeX} based
	typesetting system.}}
}

@book{maps:29,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-161}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{6080kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2003.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:29-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{75kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:29-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-5}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{544kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{32e NTG-bijeenkomst}},
}

@article{maps:29-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{6-9}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{79kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} user groups worldwide - what's cooking?}},
 keywords  = {{history, volunteer work, problems, lugs, {\TeX} user groups}},
 abstract  = {{This article is based on a presentation given at the UK
	TUG meeting in Oxford in October 2002. It describes some
	current problems that {\TeX} user groups face and it attempts
	to distill lessons learned and recommendations from almost
	25 years of {\TeX} user groups history.}}
}

@article{maps:29-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{10-14}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{116kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Koen Wybo}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX}: een newbie-ervaring}},
 abstract  = {{Hoe ik een {\LaTeX}-adept werd; argumentatie pro {\LaTeX} en
	contra zijn grafische concurrenten: Word en OpenOffice.}}
}

@article{maps:29-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-23}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Bacho{\TeX} 2003 — as of old, and some more}},
 keywords  = {{Bacho{\TeX}2003, GUST, Poland}},
 abstract  = {{A (partial) report of GUST's 11th meeting at Bachotek,
	Poland is given. It is incomplete because I could not
	understand most of the Polish contributions and I skipped
	the {\LaTeX} day. It reflects just of one of the threads
	through Bacho{\TeX}03's life. A question is raised: can the
	{\TeX}-world follow with pdf{\TeX} the evolving PDF standard?}}
}

@article{maps:29-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24-25}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{84kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Toolbox}},
 keywords  = {{index, rules, tooltips, uitvullen}},
 abstract  = {{Nieuwe avonturen in {\TeX}-land.}}
}

@article{maps:29-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{26-37}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{118kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Simon Pepping}},
 title     = {{Docbook In Con{\TeX}t — a Con{\TeX}t XML mapping for DocBook documents}},
 abstract  = {{Docbook In Con{\TeX}t combines two technologies that are
	widely used by authors of technical literature: the Docbook
	DTD and the Con{\TeX}t macro package for {\TeX}. It is a Con{\TeX}t
	module that allows one to produce a typeset version of a
	Docbook XML file, in dvi or pdf format.}}
}

@article{maps:29-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{38-43}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{95kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sjouke Mauw, Victor Bos}},
 title     = {{Drawing Message Sequence Charts with {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The MSC macro package facilitates {\LaTeX} users to easily
	include Message Sequence Charts in their texts. This
	article describes the motivation for developing the MSC
	macro package, the features of the MSC macro package,
	and the design of the MSC macro package.}}
}

@article{maps:29-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{44-49}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{154kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roland Smith}},
 title     = {{Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{gevaarlijke stoffen, labels, 67/548/EEC, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Volgens Europese regelgeving (67/548/EEC) is men verplicht
	om verpakkingen voor gevaarlijke stoffen te voorzien
	van labels die bepaalde informatie moeten bevatten. Met
	behulp van het labels package en een aantal in postscript
	geschreven pictogrammen is het mogelijk deze labels zelf
	te maken.}}
}

@article{maps:29-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{50-52}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{86kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel H Wesseling}},
 title     = {{Aligning MetaPost graphs in Con{\TeX}t combinations}},
 abstract  = {{For scientific plotting I like to use the Graph package
	by John Hobby within Context and when I have two or more
	separate graphs made I combine them into one figure with
	one figure caption. Combining is easy but aligning the
	graphs in a pleasing way required a trick.}}
}

@article{maps:29-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-59}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{125kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Drawing a type-case in Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{There are different environments with which one can
	typeset tables; all of them have their advantages
	and disadvantages. One of the recent problems I had
	to solve was to draw a typesetter's type-case from the
	lead-typesetting era. Since it looks like a table, I built
	the drawing in the \bTABLE . . . \eTABLE environment.}}
}

@article{maps:29-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{60}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Optisch uitvullen in de Maps}},
 abstract  = {{In deze maps wordt voor het eerst gebruik gemaakt van
	optisch uitvullen met behulp van protruding characters,
	dat wil zeggen dat wordt gepoogd de rechterkantlijn er
	rechter uit te laten zien door tekens met horizontale
	uitsteeksels, zoals onder andere afbreekstreepjes, iets
	in de kantlijn te laten uitsteken.}}
}

@article{maps:29-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{61-64}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{118kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ferdy Hanssen}},
 title     = {{Installing fonts in {\LaTeX}: a user's experience}},
 keywords  = {{user, {\LaTeX}, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{This paper presents a user's experience with installing
	fonts for use in {\LaTeX}. It will be shown that it is
	not hard to make a standard Type 1 font work, if you use
	modern font installation software for {\LaTeX}. All the steps
	necessary to install the example fonts will be shown. The
	example fonts used are Adobe Garamond from Adobe and
	Mrs. Eaves from Emigre.}}
}

@article{maps:29-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-160}},
 year      = {{2003}},
 volume    = {{29}},
 size      = {{593kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philip Lehman}},
 title     = {{The Font Installation Guide — Using Postscript fonts to their full potential with Latex}},
 abstract  = {{This guide is an unmodified printout of Philip Lehman's
	original guide, which is available from CTAN (current
	location: info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide directory)}}
}

@book{maps:30,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-92}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{6263kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2004.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:30-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{87kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:30-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-4}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{145kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{The Maps style}},
 keywords  = {{Maps, {\LaTeX}, classfile, Con{\TeX}t, module, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{This paper introduces the renewed Maps classfile and
	includes some usage notes.}}
}

@article{maps:30-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{5-7}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{196kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, packages, CTAN, classes, beamer, slides, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen
	uit het CTAN archief. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat
	ik zelf interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel
	anderen interessant is. Het is dus wel een persoonlijke
	keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig
	overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn
	ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een soort
	menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer nieuwsgierig
	te laten worden.}}
}

@article{maps:30-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{8-9}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{317kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Schatgraven op {\TeX}Live}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Live, fonts, documentatie, {\TeX} distributie}},
 abstract  = {{Dit stuk brengt de rijke inhoud van de {\TeX}Live cd onder
	de aandacht van de lezer.}}
}

@article{maps:30-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{10-12}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{98kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}Live Collection — past and future}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Live collection}},
 abstract  = {{Past and future of the {\TeX}Live Collection is described.}}
}

@article{maps:30-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-20}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{133kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{De CX{\TeX} distributie}},
 abstract  = {{Het einddoel van het CX{\TeX} project is om een hele texexec
	aanroep van begin tot eind te kunnen uitvoeren binnen
	één enkel, zo efficiënt mogelijk,
	systeemproces. De eerste onderdelen van deze distributie
	worden in dit artikel gepresenteerd: nog op zichzelf
	staande, maar al wel naar C vertaalde versies van texexec,
	texutil en pdfetex.}}
}

@article{maps:30-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{21-24}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The Scite - {\TeX} integration}},
 abstract  = {{Editors are a sensitive, often emotional subject. Some
	editors have exactly the properties a software designer
	or a writer desires and one gets attached to it. Still,
	most computer experts such as {\TeX} users often are use
	three or more different editors each day. Scite is a
	modern programmers editor which is very flexible, very
	configurable, and easily extended. We integrated Scite with
	{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t, {\LaTeX}, MetaPost and viewer and succeeded in
	that it is now possible to design and write your texts,
	manuscripts, reports, manuals and books with the Scite
	editor without having to leave the editor to compile and
	view your work. The article describes what is available
	and what you need with special emphasis on highlighting
	commands with lexers.}}
}

@article{maps:30-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-32}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{371kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Introducing oldstyle figures in existing virtual fonts}},
 keywords  = {{ruby script, txfonts, pxfonts, oldstyle figures}},
 abstract  = {{This paper describes a Ruby script osf that can be used
	to make a copy of a virtual font with its figures replaced
	with old style figures.}}
}

@article{maps:30-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-41}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{202kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Adam T. Lindsay}},
 title     = {{Apple Symbols}},
 abstract  = {{This Mac-specific My Way documents some fonts available
	exclusively on MacOSX 10.3, `Panther', and makes them
	available to Mac users with fairly minimal installation
	effort. I do not distribute the fonts themselves.}}
}

@article{maps:30-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{42-48}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{129kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Adam T. Lindsay}},
 title     = {{Unicode Symbols}},
 abstract  = {{The Unicode standard includes a number of signs, symbols,
	dingbats, bullets, arrows, graphical elements, and
	other miscellaneous glyphs. Prompted by finding a font
	dedicated to many such Unicode symbols on MacOSX systems,
	this magazine documents some ways of enabling these symbols
	on your own system.}}
}

@article{maps:30-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{49}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{98kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Woordafbreking op ë en ï}},
 keywords  = {{hyphenation, diaresis, umlaut}},
 abstract  = {{{\LaTeX} heeft moeite met het afbreken van woorden die een
	ë bevatten. Dit verhaal laat zien hoe dat probleem
	op te lossen: gebruik \"e of \"{e} of ë voor een
	eindstandige ë en "e voor alle andere. Analoog voor
	de ï.}}
}

@article{maps:30-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{50-51}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{149kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{R.F. Smith}},
 title     = {{{\LaTeX} uitvoer genereren vanuit C programma's}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, automatisch opmaken, C}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes a simple way to generate {\LaTeX}
	output from C programs.}}
}

@article{maps:30-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-59}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{216kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Help! — The Typesetting Area}},
 abstract  = {{Typesetting (large) documents presents significant
	challenges that have to be resolved before a satisfactory
	printed result is achieved; e.g. the internal structure
	of the document should be clear, and the document's
	typographical layout should match its content. This
	article, based on a presentation given at the NTG day in
	Arnhem on 13 November 2003, describes a traditional design
	technique known as the harmonic proportion.}}
}

@article{maps:30-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{60-65}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{519kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} and prepress}},
 keywords  = {{PDF, PostScript, color, Acrobat, separations, overprint}},
 abstract  = {{This article discusses preparing documents for professional
	printing with TEX and pdftex, including color printing
	and prepress standards.}}
}

@article{maps:30-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{66-86}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{534kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een tutorial over het gebruik van Bib{\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{Bib{\TeX}, bibliografie, literatuurlijst, referentie, {\LaTeX}, citeren, woordenlijsten}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft het gebruik van Bib{\TeX} waarbij de
	nadruk gelegd wordt op die aspecten die voor veel mensen
	als moeilijk ervaren worden. Het is een uitwerking van
	een lezing die de auteur gegeven heeft op de NTG-dag in
	Arnhem op 13 november 2003.}}
}

@article{maps:30-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{87-89}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{184kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{De {\TeX} flyer: doe er wat mee!}},
 abstract  = {{Op de volgende twee bladzijden hebben we onze {\TeX} flyer nog
	eens afgedrukt. De voorkant beschrijft de sterke punten
	van {\TeX}, en de achterkant bevat de nodige informatie om
	mensen een snelle start te geven met {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:30-17,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{90-91}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{30}},
 size      = {{3811kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Foto's van de NTG-dag — 27 mei 2004}},
}

@book{maps:31,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-108}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{5350kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2004.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:31-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{105kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:31-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-4}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{142kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{slides, beamer, classes, CTAN, packages, {\LaTeX}, {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit
	het CTAN archief. De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf
	interessant vind en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen
	interessant is. Het is dus een persoonlijke keuze. Het
	heeft niet de bedoeling om een volledig overzicht
	te geven. De uitgebreidere bijdragen zijn ook geen
	handleidingen. Beschouw het maar als een soort menukaart
	die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer lekker te maken.}}
}

@article{maps:31-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-7}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{94kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The State of Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{In this article I will describe the current state of the
	Con{\TeX}t macro package and the forces that play a role
	in its evolution. I will also indicate the directions in
	which we look for further developments.}}
}

@article{maps:31-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{8}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MetaPost Developments}},
 keywords  = {{extensions, bugs, sarovar, development, MetaPost}},
}

@article{maps:31-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-11}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Giuseppe Bilotta}},
 title     = {{The Aleph project}},
 keywords  = {{e-Omega, Omega, e{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{A brief introduction to the Aleph project, a {\TeX} extension
	providing most of Omega and e{\TeX} features.}}
}

@article{maps:31-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{12-18}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{164kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Sneep}},
 title     = {{Producing graphs with MetaPost — multiple aligned graphs and error bars}},
 keywords  = {{MetaPost, graphs, error-bars}},
 abstract  = {{MetaPost is an interesting companion for generating
	figures for documents written in {\TeX} or one of its
	derivatives. This article focuses on generating graphs
	in MetaPost, and more specifically on two problems one
	can encounter when creating graphs: multi part graphs and
	error bars.}}
}

@article{maps:31-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-24}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dwight Aplevich}},
 title     = {{Circuit\_macros — An application of little languages}},
 keywords  = {{Electric circuit diagrams, line drawings, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The evolution of the Circuit\_macros package is described,
	with some of the conventions for drawing circuit elements
	and some of the lessons learned.}}
}

@article{maps:31-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{25-31}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{154kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Een briefhoofd maken}},
 abstract  = {{Kort na het succesvol compileren van mijn eerste
	{\TeX}-document wilde ik graag overstappen op {\TeX} voor zoveel
	mogelijk documenten. En het idee om het briefhoofd te
	kunnen typesetten tegelijk met het printklaar maken
	van de brief zelf leek me erg leuk. Maar dan liefst
	wel met zo min mogelijk code voor dat briefpapier in de
	betreffende briefbestanden. Dus met alle nodige commando's
	in een aparte stylefile. En ook graag met een eenvoudiger
	briefhoofdje om op vervolgvellen te plaatsen als de brief
	langer is dan een pagina. Dankzij tips en hulp van Henk
	de Haan is me dat destijds gelukt en in de loop van de
	tijd heb ik op dezelfde manier ook anderen hun briefpapier
	helpen maken.}}
}

@article{maps:31-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{32-39}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{276kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Brooks Moses}},
 title     = {{MetaPlot, MetaContour, and Other Collaborations with MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{Most methods of creating plots in MetaPost work by doing
	all of their calculations in MetaPost, or by doing all of
	their calculations in a preprocessing program. There are
	advantages to dividing the work more equitably by doing
	the mathematical and data-visualization calculations
	in a preprocessing program and doing the graphical
	and layout calculations in MetaPost. The MetaPlot
	package provides a standard, flexible, interface for
	accomplishing such a collaboration between programs, and
	includes a general-purpose set of formatting macros that
	are applicable to a wide range of plot types. Examples
	are shown of linear plots with idiosyncratic annotation
	and two-dimensional contour plots with lines and filled
	contours on a non-cartesian mesh.}}
}

@article{maps:31-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40-45}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{334kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Support for typesetting greek in Con{\TeX}t — (cb-greek fonts)}},
 keywords  = {{font, cb-greek, greek, module, Context, Maps}},
 abstract  = {{There are situations where one needs to typeset pieces of
	text in greek. Until recently there was no direct support
	to do this in Con{\TeX}t. With the integration of the module
	greek this has changed. The basics were built by Giuseppe
	Bilotta (Italy). The module uses a subset of the cb-greek
	fonts. The article describes the module and the way greek
	text is coded. A couple of short and a longer examples of
	greek text are given.}}
}

@article{maps:31-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{46-51}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{149kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Steve Grathwohl}},
 title     = {{A Simple Book Design in Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{I show how a simple book design can be implemented in
	Con{\TeX}t}}
}

@article{maps:31-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-58}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{763kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Adam T. Lindsay}},
 title     = {{OpenType in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, fonts, OpenType}},
 abstract  = {{This is a summary of issues encountered and solutions
	implemented in order to support some advanced OpenType
	features in Con{\TeX}t. This article describes an accompanying
	set of support files that address installation (using
	{\TeX}Font), accommodating extended opticals families,
	and some "pro" font features. The extended character set
	afforded by pro fonts enables support for comprehensive
	small caps and old-style figures. Although the typescripts
	and commands are described together, certain features (like
	variant encodings for {\TeX}Font and optical typescripts)
	can be used independently of the other features described.}}
}

@article{maps:31-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{59-61}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{314kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Fontgebruik — Een uitdaging voor de lezer}},
 abstract  = {{Hans Hagen presenteert een zeer overdadige titel- en
	achterpagina van een handleiding uit 1899. De redactie van
	de Maps looft een prijs uit voor de beste en elegantste
	{\TeX}-benadering van deze layout.}}
}

@article{maps:31-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{62-66}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{1185kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Conversies}},
 abstract  = {{Een terugblik op 12 jaar met een softwarepakket dat op
	een of andere manier met vriendschappen te maken heeft}}
}

@article{maps:31-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-70}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{184kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Exact layout with {\LaTeX} — Implementing a letterhead}},
 keywords  = {{docstrip, PostScript, boxes, picture environment, letterhead}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes several techniques useful for
	implementing a professionally designed layout such as
	a letterhead.}}
}

@article{maps:31-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{71-76}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{234kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Boekdrukken en valkuilen}},
 keywords  = {{drukken, kopiëren, papierrichting, papierdikte, raster, drukkwaliteit}},
 abstract  = {{Een boek zetten, dat is nog tot daaraan toe, maar het
	dan ook nog netjes gedrukt krijgen... ik neem u graag mee
	langs de valkuilen, tot lering en leedvermaak.}}
}

@article{maps:31-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{77-86}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{180kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Eckhart Guthöhrlein}},
 title     = {{Object-Oriented Graphics with MetaObj}},
 abstract  = {{MetaObj is a macro package for MetaPost, a programming
	language for graphics producing PostScript output, based on
	the well-known metafont. MetaObj is written and maintained
	by Denis B. Roegel. It has been released under the LPPL
	and is available from CTAN. The cool thing about MetaObj
	is that it provides very high-level object-oriented macros
	which simplify the construction of complicated drawings
	by defining objects of arbitrary complexity and combining
	them to larger structures. This is already reflected
	in the name of the package: MetaObj is a shortcut for
	"MetaPost Objects".}}
}

@article{maps:31-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-90}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{160kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Patrick Gundlach}},
 title     = {{contextgarden.net}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, documentation, Wiki, website, live, typesetting on demand, texshow, mailinglist archive, source browser}},
 abstract  = {{The goal of the contextgarden.net project is to
	enhance the documentation of Con{\TeX}t. It consists of
	several web services that together provide the technical
	framework behind the documentation. A large (and growing)
	percentage of the supplied content is actually provided
	by the visitors of the interconnected web sites. with XML
	processing, grid-based typesetting, stepcharts, MetaFun
	and MathML, and more.}}
}

@article{maps:31-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-94}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{772kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Fonts, more than a sample — how to use the fonts shown in the font sampler}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, fontsampler, howto, {\TeX}live}},
}

@article{maps:31-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{95-98}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{475kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Bloei der decadence — Johan Polak}},
 keywords  = {{Greek setup, Math-mode, Maps, Con{\TeX}t, opmaak, setup, layout, screen-document, reference-list, symbol}},
 abstract  = {{Het boek "Bloei der decadence" van Johan Polak was
	jarenlang uitverkocht maar het is als PDF weer beschikbaar
	gekomen. Via Internet is het vrij te downloaden. Voor wie
	het op het computerscherm wil lezen is er een interactieve
	schermversie en een andere versie is geschikt om uit
	te printen. Beide nieuwe edities van het boek zijn
	opgemaakt in de Con{\TeX}t omgeving. Dit artikel beschrijft
	enige aspecten van het opzetten van een project. Door
	de gigantische hoeveelheid referenties naar boeken,
	tijdschriften, personen, plaatsnamen en andere termen
	werd het een gecompliceerde klus. Doel was om de wijze
	van verwerking toch zo simpel mogelijk te houden. Dus
	geen plain-{\TeX} hackwerk maar simpele methodes die gebruik
	maken van de typische Con{\TeX}t eigenschappen. Ook wilden
	we met een overzichtelijk klein aantal stuurbestanden het
	gecodeerde boek zowel als scherm- en als papierversie
	kunnen compileren. Een bijzondere uitdaging vormde
	hiernaast het feit, dat er in een voetnoot een stuk Griekse
	tekst is weergegeven.}}
}

@article{maps:31-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-103}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{179kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hendri Adriaens, Uwe Kern}},
 title     = {{Keys and values — new developments and mechanisms in key processing}},
 keywords  = {{PSTricks, preset, pointers, package options, xkeyval, keyval, category codes}},
 abstract  = {{This article introduces the xkeyval package as an extension
	of the well-known keyval package. The package provides
	more flexible commands, syntax enhancements, and a new
	option processing mechanism for class and package options
	using the key=value syntax.}}
}

@article{maps:31-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{104-105}},
 year      = {{2004}},
 volume    = {{31}},
 size      = {{417kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Boekbespreking vormwijzer}},
 keywords  = {{boekbespreking, Treebus, vormwijzer, tekstwijzer}},
}

@book{maps:32,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-148}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{4617kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2005.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:32-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{139kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:32-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-5}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{178kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{classes, CTAN, packages, {\LaTeX}, TeX}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit het
	CTAN archief (en mogelijk andere bronnen op het Internet).
	De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind en
	wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het is
	dus een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling
	om een volledig overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere
	bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar
	als een soort menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de
	lezer lekker te maken.}}
}

@article{maps:32-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{6-8}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Reinhard Zierke, Graham Williams, Joachim Schrod, Rainer Schöpf, Jim Hefferon, Robin Fairbairns}},
 title     = {{CTAN plans}},
 abstract  = {{The readers of Tugboat likely know the Comprehensive
	TeX Archive Network as a great pile of {\TeX} stuff.
	That is, it is full of {\TeX} materials, and it is great,
	but it is also something of a pile — a bit of a mess.
	We will sketch some plans for improving CTAN. As part
	of that, we will outline its architecture, history,
	and some present issues.}}
}

@article{maps:32-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-13}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{155kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, MetaPost Team}},
 title     = {{Metapost Developments — Spring 2005}},
 keywords  = {{MetaPost, development, sarovar, bugs, extensions}},
 abstract  = {{The MetaPost development team is pleased to announce
	version~0.9 of MetaPost. This article documents the
	changes since the previous version, and provides a roadmap
	for future development.}}
}

@article{maps:32-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-15}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{321kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Adam Lindsay}},
 title     = {{Font Variants — A new Con{\TeX}t feature for organising rich fonts}},
 abstract  = {{Font Variants are a new (meta-)feature in Con{\TeX}t, offering
	the opportunity of easier access to advanced or unusual
	font features, without the hassle of using full typescript
	switches. This article briefly runs through the basic theory
	and practice of so—called font variants, and gives a few
	strategies for adapting it for your own uses.}}
}

@article{maps:32-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{16-25}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{467kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Adam Lindsay}},
 title     = {{Euler in Use — Con{\TeX}t support for the Euler math font, with examples}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, fonts, Euler, math}},
 abstract  = {{The
	Euler math font was designed by Hermann Zapf. Con{\TeX}t support was
	limited until now. We show how to use the Eulervm {\LaTeX} package in
	combination with some new
	math definitions and typescripts to give a more informal look to your
	equations.}}
}

@article{maps:32-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{26-28}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{167kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Lettrines for Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{lettrines, module, initials, dropped capitals, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{The Con{\TeX}t module lettri is port of the {\LaTeX} package
	lettrine by Daniel Flipo that provides a way to typeset
	dropped capitals at the beginning of paragraphs.}}
}

@article{maps:32-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{29-34}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{420kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Steve Peter}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} and Linguistics}},
 keywords  = {{pscyr, omega, makor, ledmac, latexsym, fontenc, ednotes, edmac, devnag, colortab, bigfoot, babel, psgreek, pstricks, syntax, xetex, grammar, tipa, philology, phonology, lemmata, linguistics, semantics, cyrillic, teubner, unicode, arabic, armenian, chinese, devanagari, greek, hebrew, japanese, korean, russian, sanskrit}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} has long been associated with mathematics and
	``hard'' sciences such as physics. But even during the
	early days of {\TeX}, linguists were attracted to the
	system, and today a growing number of them are turning
	to {\TeX} ({\LaTeX}, Con{\TeX}t). Aside from the general
	advantages of {\TeX} for producing academic papers, it
	offers linguists largely intuitive means for dealing
	with often complex notational issues. In this paper,
	an abbreviated version of my Practical {\TeX} 2004 talk,
	I show some notational issues and their solutions in {\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:32-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{116kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Controlling Acrobat Reader under X11}},
 keywords  = {{pdfopen, scripting, X window system, acrobat reader, pdf}},
 abstract  = {{The command-line programs pdfopen and pdfclose allow you
	to control the X Window System version of Adobe Acrobat
	Reader from the command line or from within a script.}}
}

@article{maps:32-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{36-43}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{302kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Oscar Boot, Frans Absil}},
 title     = {{Met XML van database naar {\LaTeX} — Het automatisch publiceren van database informatie in {\LaTeX} documenten}},
 keywords  = {{conversie, transformatie, XML, XSLT, XPath, Saxon, database, Access, publiceren}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt de geautomatiseerde aanmaak van
	het programmaboek voor de Bacheloropleiding Technische
	Wetenschappen bij de Hogere Defensie Opleidingen (HDO)
	toegelicht. Een belangrijk aspect hierbij vormt de
	omzetting van een Microsoft Access database naar {\LaTeX}
	tabellen en bijlages in de uiteindelijke documentatie:
	XML bestanden worden als tussenstap gehanteerd.}}
}

@article{maps:32-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{44-49}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{186kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hendri Hondorp}},
 title     = {{Bundeling van conferentieverslagen}},
 keywords  = {{fancyhdr, hyperref, pdflatex, pdfpages, proceedings, conferentieverslag}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel wordt beschreven hoe Proceedings voor een
	Workshop of Conferentie gemaakt kunnen worden met behulp
	van pdflatex en de packages pdfpages, fancyhdr en hyperref}}
}

@article{maps:32-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{50-51}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{154kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn, Hendri Adriaens}},
 title     = {{... three, two, one ... — a quest for the number of numbers}},
 keywords  = {{enumerate, numbered items, lists, counting backwards, etaremune}},
 abstract  = {{This article briefly describes the seemingly trivial task
	of numbering items in a list with decreasing numbers,
	starting with the number equal to the amount of items in
	the list.}}
}

@article{maps:32-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-55}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{123kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel Wesseling}},
 title     = {{Compiling METAPOST under Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{To teach yourself MetaPost, the book ``Learning
	MetaPost by Doing'' by André Heck is probably
	unsurpassed. However, the examples therein are processed
	on Unix using {\LaTeX}. Con{\TeX}t users have a bit of
	detective work to do before they can have successful
	compilations. If you are new to Con{\TeX}t, the lines
	below may help save your a few hours of experimenting.
	These instructions were extracted from the MetaFun manual
	by Hans Hagen (from chapters 1, 2 and 3), and from a small
	macro that he once gave me that makes it possible to use
	the graph package by John Hobby.}}
}

@article{maps:32-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{56-112}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{808kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{André Heck}},
 title     = {{Learning METAPOST by doing}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, tutorial}},
 abstract  = {{This course is only meant as a short, hands-on introduction
	to METAPOST for newcomers who want to produce rather
	simple graphics. The main objective is to get students
	started with METAPOST on a UNIX platform.}}
}

@article{maps:32-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{113-117}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{114kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{André Heck}},
 title     = {{Learning METAPOST by doing (answers)}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, tutorial}},
 abstract  = {{This course is only meant as a short, hands-on introduction
	to METAPOST for newcomers who want to produce rather
	simple graphics. The main objective is to get students
	started with METAPOST on a UNIX platform.}}
}

@article{maps:32-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{118-132}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{1585kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Janusz Nowacki}},
 title     = {{Antykwa Torunska — ver 2.03}},
 keywords  = {{Antykwa Torunska, documentation, Zygfryd Gardzielewski, fonts}},
 abstract  = {{}}
}

@article{maps:32-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{133-137}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{266kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ernst van der Storm}},
 title     = {{Variabele faxdocumenten aanmaken in {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{faxen, macro's, Latex2RTF, Latex}},
 abstract  = {{Beschreven wordt hoe {\LaTeX} gebruikt wordt als schakel
	tussen een bestaande bedrijfsapplicatie en een faxserver;
	data worden automatisch geëxporteerd naar een
	{\LaTeX}-document.}}
}

@article{maps:32-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{138-140}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{216kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ernst van der Storm}},
 title     = {{Stroomdiagrammen maken met flow}},
 keywords  = {{softwaredocumentatie, stroomdiagram, write18, flow, Latex}},
 abstract  = {{Flow is een handig programma om stroomdiagrammen te
	maken; via \write18 kan het vanuit een {\LaTeX}-document
	worden aangeroepen zodat eventuele wijzigingen vanzelf
	tevoorschijn komen.}}
}

@article{maps:32-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{141-148}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{32}},
 size      = {{412kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Verslag EuroTeX 2005}},
 keywords  = {{tug, verslag, conferentie, eurotex 2005}},
 abstract  = {{Een verslag van de 16de jaarlijkse EuroTeX conferentie,
	gehouden in Pont-à-Mousson van 7 tot 11 maart 2005.}}
}

@book{maps:33,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-78}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{1909kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2005.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:33-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{114kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:33-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2-3}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{130kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maarten Sneep}},
 title     = {{Wachten op een Ca-tas-tro-fe}},
 keywords  = {{spelling, afbreken, patronen}},
}

@article{maps:33-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{4-13}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{326kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dennis van Dok}},
 title     = {{Jewel case listings for mp3 cdroms}},
 keywords  = {{mp3, jewel case, paragraph filling, grip, ripping, audio}},
 abstract  = {{Making jewel case listings for mp3 cdroms is a particular
	challenge, since up to about ten times as much information
	has to be on them as on jewel cases for regular audio
	disks. Here {\TeX}'s abilities to adjust entire paragraphs,
	as opposed to just single lines, shine at you.}}
}

@article{maps:33-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-18}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{333kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Font installation the shallow way}},
 keywords  = {{font installation, afm2pl, afm2tfm, TrueType, pdftex, mapfiles}},
 abstract  = {{For one-off projects, you can cut corners with font
	installation and end up with a more manageable set of
	files and a cleaner {\TeX} installation. This article shows
	how and why.}}
}

@article{maps:33-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-35}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{323kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Idris Samawi Hamid}},
 title     = {{Installing Expert Fonts: Minion Pro}},
 keywords  = {{font installation, Con{\TeX}t, expert font}},
 abstract  = {{Installing fonts for Con{\TeX}t can be intimidating
	business. In this issue we take on a real monster:
	a collection of Adobe Minion Pro expert fonts. We
	hope our installation of this collection will provide
	an illustrative example for Con{\TeX}t users, and help to
	ease the pain of installing new fonts (if you can install
	Minion Pro, Myriad Pro and Poetica, you can install just
	about anything!).}}
}

@article{maps:33-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{36-40}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{146kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Hyphenation Patterns}},
 keywords  = {{hyphenation, patterns, Con{\TeX}t}},
}

@article{maps:33-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{41-45}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{124kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{What do you do with Con{\TeX}t?}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, survey, usage}},
 abstract  = {{User responses to the question: `What do you do with
	Con{\TeX}t?'.}}
}

@article{maps:33-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{46-51}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{511kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 keywords  = {{classes, CTAN, packages, {\LaTeX}, Con{\TeX}t, graphics, programma's, {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit het
	CTAN archief (en mogelijk andere bronnen op het Internet).
	De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind en
	wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het is
	dus een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling
	om een volledig overzicht te geven. De uitgebreidere
	bijdragen zijn ook geen handleidingen. Beschouw het maar
	als een soort menukaart die de bedoeling heeft om de lezer
	lekker te maken.}}
}

@article{maps:33-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{52-53}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{186kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jan van de Craats}},
 title     = {{Color separation in two-color printing}},
 keywords  = {{color, separation, printing}},
 abstract  = {{The book Basisboek wiskunde (`Basic Mathematics') by
	Jan van de Craats and Rob Bosch was typeset in {\LaTeX} and
	submitted for printing as one big pdf-file. In this book
	one extra color (blue) was used for titles, headings,
	footings, important formulas, figures and also as a
	background color for certain pages or parts of text. Jan
	van de Craats, who did the typesetting, reports on a trick
	for obtaining color separation without flaws.}}
}

@article{maps:33-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{54-58}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{278kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Henri Adriaens, Chris Ellison}},
 title     = {{Powerdot — making presentations with {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX} presentations, powerdot, prosper, pstricks, xkeyval}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes some technical details of the
	powerdot class which was developed during the summer
	holidays of 2005.}}
}

@article{maps:33-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59-64}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{342kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Managing a network {\TeX} installation under Windows}},
 keywords  = {{miktex, texniccenter, filename database, windows, registry, roaming profiles, graphic file formats}},
}

@article{maps:33-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65-78}},
 year      = {{2005}},
 volume    = {{33}},
 size      = {{315kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ovidiu Gheorghies}},
 title     = {{An Introduction to MetaUML — Exquisite UML Diagrams in MetaPost}},
 keywords  = {{MetaPost, {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, UML, class diagram, state machine diagram, use case diagram, activity diagram}},
 abstract  = {{MetaUML is a GNU GPL MetaPost library for typesetting
	exquisite UML (Unified Modeling Language) diagrams. MetaUML
	offers a highly customizable, object-oriented API,
	designed with the ease of use in mind. This paper presents
	usage examples as well as a description of MetaUML
	infrastructure. This infrastructure may prove useful for
	general MetaPost typesetting, providing object-oriented
	replacements and enhancements to functionalities offered
	by the boxes package.}}
}

@book{maps:34,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-108}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{12536kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2006.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:34-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:34-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{162kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Nog een laatste dingetje ... — ... de i-Installer zoekt een nieuwe beheerder}},
 keywords  = {{i-installer, i quit, gerben wierda}},
}

@article{maps:34-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-7}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{209kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{What tools do Con{\TeX}t users have?}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, tools, scripts}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the tools that are available for
	running Con{\TeX}t, for testing, finding, analysing files,
	installing fonts, and more}}
}

@article{maps:34-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{8}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{166kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Announcement: Con{\TeX}t user meeting 2007}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, meeting, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:34-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-21}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{271kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MkII - MkIV}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, mkii, mkiv, luatex}},
 abstract  = {{This article is the first in a series about Con{\TeX}t and
	luatex. For those who use Con{\TeX}t it is a progress report
	of the development process and the choices that are being
	made. For those not using Con{\TeX}t it gives some insight
	in what luatex is about.}}
}

@article{maps:34-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{22-34}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{294kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Aditya Mahajan}},
 title     = {{Display Math in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, math, amstex}},
 abstract  = {{This article explains how to do various kinds of alignments
	in Con{\TeX}t. A visual output is presented, and it is
	then shown how that effect can be achieved in {\LaTeX} and
	Con{\TeX}t. We hope that article will make the transition
	from {\LaTeX} with amsmath package to Con{\TeX}t easier.}}
}

@article{maps:34-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{35-37}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{166kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Metapost Developments}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, filename templates, cmyk color, greyscale, object specials, encapsulated postscript, font inclusion, groff}},
 abstract  = {{The new release of metapost includes some new features
	as well as a number of bugfixes. The new functionality
	includes: the possibility to use a template for the
	naming of output files; support for cmyk and greyscale
	color models; per-object Postscript specials; the option
	to generate Encapsulated Postscript files adhering to
	Adobe's Document Structuring Conventions; the ability to
	embed re-encoded and/or subsetted fonts; and support for
	the GNU implementation of troff (groff).}}
}

@article{maps:34-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{38}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{107kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jerzy Ludwichowski}},
 title     = {{Announcement: EuroBacho{\TeX} 2007}},
 keywords  = {{eurotex, bachotex, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:34-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{39-46}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{2085kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski}},
 title     = {{Appendix G illuminated}},
 keywords  = {{math, texbook}},
 abstract  = {{This paper aims to provide a collection of illustrations to
	Appendix G of the texbook. To begin with, I will summarize
	briefly the main issues of the texbook which will be dealt
	with here; next, I confine myself to the explanation of
	the figures. Naturally, I will use the same notation as
	is used in Appendix G.}}
}

@article{maps:34-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-50}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{240kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Jerzy Ludwichowski, Volker Schaa}},
 title     = {{The New Font Project: {\TeX} Gyre}},
 keywords  = {{fonts}},
 abstract  = {{In this short presentation, we will introduce a new
	project: the ``LM-ization'' of the free fonts that come
	with {\TeX} distributions. We will discuss the project
	objectives, timeline and cross-LUG funding aspects.}}
}

@article{maps:34-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{51-54}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{995kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The making of a ({\TeX}) font}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, cowfont, Duane Bibby}},
 abstract  = {{We want to introduce a new display font to the {\TeX}
	community. The font is a digitization of a series of Duane
	Bibby drawings, commissioned by Pragma ADE. The digital
	version for use with Con{\TeX}t is prepared by Bittext based
	on scans provided by Pragma ADE.}}
}

@article{maps:34-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{55-64}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{378kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Lemmens}},
 title     = {{Je proefschrift in {\LaTeX} zetten}},
 keywords  = {{{\LaTeX}, proefscrift}},
 abstract  = {{In dit artikel beschrijf ik hoe ik mijn proefschrift in
	{\LaTeX} gezet heb. Ik ga in op mijn werkomgeving, de extra
	pakketten die ik gebruikte, de (lokale) truuks die ik in
	het bronbestand gebruikte en de problemen die ik ondervond
	(en oplossingen daarvoor).}}
}

@article{maps:34-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{65-67}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{206kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Random bit generator in {\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{Een in {\TeX} gecodeerde randomgenerator maakt het mogelijk
	om willekeurige getallen en beslissingen te verwerken in
	de productie van documenten.}}
}

@article{maps:34-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{68-77}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{291kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paweł Jackowski}},
 title     = {{Enjoy {\TeX} pearls diving!}},
 keywords  = {{bachotex, tricks}},
 abstract  = {{The Bacho{\TeX} 2006 conference continued the Pearls of {\TeX}
	Programming open session introduced in 2005 during which
	volunteers present {\TeX}-related tricks and shorties.}}
}

@article{maps:34-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{78-80}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{232kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Epspdf}},
 keywords  = {{encapsulated postscript, pdf, converter, graphical interface, command-line}},
 abstract  = {{This article introduces epspdf, a converter between eps,
	PostScript and pdf which can be run either via a graphical
	interface or from the command-line.}}
}

@article{maps:34-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{81-84}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{1867kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{David Walden interview}},
 keywords  = {{interview, Dave Walden}},
 abstract  = {{There's a treasure URL on the TUG site, where Dave Walden
	has collected a number of excellent interviews with key
	people of the {\TeX} community - a lively `Who's Who' for
	anyone who has met some {\TeX} luminaries or seen them in
	action during conferences. The interviews go way beyond
	the obvious as Dave invites his guests to respond to
	his lucid questions. The result is a growing collection
	of significantly detailed portraits of the people who
	have made the {\TeX} landscape the way it is today. Even if
	you've known one of the featured people for years, you're
	certain to discover something interesting about this
	person that you've never been aware of. Although there
	is an excellent interview with Dave himself on the site,
	conducted by Karl Berry, we decided to interview Dave for
	MAPS, exploring some subjects that were mentioned in his
	online conversation with Berry. You might want to read
	that interview first to have context for some of the
	questions and answers in this interview.}}
}

@article{maps:34-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-101}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{1025kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wybo Dekker}},
 title     = {{The `isodoc' class}},
 keywords  = {{isodoc, letters, examples, {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The `isodoc' class can be used for the preparation of
	letters, invoices, and, in the future, similar documents.
	Documents are set up with options, thus making the class
	easily adaptable to user's wishes and extensible for other
	document types.}}
}

@article{maps:34-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{102-104}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{1084kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Geert Verhaag}},
 title     = {{Creating a Dust-cover in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{dust-cover, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This short article describes how to setup a dust-cover for
	a book, using the standard features available in Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@article{maps:34-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{105-108}},
 year      = {{2006}},
 volume    = {{34}},
 size      = {{4285kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{TUG 2006 report}},
 keywords  = {{tug, marrakesh}},
 abstract  = {{After TUG 2003 in America (Hawaii - USA), TUG 2004 in
	Europe (Xanthi - Greece), TUG 2005 in Asia (Wuhan -
	China), the TUG 2006 was held in Africa, more precisely
	in Marrakesh. Processing multilingual e-documents went
	beyond the limits of its traditional cultural areas and new
	horizons in the internationalization of {\TeX} were explored.}}
}

@book{maps:35,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-54}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{16658kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2007.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:35-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{227kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:35-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{398kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{TUG conference 2007}},
 keywords  = {{tug, san diego, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:35-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{124kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{René van der Heijden}},
 keywords  = {{obituary}},
}

@article{maps:35-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{4}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{86kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{The MPlib Project — MetaPost as a reusable component}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, project, library, reuse}},
}

@article{maps:35-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-8}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{97kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Tokens in Luatex}},
 keywords  = {{luatex, tokens, {\TeX} internals}},
}

@article{maps:35-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-10}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{99kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Integrating the pool file}},
 keywords  = {{luatex, metapost, string pool, programming}},
 abstract  = {{This short article discusses the method that is used in
	Metapost and luatex to integrate the string pool file into
	the program. This method allows the redistribution of a
	single updated executable in place of both a program and
	a data file, and this makes updating those programs easier
	on both the user and the developer.}}
}

@article{maps:35-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{11-17}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{173kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{PDF / Tikz}},
 keywords  = {{graphics language, {\LaTeX}, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{For those who are looking for an alternative for
	external graphic drawing tools, PGF / TikZ offers a
	wealth of possibilities. PGF is a macro-package that,
	together with its user interface TikZ, comprises a kind
	of `graphics language' to build graphics inside the text
	as inline graphics or as pictures of larger size. PGF
	is a macro-package originally written for {\LaTeX}. In the
	meantime it is also available for use within Con{\TeX}t. The
	package comes with a large set of libraries for different
	kinds of graphics. There is extensive documentation
	and a tutorial. For support a mailing list and web-site
	are available. Users of the package with Con{\TeX}t have to
	install the xkeyval package version 1.8. PGF and TikZ are
	distributed under the GNU Public License version 2.}}
}

@article{maps:35-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{18-26}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{523kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{External graphics for {\LaTeX}}},
 keywords  = {{graphics, converting, bitmap, vector, compression, eps, pdf, jpeg, lossy, lossless, resolution}},
 abstract  = {{In this article, we discuss graphics file formats, software
	to create graphics and procedures to convert them to {\LaTeX}-
	and pdflatex-compatible formats.}}
}

@article{maps:35-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-29}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{8867kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Review: Alphabetgeschichten}},
 keywords  = {{Hermann Zapf}},
}

@article{maps:35-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{30-36}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{342kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Richard Hirsch}},
 title     = {{Folding Sheets for a Modular Origami Dodecalendar}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, tutorial}},
 abstract  = {{Twelve square sheets of paper can be folded in such a
	way that they can be assembled to a pentagon dodecahedron
	(origami). The single units are called modules, hence the
	name modular. If the sheets bear calendrical information at
	the right places, the dodecahedron shows the calendar for
	each month on its faces: the dodecalendar. In this article
	we let MetaPost calculate piece by piece the information
	that needs to be printed on the module paper to enable us
	to fold the modules and assemble the dodecahedron.}}
}

@article{maps:35-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-42}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{2352kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mojca Miklavec}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t user meeting 2007}},
 keywords  = {{report, epen}},
}

@article{maps:35-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-50}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{2416kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{EuroBacho{\TeX} 2007}},
 keywords  = {{report, bachotex, eurotex}},
}

@article{maps:35-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{51-54}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{35}},
 size      = {{684kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Miktex installeren valt erg mee}},
 keywords  = {{miktex, windows}},
}

@book{maps:36,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-89}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{21486kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2008.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:36-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2007}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{84kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:36-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{1838kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{TUG conference 2008}},
 keywords  = {{tug, cork, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:36-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-12}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{10651kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Wilfred van Rooijen}},
 title     = {{Typesetting CJK and other exotic characters using {\LaTeX} and xe{\LaTeX} — Anything goes (well, almost ...)}},
 keywords  = {{Xe{\TeX}, Xe{\LaTeX}, CJK, unicode, horizontal and vertical typesetting, Japanese}},
 abstract  = {{This paper tries to illustrate some of the particularities
	of typesetting CJK characters using several flavors of
	{\LaTeX}. Special attention is given to Japanese. A short
	introduction is given about the nature of the character
	scripts and the special demands those alphabets put on
	character and font encodings. Typesetting Japanese using
	p(te){\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, Lambda, and Xe{\LaTeX} is discussed. Special
	discussion is given to Xe{\LaTeX}, and the possibilities
	of including annotation markup and vertical typesetting
	in Japanese texts using Xe{\LaTeX}. It will be shown that
	although typesetting vertical material is possible with
	Xe{\TeX} v0.997, more development work will be needed in this
	area to create a dependable vertical typesetting system.}}
}

@article{maps:36-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-17}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{213kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jelle Huisman}},
 title     = {{Met Xe{\TeX} meertalig — Talen en fonts in {\TeX}}},
 keywords  = {{talen, schrift, fonts, xetex}},
 abstract  = {{This article is an adaptation of the lecture I gave at the
	NTG spring meeting of 8 June 2007. This article begins
	with a little background information about languages,
	scripts, and fonts. The second part of the article gives
	some examples of multilingual use of {\TeX}, using Xe{\TeX}.
	Dit artikel is een bewerking van de lezing die ik op de
	NTG voorjaarsbijeenkomst van 8 juni 2007 heb gehouden.
	Dit artikel begint met wat achtergrondinformatie over
	talen, schriften en fonts. Het tweede deel van het artikel
	geeft een aantal voorbeelden van meertalig {\TeX}-gebruik
	met behulp van Xe{\TeX}.}}
}

@article{maps:36-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{18-21}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{172kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{What is it about all those *{\TeX}s}},
 keywords  = {{tex, latex, miktex, tetex, texlive, etex, pdftex, pdfetex}},
 abstract  = {{This short article describes the different `layers'
	in a {\TeX} system, the differences between {\TeX} engines,
	extensions, macro packages, and distributions. I hope to
	take away some of the confusions that people new to {\TeX}
	and less technically inclined people have when they are
	confronted with terms like pdftex, texlive, tetex, miktex,
	pdflatex and so on.}}
}

@article{maps:36-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{22-23}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{127kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Book Review: Fonts and Encodings — by Yannis Haralambous}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, encodings, book review}},
}

@article{maps:36-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{On reading Fonts \& Encodings}},
 abstract  = {{Stated briefly: "should I buy this book?" YES.}}
}

@article{maps:36-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{25-26}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Latin Modern Nederlands}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, ij, ligature, opentype}},
 abstract  = {{This article discusses how some typical Dutch language
	related typesetting issues are dealt with in Latin Modern
	by means of the language and script tags.}}
}

@article{maps:36-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-32}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{131kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Aditya Mahajan}},
 title     = {{Theorems in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{context, theorems, enumerations}},
 abstract  = {{This article explains some of the recent advancements in
	Con{\TeX}t enumeration mechanism that handles most of the
	requirements of theorem-like constructions.}}
}

@article{maps:36-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{33-38}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{216kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Exam Papers — Posing Questions to Students}},
 keywords  = {{context, examination, multiple choice}},
 abstract  = {{Exam is a module for consistent production and maintenance
	of student examinations. Provided for are various types
	of questions such as with long and small answers, yes/no
	questions and multiple choice.}}
}

@article{maps:36-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{39-42}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{190kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Roland Smith}},
 title     = {{Revision control for {\TeX} documents — An overview}},
 keywords  = {{revision control, subversion, RCS, CVS, git}},
 abstract  = {{Revision control is the management of multiple versions of
	the same unit of information. Originating in formalized
	processes in engineering, it was first automated for
	managing source code for computer software. Since {\TeX}
	documents are like source code, they lend themselves
	well to being managed by a revision control system.
	\par Systems like RCS and git are very suitable for
	single writers working on their own projects. \par More
	elaborate systems like CVS and subversion are more suited
	for groups cooperating on projects. It takes more effort
	to master them. \par For most single users, git is the
	best alternative for multi-file projects, followed by RCS
	for working on single {\TeX} files.}}
}

@article{maps:36-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-50}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{138kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The luafication of {\TeX} and Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{lua, tex, context}},
}

@article{maps:36-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{51-52}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{111kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{DHZ boek}},
 keywords  = {{doe het zelf, boek, online drukker, pod}},
 abstract  = {{It is becoming easier to produce a book, while for
	publishers it is less interesting to invest in new
	authors. Publishing on your own looks natural, but if you
	want to do it beautifully, it is a challenge. \par Het
	wordt steeds makkelijker om zelf een boek te produceren
	terwijl het voor uitgevers steeds minder interessant
	wordt om in nieuwe auteurs te investeren. Zelf publiceren
	ligt voor de hand maar als je het mooi wil doen is het
	een uitdaging.}}
}

@article{maps:36-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{53-64}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{5608kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dave Walden}},
 title     = {{Notes on Self-publishing}},
 keywords  = {{self-publishing, publishers, cost}},
 abstract  = {{This note summarizes what I have learned about
	self-publishing.}}
}

@article{maps:36-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{65}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{424kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Con{\TeX}t conference 2008}},
 keywords  = {{meeting, bohinj, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:36-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{66-68}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{131kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MetaPost library project}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, mplib, reuse}},
}

@article{maps:36-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-81}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{113kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{The MetaPost Library}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, mplib, luatex}},
}

@article{maps:36-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{82-84}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{705kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Volker Schaa}},
 title     = {{Reshaping Euler — A collaboration with Hermann Zapf}},
 keywords  = {{fonts, euler, update}},
}

@article{maps:36-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{85-89}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{36}},
 size      = {{211kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Blocks and Arrows with MetaPost}},
 keywords  = {{metapost, context, color, drawing, block, arrow, label}},
 abstract  = {{Typesetting of blocks and arrows in Con{\TeX}t with MetaPost.}}
}

@book{maps:37,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-90}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{18482kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2008.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:37-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{22kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:37-02,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{179kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{TUG conference 2009}},
 keywords  = {{tug, cork, announcement}},
}

@article{maps:37-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-11}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{72kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The {\TeX}-lua mix}},
 abstract  = {{An introduction to the combination of {\TeX} and the scripting
	language Lua.}}
}

@article{maps:37-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{12-16}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{268kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mojca Miklavec, Arthur Reutenauer}},
 title     = {{Putting the Cork back in the bottle}},
 abstract  = {{Until recently, all of the hyphenation patterns available
	for different languages in {\TeX} were using 8-bit font
	encodings, and were therefore not directly usable with
	UTF-8 {\TeX} engines such as Xe{\TeX} and Lua{\TeX}. When the
	former was included in {\TeX} Live in 2007, Jonathan Kew,
	its author, devised a temporary way to use them with
	Xe{\TeX} as well as the "old" {\TeX} engines. Last spring, we
	undertook to convert them to UTF-8, and make them usable
	with both sorts of {\TeX} engines, thus staying backwardly
	compatible. The process uncovered a lot of idiosyncrasies
	in the pattern-loading mechanism for different languages,
	and we had to invent solutions to work around each of them.}}
}

@article{maps:37-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{17-24}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{298kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{PDF genereren voor e-readers}},
 abstract  = {{Notudoc is a commercial Internet application Con{\TeX}t
	uses for the on-the-fly generation of PDF documents,
	for the e-readers of \textit{IREX technologies}, and more.
	This article gives a look behind the scenes. NotuDoc is
	een commerciële internet applicatie die Con{\TeX}t
	gebruikt voor het on-the-fly genereren van pdf documenten,
	onder andere voor de e-readers van iRex technologies. Dit
	artikel geeft een blik achter de schermen.}}
}

@article{maps:37-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-39}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{76kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Dealing with xml in Con{\TeX}t MkIV}},
}

@article{maps:37-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{40-44}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Printing labels with Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{maps, context, layer, label, xy-arrangement}},
 abstract  = {{Sometimes one needs to print a single label which will
	be glued onto a package, a large envelope or for the
	identification of a box. In certain situations one wants
	to produce a series of identical labels or one needs
	to typeset whole databases of addresses. Con{\TeX}t offers
	the possibility of using the XY-arranging procedure to
	print on each of the labels being present on a sheet.
	Here a possible approach is presented for labels of the
	size 105 x 42.3mm i.e. (14 labels on a A4). It is shown
	how to print a single label but also how to get multiple
	copies of the same content and how to prepare sheets of
	labels containing the addresses of a database.}}
}

@article{maps:37-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{45-47}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{811kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Printing envelopes with Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{maps, context, layer, envelope}},
 abstract  = {{Once in a while one has to prepare an envelope with printed
	address based on the guidelines provided by the Dutch
	mail service TNT. This short communication shows a way to
	achieve this with Con{\TeX}t. The article shows the solution
	for the DL-type of envelope. From there, it is a small
	step to define other envelopes with different dimensions.}}
}

@article{maps:37-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{48-54}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{2736kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{CD and DVD covers in Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{cd, dvd, jewelcase}},
 abstract  = {{Production of CD and DVD covers in several variations
	using Con{\TeX}t.}}
}

@article{maps:37-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{55-58}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Punk from Metafont to MetaPost}},
 abstract  = {{To make Knuth's punk font usable with Con{\TeX}t MKIV,
	it had to be converted from Metafont to MetaPost input.
	This article highlights the most important changes that
	had to be made in the conversion process.}}
}

@article{maps:37-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59-66}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{11143kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{How to Convince Don and Hermann to use Lua{\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:37-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-69}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{541kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The Punk Module}},
}

@article{maps:37-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{70-72}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{1169kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jonathan Kew}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}works: lowering the barrier to entry}},
 keywords  = {{editor, gui, interface, multi-platform, tex front-end, texshop}},
 abstract  = {{A multi-platform competitor for {\TeX}Shop is described:
	{\TeX}works.}}
}

@article{maps:37-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{73-89}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{912kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Norbert Preining}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Live 2008 and the {\TeX} Live Manager}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} Live 2008 has been released recently, and the DVDs
	are ready to go gold. This is the first release of {\TeX}
	Live shipping the {\TeX} Live Manager, tlmgr for short.
	Besides taking over some of the tasks from texconfig (which
	has never been available for Windows) it finally brings
	many new features to the {\TeX} Live world, most importantly
	the option for dynamic updates. This article will present
	the new {\TeX} Live Installer, the {\TeX} Live Manager, and at
	the end lists other changes in {\TeX} Live 2008.}}
}

@article{maps:37-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{90}},
 year      = {{2008}},
 volume    = {{37}},
 size      = {{107kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX} conference 2009}},
 keywords  = {{context, meeting, the hague, announcement}},
}

@book{maps:38,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-65}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{2577kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2009.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:38-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:38-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-11}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{282kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Do we need a `Cork' math font encoding?}},
 abstract  = {{The city of Cork has become widely known in the {\TeX}
	community, ever since it gave name to an encoding developed
	at the European {\TeX} conference of 1990. The `Cork'
	encoding, as it became known, was the first example
	of an 8-bit text font encoding that appeared after the
	release of {\TeX} 3.0, and was later followed by a number
	of other encodings based on similar design principles.
	As of today, the `Cork' encoding represents only one out
	of several possible choices of 8-bit subsets from a much
	larger repertoire of glyphs provided in fonts such as
	LatinModern or {\TeX}Gyre. Moreover, recent developments of
	new {\TeX} engines are making it possible to take advantage
	of OpenType font technology directly, largely eliminating
	the need for 8-bit font encodings altogether. During the
	entire time since 1990 math fonts have always been lagging
	behind the developments in text fonts. While the need
	for new math font encodings was recognized early on and
	while several encoding proposals have been discussed,
	none of them ever reached production quality or became
	widely used. In this paper, we review the situation
	of math fonts as of 2008, especially in view of recent
	developments of Unicode and OpenType math fonts such as
	the STIX fonts or Cambria Math. In particular, we try to
	answer the question whether a `Cork' math font encoding
	is still needed or whether Unicode and OpenType might
	eliminate the need for {\TeX}-specific math font encodings.}}
}

@article{maps:38-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{12-21}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{743kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{OpenType Math Illuminated}},
 abstract  = {{In recent years, we have seen the development of new
	{\TeX} engines, Xe{\TeX} and Lua{\TeX}, adopting OpenType font
	technology for providing Unicode typesetting support.
	While there are already plenty of OpenType text fonts
	available for use, both from the {\TeX} community and from
	commercial font suppliers, there is little support for
	OpenType math fonts so far. Ironically, it was left
	to Microsoft to develop a \textit{de facto} standard for
	OpenType math font information and to provide the first
	reference implementation of a full-featured OpenType
	math font. In order to develop the much-needed math
	support for LatinModern and {\TeX}Gyre fonts, it will be
	crucially important to develop a good understanding of the
	internals of OpenType math tables, much as it is necessary
	to develop a good understanding of Appendix G and {\TeX}'s
	\verb|\fontdimen| parameters to develop math support
	for traditional {\TeX} fonts. In this paper, we try to help
	improve the understanding of OpenType math internals,
	summarizing the parameters of OpenType math fonts as well
	as illustrating the similarities and differences between
	traditional {\TeX} math fonts and OpenType math fonts.}}
}

@article{maps:38-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{22-31}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{206kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Math in Lua{\TeX} 0.40}},
 abstract  = {{The math machinery in Lua{\TeX} has been completely overhauled
	in version 0.40. The handling of mathematics in Lua{\TeX}
	has been extended quite a bit compared to how {\TeX}82
	(and therefore PDFTEX) handles math. First, Lua{\TeX} adds
	primitives and extends some others so that Unicode input
	can be used easily. Second, all of {\TeX}82's internal special
	values (for example for operator spacing) have been made
	accessible and changeable via control sequences. Third,
	there are extensions that make it easier to use OpenType
	math fonts. And finally, there are some extensions that
	have been proposed in the past that are now added to
	the engine.}}
}

@article{maps:38-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{32-46}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{297kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Unicode Math in Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This article is complementary to Taco Hoekwater's article
	about the upgrade of the math subsystem in Lua{\TeX}. In
	parallel (also because we needed a testbed) the math
	subsystem of Con{\TeX}t has been upgraded. In this article
	I will describe how we deal with Unicode math using the
	regular Latin Modern and {\TeX} Gyre fonts and how we were
	able to clean up some of the more nasty aspects of math.}}
}

@article{maps:38-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-50}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{115kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Hartmut Henkel}},
 title     = {{Lua{\TeX} — Halfway}},
}

@article{maps:38-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{51-56}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Aditya Mahajan}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Programming: The past, the present, and the future}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, Lua{\TeX}, {\TeX} Programming}},
 abstract  = {{This article summarizes a recent
	thread on the Con{\TeX}t mailing list regarding table
	typesetting. To make the article interesting, I have
	changed the question and correspondingly modified the
	solutions.
	\begin{itemize}
	\item test1
	\item test2
	\end{itemize}
	Test3.}}
}

@article{maps:38-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-62}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paweł Jackowski}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} beauties and oddities}},
 abstract  = {{The Bacho{\TeX} 2009 conference continued the Pearls of {\TeX}
	Programming open session introduced in 2005 during which
	volunteers present {\TeX}-related tricks and shorties.}}
}

@article{maps:38-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{63-65}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{38}},
 size      = {{910kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Doe-het-zelf presentaties}},
 keywords  = {{Presentaties geometry wallpaper fancyhdr}},
 abstract  = {{This article shows how one can produce presentations
	in one's own style, without making use of dedicated
	presentation packages.}}
}

@book{maps:39,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-182}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{31635kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2009.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:39-01,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{3656kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX} 2009}},
}

@article{maps:39-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-2}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{347kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX} 2010}},
}

@article{maps:39-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-3}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{2243kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement:}},
}

@article{maps:39-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{4-4}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{519kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement:}},
}

@article{maps:39-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-33}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{17656kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{{\TeX} Education}},
 keywords  = {{2.5D, automatically numbered items, awareness, Babel{\TeX}, binary and trinary tree, 
  \verb|blue.tex|
, Con{\TeX}t, data integrity, education, Escher, Gabo, H-fractal, impossible cube, insight, Malevich, master class, MetaPost, minimal markup, PDF, PostScript, plain {\TeX}, regular surface, reuse, smiley, suprematism, {\TeX} Collection DVD, turtle graphics, yin yang}},
 abstract  = {{In this note a proposal about education is made
	and some education is done. Why not offer a macro
	writing Master Class, in plain {\TeX}\&MetaPost via
	internet, to endorse Minimal Markup and to strive after
	readable, adaptable, robust and reusable macros, by using
	paradigms? The macros are destined to be included in a
	library for reuse in Any{\TeX}. Educational issues are:
	language, awareness, insight, and {\TeX} nique proper.
	Courseware is indispensable. The personality of the
	teacher is all important. Self-study is not enough and
	considered dangerous. A few turtle graphics macros for
	line-drawing in plain {\TeX}, used for sketching a binary
	tree and fractals, are given. Knuth's \verb|gkppic|
	macros are used for flowcharts. Of both their advantages
	and disadvantages are mentioned. Graphics with curved
	lines, via PostScript and MetaPost, such as envelope,
	smiley, yin yang, Schröfers opart, and a circle covered
	by circles are included. 2.5D graphics emulated from
	Naum Gabo constructive works and Escher's impossible
	cube, both specified by data in 3D and projected on 2D
	with the viewing angles as parameters, are supplied.
	Without explanation Spirals on the sphere and a torus
	are included. Reuse of macros, pictures, references,
	tools, formats is relevant with my \verb|blue.tex|
	released in about 1995, as an unusual, integrated example,
	to be re-released under LPPL after review on the {\TeX} Live
	Distribution DVD of 2010. At the end a suggestion is done
	to extend MetaPost towards 3D.}}
}

@article{maps:39-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{34-58}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{2468kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{Lua{\TeX} lunatic}},
 keywords  = {{Lua, Python, dynamic loading, ffi.}},
 abstract  = {{luatex lunatic is an extension of the Lua language of
	luatex to permit embedding of a Python interpreter.
	A Python interpreter hosted in luatex allows macro
	programmers to use all modules from the Python standard
	library, allows importing of third modules, and permits
	the use of existing bindings of shared libraries or the
	creation of new bindings to shared libraries with the
	Python standard module ctypes. Some examples of such
	bindings, particularly in the area of scientific graphics,
	are presented and discussed. Intentionally the embedding
	of interpreter is limited to the python-2.6 release and to
	a luatex release for the Linux operating system (32 bit).}}
}

@article{maps:39-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{59-71}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{993kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Decorating CD-ROMs and DVDs}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, CD-ROM, DVD, label, booklet, inlay, layer.}},
 abstract  = {{After having burned a disk you sometimes need to add
	a label and, if the disk is stored in a jewel case, a
	booklet and an inlay for the jewel case. The following
	article describes how to create a label for the disk on a
	commercial label-sheet and a booklet and an inlay for the
	jewel case. The following solutions are based on Con{\TeX}t
	's built-in layer capabilities.}}
}

@article{maps:39-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{72-77}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{474kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The language mix}},
 abstract  = {{During the third Con{\TeX}t conference that ran in parallel
	to Euro{\TeX} 2009 in The Hague we had several sessions
	where MKIV was discussed and a few upcoming features
	were demonstrated. The next sections summarize some of
	that. It's hard to predict the future, especially because
	new possibilities show up once Lua{\TeX} is opened up more,
	so remarks about the future are not definitive.}}
}

@article{maps:39-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{78-85}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{615kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jelle Huisman}},
 title     = {{E16 \& DEtool: typesetting language data using Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes two recent projects in which
	Con{\TeX}t was used to typeset language data. The goal
	of project E16 was to typeset the 16th edition of the
	Ethnologue, an encyclopaedia of the languages of the
	world. The complexity of the data and the size of the
	project made this an interesting test case for the use
	of {\TeX} and Con{\TeX}t. The Dictionary Express tool (DEtool)
	is developed to typeset linguistic data in a dictionary
	layout. DEtool (which is part of a suite of linguistic
	software) uses Con{\TeX}t for the actual typesetting.}}
}

@article{maps:39-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{86-91}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{740kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{A network {\TeX}Live installation}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Live, MIKTEX, installers, editors, roaming profiles, Windows Vista}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes a network {\TeX}Live installation for
	Windows users and the context in which it operates.}}
}

@article{maps:39-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{92-98}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{651kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}},
 title     = {{Using {\TeX}'s language within a course about functional programming}},
 keywords  = {{Functional programming, {\TeX} programming, lexical vs. dynamic scope, macros, evaluation strategies.}},
 abstract  = {{We are in charge of a teaching unit, entitled \textit{Advanced Functional Programming}, for 4th-year university
	students in Computer Science. This unit is optional within
	the curriculum, so students attending it are especially
	interested in programming. The main language studied in
	this unit is Scheme, but an important part is devoted
	to general features, e.g., lexical vs. dynamic scoping,
	limited vs. unlimited extent, call by value vs. call by
	name or need, etc. As an alternative to other programming
	languages, {\TeX} allows us to show a language where dynamic
	and lexical scoping—\def vs. \edef—coexist. In
	addition, we can show how dynamic scoping allows users
	to customise {\TeX}'s behaviour. Other commands related
	to strategies are shown, too, e.g., \expandafter,
	\noexpand. More generally, {\TeX} commands are related to
	macros in more classical programming languages, and we
	can both emphasise difficulty related to macros and show
	non-artificial examples. So {\TeX} is not our unit's main
	focus, but provides significant help to illustrate some
	difficult notions.}}
}

@article{maps:39-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-104}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{648kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{A.-M. Aebischer, B. Aebischer, J.-M. Hufflen, F. Pétiard}},
 title     = {{Introducing new French-speaking users to {\LaTeX} quickly and convincingly}},
 keywords  = {{Teaching {\LaTeX}, successive steps of a course, lab-class-based curriculum, students' perception}},
 abstract  = {{For four university years, we had to introduce 2nd-year
	university students in Mathematics to {\LaTeX}. An important
	goal was to make them able to use {\LaTeX} when they are
	given some long homework in Mathematics the year after
	(3rd-year university). This teaching unit only included
	lab classes and was 15 hours long. We present our approach
	in detail and explain how it was perceived by students.}}
}

@article{maps:39-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{105-106}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{207kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Oriental {\TeX} by a dummy}},
 abstract  = {{This article is converted from the slides presented at
	the conference.}}
}

@article{maps:39-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{107-111}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{21367kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Stanislav Jan Šarman}},
 title     = {{Writing Pitman shorthand with Metafont and {\LaTeX}}},
 abstract  = {{With pen shorthand, the traditional speech-recording
	method, unwritten speech is at first manually captured and
	then transliterated into a digital text. We have built
	programs which reverse the second step of this process,
	i.e. transform text into shorthand. Here we present as a
	special case an online system, which converts English text
	into Pitman 2000 shorthand using Metafont and {\LaTeX}. The
	impact of our system on pattern recognition of handwritten
	shorthand and on stenography teaching is discussed.}}
}

@article{maps:39-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{112-130}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{722kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Péter Szabó}},
 title     = {{Optimizing PDF output size of {\TeX} documents}},
 abstract  = {{There are several tools for generating PDF output from
	a {\TeX} document. By choosing the appropriate tools and
	configuring them properly, it is possible to reduce
	the PDF output size by a factor of 3 or even more, thus
	reducing document download times, hosting and archiving
	costs. We enumerate the most common tools, and show
	how to configure them to reduce the size of text, fonts,
	images and cross-reference information embedded into the
	final PDF. We also analyze image compression in detail.
	We present a new tool called \verb|pdfsizeopt.py| which
	optimizes the size of embedded images and Type1 fonts, and
	removes object duplicates. We also propose a workflow for
	PDF size optimization, which involves configuration of {\TeX}
	tools, running \verb|pdfsizeopt.py| and the Multivalent
	PDF compressor as well.}}
}

@article{maps:39-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{131-135}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{735kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Generating PDF for e-reader devices}},
 abstract  = {{NotuDoc is a commercial Internet application that uses
	Con{\TeX}t for the on-the-fly generation of PDF documents
	for, amongst other things, the e-reader devices of iRex
	technologies. This articles offers a glimpse behind
	the scenes.}}
}

@article{maps:39-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{136-140}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{224kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Lua{\TeX} says goodbye to Pascal}},
 abstract  = {{Lua{\TeX} 0.50 features a complete departure from Pascal
	source code. This article explains a little of the why
	and how of this change.}}
}

@article{maps:39-18,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{141-142}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{1859kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{The Typesetting of Statistics}},
 abstract  = {{The Dutch translation of the 750 page textbook
	"Introduction to the Practice of Statistics" is typeset
	using a set of Con{\TeX}t macros. This article gives a short
	impression of the production process of this book, showing
	that the use of {\TeX} for the actual typesetting was perhaps
	the least cumbersome part of the process.}}
}

@article{maps:39-19,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{143-144}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{313kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MetaPost 2 project goals}},
 abstract  = {{Now that MetaPost 1.200 has been released the time
	has finally come to focus on the numerical precision
	extensions that we have been hinting at for some years
	already. Version 2.000 of MetaPost will have a runtime
	configurable precision and infinite numeric input range.}}
}

@article{maps:39-20,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{145-165}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{783kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{John Trapp}},
 title     = {{Using {\LaTeX} as a computing language}},
}

@article{maps:39-21,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{166-178}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{480kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Experiences typesetting mathematical physics}},
 keywords  = {{math typesetting, physics, notation}},
 abstract  = {{Twenty years ago, the author was just about to start his
	university studies in math and physics. A year or so
	later, he not only discovered a fascinating program called
	{\TeX}, but he also got involved in a project of typesetting
	a series of lecture notes which eventually became book
	manuscripts for a complete course in theoretical physics.
	In the end, he spent about seven years working on typing,
	editing, revising, and formatting more than 2500 book
	pages containing a large amount of math. While there
	are many experiences from such a project one could talk
	about, ranging from issues of project management to
	document design and layout, this talk will focus on two
	specific topics: adapting {\LaTeX} to deal with the specific
	requirements of mathematical notation in physics and
	fine-tuning the appearance of math formulas.}}
}

@article{maps:39-22,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{179-181}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{359kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Abstracts without papers}},
}

@article{maps:39-23,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{182-182}},
 year      = {{2009}},
 volume    = {{39}},
 size      = {{191kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Participant list}},
}

@book{maps:40,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-83}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{6323kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2010.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:40-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{92kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:40-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-8}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{53kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{The font name mess}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t mkiv, luatex, font names}},
}

@article{maps:40-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{9-65}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{2437kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Circle Inversions}},
 keywords  = {{Apollonius, Cabri, circle inversion, circle covered by touching circles, circle limit, circle of anti-similitude, Coxeter, Descartes circle theorem, Escher, Java, Mathematica, Metafont, MetaPost, minimal markup, mixed-language programming, orthogonal circles, overloading polymorphic operator, Peaucellier-Lipkin linkage, (partial) pivoting, plain {\TeX}, PostScript library, radical circle, reflection, Rerich, Sandaku, Soddy, solving 3X3 linear equations}},
 abstract  = {{Circle inversions are exercised and drawn with
	PostScript operators which are also included in this
	plain {\TeX} document. Interesting pictures will be shown,
	resulting from inversion of straight line pieces and
	other procedures. I demonstrate a way to calculate
	the circle of anti-similitude, by which two circles are
	inverses of each other. Furthermore, I show how one can
	transform two distinct circles into two concentric circles.
	How to draw a circle orthogonal to a circle which passes
	through one or two points within the circle is done via
	the circle inversion technique. The above is generalized
	into finding the circle which cuts the boundary at an
	arbitrary angle, e.g. 80 degrees, and passes through a
	point within the circle. Orthogonal circular arcs can
	form an Escher-like grid, as he used in his Circle Limits.
	Four variants of the grid of Circle Limits III have been
	included. The first cuts the boundary at 80 degrees, the
	second at 90 degrees, and the third with a mixture of both.
	The fourth is Coxeter's solution. A smiley pattern is
	inverted in (orthogonal) circular arcs within a circle
	with the aid of PostScript's \verb|pathforall| by
	(repeated use of) circle inversion. How to draw a circle
	orthogonal to 1, 2 or 3 other distinct circles is shown.
	Apollonius problem is solved by the use of the circle
	inversion transformation and also by transforming the 3
	quadratic equations into 1 non-linear equation and a 2x2
	system of linear equations, and solving these equations
	in PostScript and MetaPost. A closer look yielded that we
	only have to solve one quadratic equation in r, the radius
	of the wanted circle, in order to obtain the solution of
	Apollonius problem. Coding problems in MetaPost will be
	mentioned and circumvented. I demonstrate the way one can
	create and use a PostScript library. A plea is made for
	creating and maintaining a PostScript library of operators,
	graphics and utilities. A snapshot of this growing library
	is included. A few tiny but handy PostScript operators
	are given next to a (numerical) PostScript operator to
	solve a 3x3 linear system of equations, where partial
	pivoting is implemented and the calculations are done with
	the accuracy of the underlying computer arithmetic, which
	is much better than MetaPost's accuracy for the moment. How
	to overload a PostScript operator, e.g. \verb|length|,
	is given. The question whether the PostScript library can
	be used in MetaPost will be answered. The pearl of the
	paper is twofold: first the rediscovery that Apollonius
	problem is solved by the solution of a quadratic
	equation, and second the operator \verb|Apollonius|,
	which reflects this rediscovery and can be used to obtain
	all 8 solutions of Apollonius problem. Another gem is
	\verb|Apollonius2|, which is suited for the case that
	one circle contains the other two. The culmination of
	it all is the operator \verb|radical| for drawing the
	radical circle of three given distinct circles.}}
}

@article{maps:40-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{66-66}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{324kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Euro{\TeX} 2010}},
}

@article{maps:40-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{67-71}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{60kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Grouping in hybrid environments}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t mkiv, luatex, grouping, underbar, overbar, overstrike, text backgrounds}},
}

@article{maps:40-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{72-72}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{2213kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement: 4th Con{\TeX}t Meeting}},
}

@article{maps:40-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{73-79}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{417kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{OpenType PostScript fonts with unusual units-per-em values}},
 keywords  = {{Lua{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t Mark IV, OpenType, FontMatrix.}},
 abstract  = {{OpenType fonts with Postscript outline are usually defined
	in a dimensionless workspace of 1000x1000 units per em
	(upm). Adobe Reader exhibits a strange behaviour with
	pdf documents that embed an OpenType PostScript font with
	unusual upm: this paper describes a solution implemented
	by Lua{\TeX} that resolves this problem.}}
}

@article{maps:40-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{80-83}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{40}},
 size      = {{1035kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Een uittreksel uit de recente bijdragen in het CTAN archief}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes some recent contributions to the
	CTAN archive (and other internet sources.) The selection
	reflects what interests me and what I think others may
	be interested in. It is, therefore, a personal choice,
	not a comprehensive review.}}
}

@book{maps:41,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-92}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{7937kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2010.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:41-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{27kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:41-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-2}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement:}},
}

@article{maps:41-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-8}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{80kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{tlcontrib.metatex.org}},
 keywords  = {{{\TeX}Live, TLContrib, distribution, contribution, packages}},
 abstract  = {{TLContrib is a distribution and associated website that
	hosts contributed, supplementary packages for {\TeX}Live.
	The packages on TLContrib are those not distributed inside
	{\TeX}Live proper for one or several of the following reasons:
	because the are not free software according to the FSF
	guidelines, because they contain an executable update,
	because they are not available on CTAN, or because
	they represent an intermediate release for testing.
	Anything related to {\TeX} that can not be on {\TeX}Live but
	can still legally be distributed over the Internet can
	have its place on TLContrib.}}
}

@article{maps:41-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{9-13}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{720kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{Nieuws van CTAN}},
 abstract  = {{Dit artikel beschrijft een aantal recente bijdragen uit
	het CTAN archief (en andere bronnen op het Internet).
	De selectie is gebaseerd op wat ik zelf interessant vind
	en wat ik denk dat voor veel anderen interessant is. Het
	is dus een persoonlijke keuze. Het heeft niet de bedoeling
	om een volledig overzicht te geven.}}
}

@article{maps:41-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{14-18}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{51kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Up to Con{\TeX}t MkVI}},
}

@article{maps:41-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{19-24}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hartmut Henkel}},
 title     = {{Lua{\TeX} 0.60}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX} Live 2010 will contain Lua{\TeX} 0.60. This article
	gives an overview of the changes between this version and
	the version on last year's {\TeX} Live. Highlights of this
	release: CWEB code base, dynamic loading of lua modules,
	various font subsystem improvements including support for
	Apple .dfont font collection files, braced input file
	names, extended PDF LUA table, and access to the line
	breaking algorithm from LUA code.}}
}

@article{maps:41-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{25-30}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{176kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paweł Jackowski}},
 title     = {{Luna - my side of the moon}},
}

@article{maps:41-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{31-36}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{105kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{PDF/A-1a in MKIV}},
 keywords  = {{Lua{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t MkIV, PDF/A, color, font.}},
 abstract  = {{I present some considerations on electronic document
	archiving and how MKIV supports the ISO Standard 19500-1
	Level A Conformance (PDF/A-1a:2005), an ISO standard for
	long-term document archiving.}}
}

@article{maps:41-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{37-44}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{149kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Paul Isambert}},
 title     = {{Three things you can do with Lua{\TeX} ...}},
}

@article{maps:41-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{45-48}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{70kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{John C. Haltiwanger}},
 title     = {{Toward Subtext}},
 keywords  = {{generative typesetting, multi-output, translation layer, pre-format}},
 abstract  = {{The demands of typesetting have shifted significantly
	since the original inception of {\TeX}. Donald Knuth strove
	to develop a platform that would prove stable enough to
	produce the same output for the same input over time
	(assuming the absence of bugs). Pure {\TeX} is a purely
	formal language, with no practical notion of the semantic
	characteristics of the text it is typesetting. The
	popularity of {\LaTeX} is largely related to its attempt
	to solve this problem. The flexibility of Con{\TeX}t lends
	it to a great diversity of workflows. However, document
	creation is not straight-forward enough to lend itself
	to widespread adoption by a layman audience, nor is it
	particularly flexible in relation to its translatability
	into other important output formats such as HTML. Subtext
	is a proposed system of \textit{ generative typesetting}
	designed for providing an easy to use abstraction
	for interfacing with {\TeX}, HTML, and other significant
	markup languages and output formats. By providing a
	\textit{mutable} translation layer in which both syntax
	and the actual effects of translation are defined within
	simple configuration files, the infinitely large set of
	typographic workflows can be accomodated without being
	known in advance. At the same time, once a workflow has
	been designed within the Subtext system, it should enjoy
	the same long-term stability found in the {\TeX} system
	itself. This article briefly explains the conditions,
	motivations, and initial design of the emerging system.}}
}

@article{maps:41-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-67}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Typesetting in LUA using Lua{\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:41-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{68-78}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{782kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}},
 title     = {{Processing "Computed" Texts}},
 keywords  = {{Typesetting computed texts, {\TeX}, {\LaTeX}, Con{\TeX}t, Xe{\TeX}, Lua{\TeX}, xml, xslt, character maps, XQuery, xsl-fo.}},
 abstract  = {{This article is a comparison of methods that may be used
	to derive texts to be typeset by a word processor. By
	`derive', we mean that such texts are extracted from a
	larger structure, which can be viewed as a database. The
	present standard for such a structure uses an xml-like
	format, and we give an overview of the available tools
	for this derivation task.}}
}

@article{maps:41-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{79-90}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{4185kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{à la Mondrian}},
 keywords  = {{Art, color, cubism, De Stijl, golden ratio, Mondrian, pointillism, pseudo-random numbers, MetaPost, PostScript, Toorop}},
 abstract  = {{Mondriaan has worked most of his live as an abstract
	painter, influenced by the magic realism of Jan Toorop,
	and by Cubism and Pointillism. He was member of De Stijl
	and has lived in Paris and in New York. Some of his
	work seems to have been composed randomly, though he was
	very precise, as witnessed by the overpainting of various
	squares in his Victory Boogie-Woogie. Mondriaan's `random'
	work \verb|Composition in Line 1916|, is emulated and
	varied in MetaPost and PostScript, in color, with the
	lines (position and size) randomly chosen. He was the
	first painter to frame work by Lozenges. Division of the
	sides of his \verb|Lozenge with 2 lines| is near to the
	golden ratio. Emulated Lozenges obeying the golden ratio
	have been included. The variations look nevertheless
	Mondriaan-esque.}}
}

@article{maps:41-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{91-92}},
 year      = {{2010}},
 volume    = {{41}},
 size      = {{1770kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{NTG Najaarsbijeenkomst 2010}},
}

@book{maps:42,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-110}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{13201kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2011.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:42-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:42-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{2-2}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{2533kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Announcement: TUG 2011}},
}

@article{maps:42-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{3668kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Koen Wybo}},
 title     = {{Review of \textit{Typesetting tables with {\LaTeX}} by Herbert Voss}},
}

@article{maps:42-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-6}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{472kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Nicolaas J.I. Mars}},
 title     = {{Review of\textit{ Typesetting mathematics with {\LaTeX}} by Herbert Voss}},
}

@article{maps:42-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{7-14}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{153kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{A Personal Organizer: PocketDiary}},
 keywords  = {{Maps, Context, module, lua}},
 abstract  = {{Sometimes, a cheap personal organizer on paper can come in
	handy. This solution prepared in Con{\TeX}t MKIV provides a
	range of options to set up such a personal organizer. The
	point is, that the PocketDiary is printed on a single sided
	A4 landscape sheet of paper and then folded into a pocket
	size booklet hereby preventing that unprinted/empty pages
	are seen. The PocketDiary is easy to make and after 1 week
	it is simply replaced with a subsequent booklet. A detailed
	description is given of the system and how to set up a
	production file. At the end of the article instructions
	are included how to fold the booklet.}}
}

@article{maps:42-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{15-23}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{511kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Tagged PDF}},
}

@article{maps:42-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{24-26}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{94kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Inter-character spacing and ligatures}},
}

@article{maps:42-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-33}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{581kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{8th March}},
 keywords  = {{Adobe, afii, ASCII, CID, Cyrillic, EPSF, encoding vector, keyboard layout, lemniscate, minimal encapsulated PostScript, OTF, plain {\TeX}, Photoshop, PSlib, qwerty, {\TeX} works}},
 abstract  = {{An OTF with Cyrillic —- keyboard and glyphs —- is used in
	PostScript for an 8th March congratulation. The wired-in
	ASCII code table in {\TeX} inhibits keyboarding Cyrillic.}}
}

@article{maps:42-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{34-42}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{255kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{Extending CTX with PARI/GP}},
 keywords  = {{Lua{\TeX}, Con{\TeX}t MARKIV, binding, PARI/GP}},
 abstract  = {{This paper shows how to build a binding to PARI GP, the
	well known computer algebra system, for Con{\TeX}t MKiV,
	showing also some examples on how to solve some common
	basic algebraic problems.}}
}

@article{maps:42-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{43-54}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{2969kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Graham Douglas}},
 title     = {{Customised {\LaTeX} page layout with Lua{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The relationship between {\LaTeX}'s page layout parameters
	and the conventional desktop publishing (DTP) model of
	a page are explored and formulae to map between them are
	presented. A sample implementation of those formulae in Lua
	is provided, showing how to achieve customised page layouts
	in Lua{\TeX}. The placement of crop marks is addressed, and
	a technique for preparing and adding them to typeset pages
	is discussed.}}
}

@article{maps:42-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{55-56}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{44kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Lua{\TeX} Lua modules on Linux}},
 abstract  = {{How to use the dynamic Lua module loading abilities in
	Lua{\TeX} under Linux or similar systems.}}
}

@article{maps:42-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{57-68}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Thomas A. Schmitz}},
 title     = {{Using Con{\TeX}t with Databases}},
}

@article{maps:42-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-110}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{42}},
 size      = {{2243kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Gabo's Torsion}},
 keywords  = {{2.5D, art, AFII, ASCII, astroid, Bernstein polynomials, BoundingBox, Bézier cubic, de Casteljau algorithm, ConTEXt, cropping on-the-fly, EPSF, Gabo, hyperboloid, METAFONT, MetaPost, minimal encapsulated PostScript, plain {\TeX}, projection, PSlib, stringed surface, TEXworks}},
 abstract  = {{Gabo's Torsion is emulated in EPSF, Encapsulated
	PostScript File format. Gabo's constructive art,
	Math, Computer Graphics and the use of PostScript are
	touched upon. Whether PostScript is a suitable language
	for projection and drawing 3D objects on paper is
	experienced. An introduction to PostScript aimed at EPSF
	use, in a nutshell, is included. How to obtain cropped
	pictures along with the conversion to .pdf is mentioned. An
	interesting observation is made: Bézier cubics, specified
	by begin point, the control points and the end point,
	are invariant under (oblique parallel) projection, which
	allows to project B-cubics efficiently. The efficient
	projection of (approximated) circles and ellipses has been
	addressed. For the evaluation of B-cubics de Casteljau's
	algorithm is used. Emulations in EPSF of Gabo's Linear
	Construction in Space No 1 and 2, of one of his Spheric
	Themes, and his Linear Construction Suspended, are also
	included. For the MetaFont afficionados my interactive
	version of old is also included.}}
}

@book{maps:43,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{64-337}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{29888kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Ján Kula}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2011.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:43-01,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{69-69}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{77kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ján Kula, Pavel Stříž}},
 title     = {{Preface}},
}

@article{maps:43-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{74-77}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{197kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Selected Abstracts from TEXperience}},
}

@article{maps:43-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{78-83}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Abstracts without Papers}},
}

@article{maps:43-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{84-90}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{245kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Arthur Reutenauer}},
 title     = {{Mobile TEX: Porting TEX to the iPad}},
}

@article{maps:43-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-101}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{131kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{Playing with Flash in ConTEXt-mkiv}},
}

@article{maps:43-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{102-115}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{1107kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{MicroTalk — pdfsplit}},
}

@article{maps:43-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{116-126}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{1070kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ulrik Vieth}},
 title     = {{Experiences Typesetting OpenType Math with LuaLATEX and XELATEX}},
}

@article{maps:43-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{127-133}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{481kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater, Hartmut Henkel}},
 title     = {{LuaTEX 0.60}},
}

@article{maps:43-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{134-139}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{615kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{LuaTEX 0.63 Short Reference}},
}

@article{maps:43-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{140-146}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{109kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{John Haltiwanger}},
 title     = {{Subtext — A Proposed Processual Grammar for a Multi-Output Pre-Format}},
}

@article{maps:43-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{147-156}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{776kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Arranging Pages}},
}

@article{maps:43-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{157-165}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{631kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Libor Sarga}},
 title     = {{Guide TEX It: Uneasy Beginnings of Typesetters from the Perspective of Non-Typesetters}},
}

@article{maps:43-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{166-169}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{106kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jan Přichystal}},
 title     = {{Typesetting of Tables and Lists and Other New Features in TEXonWeb}},
}

@article{maps:43-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{170-181}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{8430kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Timothy Eyre}},
 title     = {{ConTEXt for 'Zines}},
}

@article{maps:43-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{182-300}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{4886kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{MkIV Hybrid Technology}},
}

@article{maps:43-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{301-308}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{186kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Tomáž Hála}},
 title     = {{Marking Proof-sheets in Publishing Practice and Its Implementation in the TEX System}},
}

@article{maps:43-17,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{309-332}},
 year      = {{2011}},
 volume    = {{43}},
 size      = {{612kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karel Píška}},
 title     = {{Fonts with Complex OpenType Tables}},
}

@book{maps:44,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-126}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{8726kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2013.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:44-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:44-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-7}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Does {\TeX} have a future}},
}

@article{maps:44-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{8-12}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{772kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{CD and DVD labels}},
 keywords  = {{Adobe, afii, CD-ROM, Con{\TeX}t, DVD, EPSF, extending encoding vector, label, lightscribe, minimal encapsulated PostScript, numero sign, OTF, Photoshop, plain {\TeX}, PSlib, {\TeX} works}},
 abstract  = {{How to make CD and DVD labels by PostScript, to be printed
	on prefab glued paper, assisted by Photoshop for the
	conversion of an illustration into EPSF, is explained.}}
}

@article{maps:44-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{496kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Koen Wybo}},
 title     = {{Review of\textit{ {\LaTeX} and Friends} by Marc van Dongen}},
 abstract  = {{Zeggen dat {\LaTeX} niet gemakkelijk is om aan te leren,
	is een open deur intrappen. Met een degelijk boek als
	\textit{{\LaTeX} and Friends} word je meer dan behoorlijk
	op weg gezet. Saying that {\LaTeX} is not easy to learn is
	a truism. With a good book like {\LaTeX} and Friends you will
	more than adequately be put on the road.}}
}

@article{maps:44-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{15-26}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{137kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{C.M. Fortuin}},
 title     = {{Kegelsneden benaderen / Conic approximation}},
 abstract  = {{Kegelsneden kunnen systematisch worden benaderd
	door hoekpunten van een (deel van een) omgeschreven
	veelhoek. Een algoritme wordt ontwikkeld voor het bepalen
	van de steunpunten van een iteratieve derdegraads
	"Bézier" benadering van kegelsneden. Voor de start
	zijn drie punten nodig. Het algoritme is onafhankelijk
	van de stand van de kegelsnede. Conic sections can
	systematically be approximated by vertices of a (part
	of a) circumscribed polygon. An algorithm is developed
	for the determination of the support points of a third
	degree iterative "Bezier" approach of a conic. Initially,
	three points are needed. The algorithm is independent of
	the position of the conic section.}}
}

@article{maps:44-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{27-48}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{2511kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Pythagoras Trees in PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{2.5D, Adobe, ALGOL, art, backtracking, BASIC, CWI, Deubert, EPSF, FIFO, fractal, fractal geometry, IDE, Julia set, Lauwerier, Lévy, LIFO, Lindenmayer, minimal encapsulated PostScript, minimal plain {\TeX}, Pascal triangle, Photoshop, production rule, Pythagoras Tree, PSlib, self-similarity, Sierpiński sieve, sentinel, {\TeX} works, (adaptable) user space, Word}},
 abstract  = {{Pythagoras Trees are drawn elegantly in PostScript,
	varied by randomness, colour and the use of curves.
	Lindenmayer production rules for systematic PS program
	development are enriched by PS concepts.}}
}

@article{maps:44-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{49-78}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{1672kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Classical Math Fractals in PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat Pro, Adobe, art, attractor, backtracking, BASIC, Cantor Dust, C curve, dragon curve, EPSF, FIFO, fractal, fractal dimension, fractal geometry, Game of Life, Hilbert curve, IDE (Integrated development Environment), IFS (Iterated Function System), infinity, kronkel (twist), Lauwerier, Lévy, LIFO, Lindenmayer, minimal encapsulated PostScript, minimal plain {\TeX}, Minkowski, Monte Carlo, Photoshop, production rule, PSlib, self-similarity, Sierpiński (island, carpet), Star fractals, TACP, {\TeX} works, Turtle Graphics, (adaptable) user space, von Koch (island), Word}},
 abstract  = {{Classical mathematical fractals in BASIC are explained
	and converted into mean-and-lean EPSF defs, of which the
	.eps pictures are delivered in .pdf format and cropped to
	the prescribed BoundingBox when processed by Acrobat Pro,
	to be included easily in pdf(La){\TeX}, Word, ... documents.
	The EPSF fractals are transcriptions of the Turtle
	Graphics BASIC codes or programmed anew, recursively,
	based on the production rules of oriented objects. The
	Lindenmayer production rules are enriched by PostScript
	concepts. Experience gained in converting a {\TeX} script
	into WYSIWYG Word is communicated.}}
}

@article{maps:44-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{79-90}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{125kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Exam Papers Revisited}},
 keywords  = {{exam, examination, collection, problem, question, multiple choice, Con{\TeX}t, XML, HTML}},
 abstract  = {{Described is a module for the consistent production and
	maintenance of student examinations. It can typeset
	questions with long or short answers, yes/no questions
	and multiple choice. The questions are formulated as XML
	documents and access Con{\TeX}t through a special interface
	with HTML-like syntax.}}
}

@article{maps:44-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{91-96}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{83kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{A bit of HTML and a bit of Con{\TeX}t}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, HTML, XML, include, vocabulary}},
 abstract  = {{Described is a module for the typesetting of a subset of
	HTML operators. These can be used to build data sets
	in XML with HTML as formatting elements and have them
	typeset in Con{\TeX}t. Other features are the inclusion of
	predefined content and provision for language localized
	words and expressions.}}
}

@article{maps:44-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{97-105}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{102kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Yet Another Table}},
 keywords  = {{Con{\TeX}t, table}},
 abstract  = {{Described is a module for the typesetting of tables.
	The module resembles the {\LaTeX} tabular environment but
	is in fact based on a much older package, the origins of
	which are lost to the author.}}
}

@article{maps:44-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{106-108}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{102kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sietse Brouwer}},
 title     = {{Making the Con{\TeX}t wiki easier to improve}},
 keywords  = {{documentation, projects, wiki, infrastructure, Con{\TeX}t}},
 abstract  = {{An effort is underway to encourage both reading and
	editing of the Con{\TeX}t wiki. This article names nine
	concrete improvements that are part of this effort, and
	makes a case for each of them. These nine items are the
	following. To impose structure and to ease navigation:
	predictable article names; navboxes; and a simple Main
	Page. To coordinate efforts: a `How this wiki works' page;
	a village pump; and templates for flagging problems. To
	make things easy for our editors: templates for common
	things; template documentation; sandboxes and testcases
	for templates.}}
}

@article{maps:44-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{109-113}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{67kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MetaPost: Numerical engines}},
 abstract  = {{After years of talks about future plans for MetaPost 2.0,
	finally real progress is being made. This paper introduces
	a pre-release of MetaPost 2 that can optionally use IEEE
	floating point for its internal calculations instead of
	the traditional 32-bit integers.}}
}

@article{maps:44-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{114-122}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Simple Spreadsheets}},
 abstract  = {{A Con{\TeX}t spreadsheet module, based on Lua.}}
}

@article{maps:44-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{123-126}},
 year      = {{2013}},
 volume    = {{44}},
 size      = {{2349kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{5th International Con{\TeX}t Meeting}},
 abstract  = {{Conference report.}}
}

@book{maps:45,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-168}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{36589kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2012.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:45-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{25kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Conference program}},
}

@article{maps:45-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-46}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{17707kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Recreational use of {\TeX}\&Co}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat Pro, Adobe, art, automatic mark-up, backtracking, BLUe, Blue Sky research, bridge, Caroll, chess, Cohen, ConTeX t, crosswords, dancing text, Deubert, Ensor, EPSF, Escher, FIFO, font charts, function-grapher previewer, Gabo, Hagen, Henderson, IDE (Integrated Development Environment), impossible figures, Jackowski, Lancaster, Lauwerier, LIFO, Lindenmayer, magic square, Malevich, Margritte, MetaFun, MetaPost, Metafont, MetaType1, minimal encapsulated PostScript, minimal mark-up, minimal plain TeX, Mondriaan, Monte Carlo, musiX.tex, mppreviewer, Nolde, Photoshop, pi-decimals, projection, PSlib, PSTricks, PSView, Pythagoras tree, Rycko, Schrofer, Soto, Taupin, TeX works, tic-tac-toe, Vasarely}},
 abstract  = {{Recreational use of TeX\&Co in my work is enumerated
	and elucidated. Examples from MetaFun, from Lancaster's
	Fonts for Free, from Jackowski\&Rycko metafont logo,
	and from Word have been borrowed. PostScript and let TeX
	insert mark-up, will be the main subjects of discussion.
	PostScript is not sufficient for graphics. Now and then
	MetaPost is used to specify a problem in a declarative
	way, or at the end Photoshop is used to enrich the
	graphics interactively by colour gradients.  Moreover, for
	drawing emulations of 3D objects, projection techniques
	are indispensable. Emulations of Escher's impossible cube
	and of Gabo's objects are included as 3D-examples. All my
	pictures have a recreational flavour because none has been
	triggered by external practical need. Interesting is the
	combined use of Turtle Graphics and recursion. TeX codes
	and PostScript codes are compared, although they are like
	apples and pears intrinsically incomparable, but ... have
	been used for the same purpose. The most astonishing is
	that so much from BLUe.tex passed by unnoticed.  Pic.dat
	for TeX-alone pictures has received its cousin library,
	PSlib.eps, for PostScript pictures. The TeX-MF-flow
	picture has been updated and included, next to a
	screen-shot of a nowadays IDE TeX works. In this note I'll
	try to draw your interest, to persuade you, kind reader,
	to look at the contents, the paradigms, and the kernel and
	modules set-up of BLUe.tex. My sincere hope is that
	BLUe.tex will be saved from oblivion, that the paradigms
	used will be adhered. The serious undertone in TeX is
	about minimal mark-up or better still the absence of user
	mark-up, where TeX will insert the mark-up. The serious
	undertone in PostScript is about printing along paths,
	especially for the special cases where the paths are
	implicit.  Handy and convenient is the extended PSlib.eps
	to over 300 pictures.
	Critics on TeX\&Co and pdfTeX have been included, next
	to my wishes.  After the presentation PSTtricks was shown
	to me, and my comment on it is included.}}
}

@article{maps:45-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{47-97}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{12828kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Julia fractals in PostScript - Fractal Geometry II}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat Pro, Adobe, art, attractor, backtracking, Barnsley, BASIC, bifurcation, Cauchy convergence, chaos, circle symmetry, dynamical systems, EPSF, escape-time algorithm, Feigenbaum constant, fractal dimension D, Fractalus package, FIFO, fractal geometry, IDE (Integrated development Environment), IFS (Iterated Function System), Julia, Lauwerier, Mandelbrot, mathematical software, minimal encapsulated PostScript, minimal plain TeX, Monte Carlo, mu-geometry, periodic doubling, Photoshop, PSlib, PSView, repeller, self-similarity, software engineering, Stuif's previewer, TeX works, (adaptable) user space, Verhulst growth model, Winfract package, XaoS fractal package}},
 abstract  = {{Lauwerier's BASIC codes for visualization of the usual
	Julia fractals: JULIAMC, JULIABS, JULIAF, JULIAD, JULIAP,
	of the Mandelbrot fractal MANDELx, MANDIS, MANDET and his
	codes for the advanced circular symmetric Julia fractals
	JULIAS, JULIASYMm, JULIASYM, FRACSYMm, as well as the
	classical 1D bifurcation picture Collet, have been
	converted into PostScript defs.  Examples of use are
	included. A glimpse into Chaos theory, in order to
	understand the principles and peculiarities underlying
	Julia sets, is given. Bifurcation diagrams of the Verhulst
	model of limited growth and of the Julia quadratic
	dynamical system --- M-fractal --- have been included.
	Barnsley's triples: fractal, IFS and equivalent dynamical
	system are introduced. How to use the beginnings of
	colours in PostScript is explained. How to obtain Julia
	fractals via Stuif's Julia fractal viewer, and via the
	special fractal packages Winfract, XaoS, and Fractalus is
	dealt with. From BASIC codes to PostScript library defs
	entails software engineering skills. The paper exhibits
	experimental fractal geometry, practical use of minimal
	TeX, as well as ample \verb|EPSF| programming, and is
	the result of my next step in acquainting myself with
	Lauwerier's 10+ years work on fractals.}}
}

@article{maps:45-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{98-98}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Mari Voipio}},
 title     = {{Craf{\TeX}}},
}

@article{maps:45-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{99-100}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{49kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MetaPost: PNG Output}},
 abstract  = {{The latest version of Metapost (1.80x) has a third output
	backend: it is now possible to generate PNG bitmaps
	directly from within Metapost.}}
}

@article{maps:45-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{101-106}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{514kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Leo Arnold}},
 title     = {{Multiple documents from one source}},
 keywords  = {{mathematics, problem sheet, shell escape}},
 abstract  = {{In general LaTeX will produce only one output document.
	This paradigm shifts when harnessing the power of the
	so-called shell escape. We will show how to produce
	multiple output documents with differing content from one
	single source document.  The principle is developed step
	by step illustrating a typical application in academic
	teaching. Focusing on mathematical problems we then
	explore two ways of automating calculations by integrating
	free software into the LaTeX run.}}
}

@article{maps:45-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{107-107}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{28kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Patrick Gundlach}},
 title     = {{Database publishing with Lua{\TeX} and the speedata Publisher}},
}

@article{maps:45-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{108-111}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{74kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MetaPost path resolution isolated}},
 abstract  = {{A new interface in MPLib version 1.800 allows one to
	resolve path choices programmatically, without the need to
	go through the MetaPost input language.}}
}

@article{maps:45-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{112-115}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{63kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{Parsing PDF content streams with Lua{\TeX}}},
 abstract  = {{The new pdfparser library in LuaTeX allows parsing of
	external PDF content streams directly from within a LuaTeX
	document. This paper explains its origin and usage.}}
}

@article{maps:45-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{116-123}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{585kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Luigi Scarso}},
 title     = {{MFLua: Instrumentation of MF with Lua}},
 abstract  = {{We present MetafontLUA, a Metafont version which is
	capable of code instrumentation and has an embedded Lua
	interpreter that allows glyphs curves extraction and
	post-processing. We also show and discuss an example of a
	Metafont source processed by MetafontLUA to output an
	OpenType font.}}
}

@article{maps:45-11,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{124-127}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{58kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{Conference portfolio}},
 abstract  = {{In accordance to the conference's theme, a workshop for
	making a portfolio binder has been held. The portfolio was
	made so it could carry the papers for the conference, such
	as preprints of the proceedings, additional papers and the
	carpenter's pencil given to each participant. The
	construction is made from a single sheet of cardboard with
	folded flaps along three sides, so that it completely
	envelopes the content. The portfolio is held closed by a
	black elastic band.}}
}

@article{maps:45-12,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{128-154}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{3321kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen, Idris Samawi Hamid}},
 title     = {{Oriental {\TeX}: optimizing paragraphs}},
}

@article{maps:45-13,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{155-162}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{129kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}},
 title     = {{mlBib{\TeX} and Its New Extensions}},
 keywords  = {{BibTeX, mlBibTeX, mlbibtex2xml, mlbiblatex, mlbibcontext, LaTeX, ConTeXt MkII, ConTeXt MkIV, LuaTeX, biblatex package, bib module}},
 abstract  = {{These last years, mlBibTeX's kernel functions have been
	reused and extended in order to put new programs about
	bibliographies into action. Examples are the \verb|hal|
	program, allowing an open archive site to be populated,
	the \verb|mlbiblatex| program, building bibliographies
	suitable for the biblatex package, the
	\verb|mlbibcontext| program, doing the same task for
	ConTeXt documents. We show how all these programs are
	organised, and explain how some operations can be refined
	or extended. For a point of view related to efficiency,
	the programs \verb|mlbiblatex| and \verb|mlbibcontext|
	are written using pgScheme only, so they are more
	efficient than analogous programs that would interpret a
	.bst bibliography style of BibTeX.}}
}

@article{maps:45-14,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{163-164}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{66kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jean-Michel Hufflen}},
 title     = {{Demonstration of the `mlbibcontext' Program}},
 abstract  = {{This short statement aims to sketch the broad outlines of
	the presentation performed at the 6th ConTeXt meeting.}}
}

@article{maps:45-15,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{165-166}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{42kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{Abstracts without papers}},
}

@article{maps:45-16,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{167-168}},
 year      = {{2012}},
 volume    = {{45}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{(anonymous)}},
 title     = {{participant list}},
}

@book{maps:46,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-108}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{17284kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2015.2}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:46-01,
 type      = {{message}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{29kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel}},
}

@article{maps:46-02,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{6519kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Erik Frambach}},
 title     = {{Memories of Kees}},
}

@article{maps:46-03,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{5-7}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{496kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Absil}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}/Shop Review}},
 abstract  = {{This paper is an introduction to and review of the {\TeX}/Shop
	Mac OS X program for typesetting {\TeX}/ document source
	files and previewing the output. Features of this tool
	and user experience will be presented. This information
	might be helpful to the novice user, looking for a {\TeX}/
	typesetting environment on the Mac.}}
}

@article{maps:46-04,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{8-12}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{295kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Willi Egger}},
 title     = {{TextMate}},
 abstract  = {{When editing text or code on a Mac, TextMate is an
	excellent choice. It offers an abundance of features
	which makes it a great editor for {\TeX} as well as the
	macro-packages {\LaTeX} and Con{\TeX}t. Editing HTML, XML and
	CSS is also supported, as are many other programming
	languages. Specially tagged texts are quick and easy to
	write, thanks to autocompletion and placing of start-
	and end-tags. Further the editor supports projects
	— a sidebar to the editing window that shows
	files belonging to the project. Another useful feature
	is the column selection method and the (near) end of line
	selection. TextMate offers a clipboard history, so multiple
	items can be retrieved. TextMate can be customized to a
	very large extent.}}
}

@article{maps:46-05,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{13-15}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{294kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sytse Knypstra}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}/works}},
 keywords  = {{Editor, Synctex, scripts}},
 abstract  = {{Van de vele beschikbare {\TeX}- ({\LaTeX}-, Con{\TeX}t) editors is
	{\TeX}works een vrij nieuwe. Hij munt uit door zijn eenvoud
	in de gebruikersinterface, de koppeling tussen brontekst en
	pdf-resultaat en door een grote mate van flexibiliteit. Met
	behulp van scripts kan men in principe iedere gewenste
	optie zelf toevoegen.}}
}

@article{maps:46-06,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{NL}},
 pages     = {{16-22}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{648kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{{\TeX}Studio: speciaal voor {\LaTeX} starters}},
 abstract  = {{{\TeX}Studio is de primaire {\LaTeX} editor bij de {\TeX}Live
	installatie van onze universiteit. In dit stuk wil ik
	laten zien waarom ik voor deze editor heb gekozen en waarom
	{\TeX}Studio interessant kan zijn speciaal voor de beginnende
	{\LaTeX}-gebruiker en voor een {\LaTeX}-cursus.}}
}

@article{maps:46-07,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{23-86}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{5104kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{PSlib.eps Catalogue, preliminary and abridged version}},
 keywords  = {{Apollonius, Bluebook.eps, Cantor, CD-DVD label, Deubert, Escher, flowcharts, fractals, Gabo, Julia, Koch, Lancaster, Lauwerier, length Bézier curve, Lévy, Lindenmayer, Mandelbrot, Mondriaan, Op Art, orthogonal circles, Photoshop, pie chart, pi decimals, PostScript, projection, PSlib.eps, Pythagoras Tree, smiley, Soto, stars, (plain) {\TeX}, text along path, tiling, toroid, SoC (Separation of Concerns), Schrofer, Vasarely. Yin Yang}},
 abstract  = {{A selection of PostScript definitions collected in my
	\verb|PSlib.eps| library and documented as e-book
	catalogue is presented. Now and then variant pictures
	have been included from \verb|pic.dat| which comes
	with \verb|Blue.tex|. Old Metafont codes have been
	included which may be useful for MetaPost programmers.
	Variants of pictures enriched by postprocessing in
	Photoshop show other possibilities. Escher's doughnut
	is a teaser which has to be done in MetaPost. Next to
	\verb|PSlib.eps| comes the file \verb|PDFsfromPSlib|,
	which contains the pictures in \verb|.pdf| format.
	The complete \verb|PSlib.eps|, \verb|PDFsfromPSlib|
	as well as the catalogue as e-book, will be released on
	occasion of NTG's 25th lustrum which will be celebrated in
	the fall of 2014, on \verb|www.ntg.nl|. A prerelease
	will be offered to the GUST's file server. The (static)
	library for {\TeX} alone pictures, \verb|pic.dat|, packaged
	with \verb|Blue.tex|, will be redistributed as well.}}
}

@article{maps:46-08,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{87-97}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{3581kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kees van der Laan}},
 title     = {{Spirals in PostScript}},
 keywords  = {{Acrobat Pro, Adobe, art, BLUe, Cardioid, Con{\TeX}t, Cornu, EPSF, Escher, FIFO, folium Descartes, function-grapher previewer, Gyre-logo, hidden lines, IDE (Integrated Development Environment), Jackowski, Lauwerier, Lemniscate, LIFO, Limaçon, Mathematica, MetaPost, Metafont, minimal encapsulated PostScript, minimal mark-up, minimal plain {\TeX}, Photoshop, polar coordinates, projection, PSlib, PSTricks, PSView, rotation of US, Ryćko, Spirals, spherical spiral, {\TeX}works, Voss.}},
 abstract  = {{Curves specified in Polar Coordinates can be elegantly
	programmed in PostScript with the rotate command; which
	performs rotations in User Space. This has been shown
	for the Cardioid, the Limaçon, the Lemniscate, the
	Archimedes and the Growth spiral. The Gyre-logo has been
	analyzed and imitated in PostScript. Printing of text
	along spiral-like belts on a sphere in the projection
	plane has been done, yielding poor man's typesetting text
	on a sphere in projection.}}
}

@article{maps:46-09,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{98-100}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{135kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{SciTE}},
}

@article{maps:46-10,
 type      = {{article}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{101-108}},
 year      = {{2015}},
 volume    = {{46}},
 size      = {{109kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{LUA in MetaPost}},
}

@book{maps:47,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN}},
 pages     = {{1-61}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{24294kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2017.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:47-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{34kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Michael Guravage}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel [Editorial]}},
}

@article{maps:47-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{3-7}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{99kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Kai Eigner}},
 title     = {{Using HarfBuzz as OpenType engine in {LuaTeX}},
}

@article{maps:47-03,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{9-19}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{843kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Absil}},
 title     = {{Music document publishing with LaTeX}},
 abstract  = {{ This article presents an overview of how to create various document types about music, such as articles, e-books and web presentations. It discusses the workflow, the set-up of a specific typesetting environment with definitions, tools and additional software. }}
}

@article{maps:47-04,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{21-27}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{73kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Block line-up — Putting items inline or ontop}},
 keywords  = {{combinations, line-up, placement of blocks}},
 abstract  = {{Described is a module for the placement of items either on the same horizontal line or on top of each other. Alignment and separation of the items can be varied in horizontal and vertical direction as required. Titles can be added and their location, style and color specified.}}
}

@article{maps:47-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{29-31}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{59kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Take Notes — Notes handling module}},
 abstract  = {{Module for processing notes. Notes are classified according to categorie and contain information about subject, date of intake, etc. The presentation of notes can be filtered according to several criteria.}}
}

@article{maps:47-06,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{33-43}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{9463kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Profiling Coffee / the hidden formula — Which goes to show how little we know}},
}

@article{maps:47-07,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{45-57}},
 year      = {{2017}},
 volume    = {{47}},
 size      = {{13696kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{W. Egger}},
 title     = {{Violin making — Setting up ConTeXt for typesetting the book}},
 abstract  = {{Woodworking is one of my passions. The project of making my own   violin is some kind of crown to the whole development. Throughout   the violin making lessons notes were made, sketches drawn and photos   taken. At home all sketches were turned into drawings. All   information is put together in a CONTEXT project from which it is   possible to compile/typeset a book. This article describes the setup   of the book in CONTEXT, shows the functioning of some macros and   presents two chapters of the book.}}
}

@book{maps:48,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-84}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{1974kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{Maps redactie}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2018.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:48-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{20kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Maps redactie}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel [Editorial]}},
}

@article{maps:48-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{3-45}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{851kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Karl Berry, editor}},
 title     = {{The TeX Live Guide — 2018}},
}

@article{maps:48-03,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{46-50}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{50kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Executing TeX}},
 abstract  = {{Much of the LUA code in CONTEXT originates from experiments. When it survives in the source code it is probably used, waiting to be used or kept for educational purposes. The functionality that we describe here has already been present for a while in CONTEXT, but improved a little starting with LUATEX\ 1.08 due to an extra helper. The code shown here is generic and not used in CONTEXT as such.}}
}

@article{maps:48-04,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{51-58}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{196kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Variable fonts}},
}

@article{maps:48-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{59-65}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{589kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Bogusław Jackowski, Piotr Pianowski & Piotr Strzelczyk}},
 title     = {{TeX Gyre text fonts revisited}},
}

@article{maps:48-06,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{66-69}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{402kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{TLaunch, the TeXLive Launcher}},
 abstract  = {{The TeXLive Launcher offers Windows users of a network TeXLive installation similar conveniences as a locally-installed TeXLive. It is easy to integrate additional TeX-related software.\endgraf This paper describes the launcher and its configuration. As an example, it shows how it is used at the Rijksuniversiteit Groningen.}}
}

@article{maps:48-07,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{70-75}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{423kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Norbert Preining}},
 title     = {{\texttt{updmap} and \texttt{fmtutil}—past and future changes}},
 abstract  = {{This article serves first as an introduction to two of the central utility programs in any TeXLive installation, \updmap and \fmtutil, describing the general functionality as well as the syntax of the configuration files. In addition, we report on changes that we have carried out over the last few years relating to the operation mode. These changes include switching to multiple configuration files, and the user-mode versus system-mode changes to be introduced in TeXLive 2017. Last but not least, we close with a list of best practices to help guide users.}}
}

@article{maps:48-08,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{77-80}},
 year      = {{2018}},
 volume    = {{48}},
 size      = {{37kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{NTG}},
 title     = {{Privacybeleid — Nederlandstalige TeX Gebruikersgroup [Privacy Policy — Dutch TeX User Group]}},
}

@book{maps:49,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-74}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{18332kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2019.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:49-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{1-2}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{26kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Van de penningmeester}},
 title     = {{Van de penningmeester [From the treasurer]}},
}

@article{maps:49-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{8809kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Verslag 57ste NTG bijeenkomst [Report 57th NTG meeting]}},
}

@article{maps:49-03,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{5-5}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{309kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Tim van de Kamp}},
 title     = {{Impressie hackerskamp SHA-2017 [Impression hacker camp SHA-2017]}},
 keywords  = {{hackerskamp, SHA}},
 abstract  = {{Last year there was a large hacker camp on the Flevopolder. Because TeXnicians can also call themselves "hackers", there was even a real "LaTeX village" present at the camp this year. A short report of the camp.}}
}

@article{maps:49-04,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{6-12}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{97kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Take Notes — Take Two — Notes handling module revised and extended{\kern -12pt}},
 abstract  = {{Second, revised and extended, version of a module for processing of notes. Notes are classified according to category/subcategory and can contain information about subject, author, date, source, etc. The typesetting of the notes can be filtered according to several criteria. Many aspects of the formatting are easily configurable.}}
}

@article{maps:49-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{13-26}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{506kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Bits and Pieces from ConTeXt mailing list — A Collection of TeX and \MetaFont Notes}},
 abstract  = {{My Takenotes module for processing notes is used to present a selection from the notes collected mainly from the \ConTeXt users group on the internet.}}
}

@article{maps:49-06,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{27-28}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{38kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{LuaTeX 1.10, a stable release}},
}

@article{maps:49-07,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{29-30}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{39kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Basic image formats}},
}

@article{maps:49-08,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{31-34}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Is TeX really slow?}},
}

@article{maps:49-09,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{35-36}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{304kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dennis van Dok}},
 title     = {{Dagboek van een Informaticus [Diary of a Computer Scientist]}},
}

@article{maps:49-10,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{37-38}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{346kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ernst van der Storm}},
 title     = {{Belangrijke onderdelen voor een programmaboekje [Important parts for a program booklet]}},
 keywords  = {{gedicht met vertaling, kolommen, bladvullende kop, programmaboekje}},
 abstract  = {{For many years I have been making program booklets for the Nieuwegeins Kamerkoor, and always with LaTeX, resp. LuaTeX. This article describes some macros I used to create the booklet. Aligning a song text on the page — usually A5 — and its translation is usually manual work. The package \emph{verse} turned out to be unsuitable, this article contains an alternative.}}
}

@article{maps:49-11,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{39-40}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{50kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{MuPDF Tools}},
 abstract  = {{The application MUPDF (mupdf.com) is a very fast, portable, open-source PDF previewer and development toolkit actively supported by Artifex, the creators of GhostScript (artifex.com).  But MUPDF is not \emph{just} a very fast, portable, open-source PDF previewer and toolkit.  It also comes with a handy collection of command-line tools that are easily overlooked.   The command-line tools allow you to annotate, edit, and convert documents to other formats such as  HTML, SVG, PDF, and PNG. You can also write scripts to manipulate documents using Javascript.   This small paper gives a quick overview of the possibilities.}}
}

@article{maps:49-12,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{41-42}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{539kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Een kleine wegwijzer naar TeX documentatie [A little signpost to TeX documentation]}},
 abstract  = {{It can be difficult to find the information you need, and that includes TeX and LaTeX users. But I hope to show here that you usually don't have to search long. TeX Live and MiKTeX install almost complete documentation ootnote{With TeX Live this is an installation option. Online there are also very complete and easily searchable overviews.}}
}

@article{maps:49-13,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{43-48}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{2583kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Ernst van der Storm}},
 title     = {{Veel pagina’s scannen, één pdf [Scan many pages, one PDF]}},
 abstract  = {{Sometimes it is necessary for a choir or an orchestra to copy a piece from a music book, the result being a number of scanned images — usually of the jpeg or pdf type. \par %[2ex] Below I describe a method to make the margins of all pages straight and symmetrical with a few LaTeX macros, to display the scans on the entire page and to make the result as one PDF usable for printing. For example, correcting the trapezoidal shape of a scan is only possible with more specific software such as DigiKam.\par Using an editor with column editing options can be useful.}}
}

@article{maps:49-14,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{49-53}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{1029kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Rens Baardman}},
 title     = {{Writing my thesis with TeX — A report from the battlefields}},
}

@article{maps:49-15,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{54-57}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{61kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Following up on LuaTeXvadjust{\kern 11pt}},
}

@article{maps:49-16,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{58-70}},
 year      = {{2019}},
 volume    = {{49}},
 size      = {{5299kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Piet van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{LaTeX on the Road — An adventure with LaTeX while travelling light}},
 keywords  = {{LaTeX, travelling, iPad, Overleaf, git, distributed version management, Github}},
 abstract  = {{This article describes the adventures that I had while working on a small TeX project without my beloved laptop at hand. With only an iPad to do the work and without a local TeX system installed on it there were several challenges. I document them here so that others can enjoy the struggles I had and can benefit from the solutions when they encounter similar situations.}}
}

@book{maps:50,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{DE/EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-78}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{8767kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{maps redactie}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2020.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:50-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{23kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{maps redactie}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel [Editorial]}},
}

@article{maps:50-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{2-2}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Waarom is een NTG lidmaatschap  belangrijk? [Why is an NTG membership important?]}},
}

@article{maps:50-03,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{3-4}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{1201kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Koffiedik kijken [watch coffee grounds]}},
}

@article{maps:50-04,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{5-8}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{68kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dennis van Dok}},
 title     = {{Dagboek van een Informaticus [Diary of a Computer Scientist]}},
}

@article{maps:50-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{9-11}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{1340kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Verslag van de bezorger}},
 title     = {{Verslag van de bezorger [Report from the delivery person]}},
}

@article{maps:50-06,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{12-12}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{2224kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{NTG oudheden [NTG antiquities]}},
}

@article{maps:50-07,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{13-14}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{358kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{The sound of data — Electronic TeX promotion in the nineties}},
}

@article{maps:50-08,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{15-17}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{55kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Floris van Manen}},
 title     = {{De duizend-dagen-klok — elke dag telt [The Thousand Day Clock — Every Day Counts]}},
}

@article{maps:50-09,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{German}},
 pages     = {{18-24}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{512kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Markus Kohm}},
 title     = {{\texttt{fancyhdr} und \texttt{scrlayer} in trauter Zweisamkeit [\texttt{ fancyhdr } and \texttt{ scrlayer } in cozy togetherness]}},
 abstract  = {{There are various packages on CTAN that can be used to change the page style of a document. One of the most popular is likely to be \texttt{ fancyhdr }. Another, more basic package is the KOMAscript package \texttt{ scrlayer }. With its layer model, this package goes far beyond what a page style package usually does. Therefore, soon after the release of \texttt{ scrlayer }, the desire was expressed to be able to use the layers of \texttt{ scrlayer } together with the page styles of \texttt{ fancyhdr }. With the experimental package \texttt{ scrlayer-fancyhdr } this is now possible.}}
}

@article{maps:50-10,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{25-30}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{1312kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Sergey Slyusarev}},
 title     = {{Oliver Byrne’s “The first six  books of the Elements of Euclid”  in ConTeXt and MetaPost}},
}

@article{maps:50-11,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{31-44}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{189kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Taco Hoekwater}},
 title     = {{XML to PDF with ConTeXt}},
}

@article{maps:50-12,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{German}},
 pages     = {{45-45}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{207kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Herbert Voß}},
 title     = {{Schriften für mehrsprachige Texte [Fonts for multilingual texts]}},
}

@article{maps:50-13,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{46-48}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{341kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Philippe Vanoverbeke}},
 title     = {{A thing of beauty  is a joy for ever — 29 jaar NTG lid, dat doet iets met een mens … [A thing of beauty is a joy for ever — 29 years of NTG member, that does something to a person…]}},
 abstract  = {{After just under three decades, I have finally decided to no longer renew my membership. Frans Goddijn asked me for a report about my experiences with LaTeX/TeX since 'then days' in the early 90s until now… A long story of course, but also nice for me to look back at the past.}}
}

@article{maps:50-14,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{49-52}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Performance again}},
}

@article{maps:50-15,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{53-56}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{64kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{All those TeX’s}},
}

@article{maps:50-16,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{57-58}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{48kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Hidden treasures}},
}

@article{maps:50-17,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{59-60}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{308kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Frans Goddijn}},
 title     = {{Knuth en Schuh}},
}

@article{maps:50-18,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{61-63}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{326kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Dennis Holierhoek}},
 title     = {{Mijn leven met TeX als student [My life with TeX as a student]}},
}

@article{maps:50-19,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{65-74}},
 year      = {{2020}},
 volume    = {{50}},
 size      = {{654kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{ThreeSix — Don Knuths first colorfont?}},
}

@book{maps:51,
 type      = {{book}},
 language  = {{EN/NL}},
 pages     = {{1-102}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{2615kb}},
 series    = {{MAPS}},
 publisher = {{NTG}},
 editor    = {{maps redactie}},
 title     = {{MAPS 2021.1}},
 keywords  = {{NTG, MAPS}},
 abstract  = {{NTG's magazine}}
}

@article{maps:51-01,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{1-1}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{18kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{maps redactie}},
 title     = {{Redactioneel [Editorial]}},
}

@article{maps:51-02,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{2-2}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Waarom is een NTG lidmaatschap  belangrijk? [Why is an NTG membership important?]}},
}

@article{maps:51-03,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{3-6}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{184kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Proud or ashamed}},
}

@article{maps:51-04,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{7-8}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{36kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Lost in fonts}},
}

@article{maps:51-05,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{9-12}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{100kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{UTF8 in MetaPost}},
}

@article{maps:51-06,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{13-24}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{89kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans Hagen}},
 title     = {{Extensions related to  programming macros}},
}

@article{maps:51-07,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{25-39}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{1003kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{J.A.M. Vermaseren}},
 title     = {{Playing with Axodraw}},
 abstract  = {{This paper shows some of the features of Axodraw. It puts emphasis on applications, not only in the field of physics, but also in completely unrelated fields like mathematical tiling constructions, fashion patterns or the design of sudokus.}}
}

@article{maps:51-08,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{40-64}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{515kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Tomáš Szaniszlo}},
 title     = {{Two Questions and Answer Sessions by Donald Knuth at FI MU}},
 keywords  = {{Donald Knuth, Computer Programming as Art, Boundless Interests, Q&A}},
 abstract  = {{In October 2019, the Faculty of Informatics, Masaryk University, hosted Donald Knuth as a guest who led two questions and answers sessions at this occasion dedicated to the themes of Computer Science and art. Besides some background on these lectures, you can also find their transcripts in this article.}}
}

@article{maps:51-09,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{65-68}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{272kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Translations from a Vocabulary — Handling translation into various languages}},
 abstract  = {{Formerly part of the module hvdm-xml but now split off into an independent module with its own description. Used for making other modules language sensitive. The module is especially tailored for XML use.}}
}

@article{maps:51-10,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{69-76}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{90kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Hans van der Meer}},
 title     = {{Macros and Lua snippets — Helper macros mostly in Lua}},
 keywords  = {{Lua, macro, file, font, list, date}},
 abstract  = {{Described is a module containing a number of helper macros, many of them programmed in Lua.}}
}

@article{maps:51-11,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{English}},
 pages     = {{77-78}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{343kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Jerzy Ludwichowski}},
 title     = {{gust e-foundry font projects, closing report 2019—2020}},
}

@article{maps:51-12,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{79-96}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{570kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Pieter van Oostrum}},
 title     = {{De ontwikkeling van het LaTeX package \texttt{fancyhdr} — Een historisch en technisch overzicht [The development of the LaTeX package \texttt{fancyhdr} — A historical and technical overview]}},
 keywords  = {{LaTeX, package, fancyhdr, headers, footers, versiebeheer, testen}},
 abstract  = {{This article provides an overview of the development of the LaTeX package \texttt{fancyhdr}, and the tools I use for this. An overview is also given of the method of testing.}}
}

@article{maps:51-13,
 type      = {{verslag}},
 language  = {{Dutch}},
 pages     = {{97-98}},
 year      = {{2021}},
 volume    = {{51}},
 size      = {{307kb}},
 journal   = {{MAPS}},
 author    = {{Siep Kroonenberg}},
 title     = {{Ontwikkelingen in TeXLive [Developments in TeXLive]}},
}